WO2022080078A1 - Curable composition, thermally conductive material, thermally conductive sheet, and device with thermally conductive layer - Google Patents

Curable composition, thermally conductive material, thermally conductive sheet, and device with thermally conductive layer Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2022080078A1
WO2022080078A1 PCT/JP2021/033948 JP2021033948W WO2022080078A1 WO 2022080078 A1 WO2022080078 A1 WO 2022080078A1 JP 2021033948 W JP2021033948 W JP 2021033948W WO 2022080078 A1 WO2022080078 A1 WO 2022080078A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
group
compound
heat conductive
mass
epoxy
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2021/033948
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
誠一 人見
大介 林
慶太 高橋
輝樹 新居
信 小澤
明希 中道
Original Assignee
富士フイルム株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 富士フイルム株式会社 filed Critical 富士フイルム株式会社
Priority to JP2022557294A priority Critical patent/JPWO2022080078A1/ja
Publication of WO2022080078A1 publication Critical patent/WO2022080078A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08GMACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED OTHERWISE THAN BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING UNSATURATED CARBON-TO-CARBON BONDS
    • C08G59/00Polycondensates containing more than one epoxy group per molecule; Macromolecules obtained by polymerising compounds containing more than one epoxy group per molecule using curing agents or catalysts which react with the epoxy groups
    • C08G59/18Macromolecules obtained by polymerising compounds containing more than one epoxy group per molecule using curing agents or catalysts which react with the epoxy groups ; e.g. general methods of curing
    • C08G59/40Macromolecules obtained by polymerising compounds containing more than one epoxy group per molecule using curing agents or catalysts which react with the epoxy groups ; e.g. general methods of curing characterised by the curing agents used
    • C08G59/62Alcohols or phenols
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08GMACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED OTHERWISE THAN BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING UNSATURATED CARBON-TO-CARBON BONDS
    • C08G65/00Macromolecular compounds obtained by reactions forming an ether link in the main chain of the macromolecule
    • C08G65/34Macromolecular compounds obtained by reactions forming an ether link in the main chain of the macromolecule from hydroxy compounds or their metallic derivatives
    • C08G65/38Macromolecular compounds obtained by reactions forming an ether link in the main chain of the macromolecule from hydroxy compounds or their metallic derivatives derived from phenols
    • C08G65/40Macromolecular compounds obtained by reactions forming an ether link in the main chain of the macromolecule from hydroxy compounds or their metallic derivatives derived from phenols from phenols (I) and other compounds (II), e.g. OH-Ar-OH + X-Ar-X, where X is halogen atom, i.e. leaving group
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08GMACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED OTHERWISE THAN BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING UNSATURATED CARBON-TO-CARBON BONDS
    • C08G73/00Macromolecular compounds obtained by reactions forming a linkage containing nitrogen with or without oxygen or carbon in the main chain of the macromolecule, not provided for in groups C08G12/00 - C08G71/00
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08GMACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED OTHERWISE THAN BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING UNSATURATED CARBON-TO-CARBON BONDS
    • C08G73/00Macromolecular compounds obtained by reactions forming a linkage containing nitrogen with or without oxygen or carbon in the main chain of the macromolecule, not provided for in groups C08G12/00 - C08G71/00
    • C08G73/06Polycondensates having nitrogen-containing heterocyclic rings in the main chain of the macromolecule
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08JWORKING-UP; GENERAL PROCESSES OF COMPOUNDING; AFTER-TREATMENT NOT COVERED BY SUBCLASSES C08B, C08C, C08F, C08G or C08H
    • C08J5/00Manufacture of articles or shaped materials containing macromolecular substances
    • C08J5/18Manufacture of films or sheets
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08KUse of inorganic or non-macromolecular organic substances as compounding ingredients
    • C08K3/00Use of inorganic substances as compounding ingredients
    • C08K3/28Nitrogen-containing compounds
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08KUse of inorganic or non-macromolecular organic substances as compounding ingredients
    • C08K3/00Use of inorganic substances as compounding ingredients
    • C08K3/38Boron-containing compounds
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08KUse of inorganic or non-macromolecular organic substances as compounding ingredients
    • C08K5/00Use of organic ingredients
    • C08K5/49Phosphorus-containing compounds
    • C08K5/50Phosphorus bound to carbon only
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08LCOMPOSITIONS OF MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS
    • C08L63/00Compositions of epoxy resins; Compositions of derivatives of epoxy resins
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08LCOMPOSITIONS OF MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS
    • C08L71/00Compositions of polyethers obtained by reactions forming an ether link in the main chain; Compositions of derivatives of such polymers
    • C08L71/08Polyethers derived from hydroxy compounds or from their metallic derivatives
    • C08L71/10Polyethers derived from hydroxy compounds or from their metallic derivatives from phenols
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08LCOMPOSITIONS OF MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS
    • C08L79/00Compositions of macromolecular compounds obtained by reactions forming in the main chain of the macromolecule a linkage containing nitrogen with or without oxygen or carbon only, not provided for in groups C08L61/00 - C08L77/00
    • C08L79/04Polycondensates having nitrogen-containing heterocyclic rings in the main chain; Polyhydrazides; Polyamide acids or similar polyimide precursors
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H01ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
    • H01LSEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
    • H01L23/00Details of semiconductor or other solid state devices
    • H01L23/34Arrangements for cooling, heating, ventilating or temperature compensation ; Temperature sensing arrangements
    • H01L23/36Selection of materials, or shaping, to facilitate cooling or heating, e.g. heatsinks
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H05ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H05KPRINTED CIRCUITS; CASINGS OR CONSTRUCTIONAL DETAILS OF ELECTRIC APPARATUS; MANUFACTURE OF ASSEMBLAGES OF ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
    • H05K1/00Printed circuits
    • H05K1/02Details
    • H05K1/03Use of materials for the substrate

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a curable composition, a heat conductive material, a heat conductive sheet, and a device with a heat conductive layer.
  • Patent Document 1 describes an epoxy resin containing a polyfunctional epoxy resin, a curing agent containing a novolak resin having a predetermined structural unit, and a nitride as a resin composition capable of achieving high thermal conductivity after curing.
  • a resin composition containing an inorganic filler containing particles is mentioned (claim 1).
  • the heat conductive material is required to have not only excellent heat conductivity but also excellent heat resistance in which performance is less likely to deteriorate even when continuously used at a high temperature.
  • the deterioration of the performance of the heat conductive material at high temperature is due to the insufficient Tg (glass transition point) of the heat conductive material. That is, if the Tg of the heat conductive material is insufficient, the adhesion between the heat conductive material and the object to which the heat transfer material should transfer becomes weak at high temperature, and the heat conductive material is removed from the object. The efficiency of heat transfer deteriorates. If the Tg of the heat conductive material is sufficiently high, the heat conductive material can continue to exhibit excellent heat conductivity, and the heat resistance becomes good. In the present specification, a high Tg of the heat conductive material is also referred to as excellent heat resistance of the heat conductive material.
  • Another object of the present invention is to provide a curable composition that provides a heat conductive material having excellent heat conductivity and heat resistance. Another object of the present invention is to provide a heat conductive material, a heat conductive sheet, and a device with a heat conductive layer relating to the curable composition.
  • Inorganic including A curable composition in which the above-mentioned inorganic substance contains an inorganic nitride.
  • Contains the above maleimide compounds The curable composition according to [1], wherein the maleimide compound is a compound represented by the general formula (1).
  • m represents 0 or 1.
  • n represents 0 or 1.
  • R 1 and R 2 independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
  • L 1 represents a divalent linking group.
  • [7] contains a surface modifier and The curable composition according to [5] or [6], wherein the boron nitride constitutes a surface-modified boron nitride together with the surface modifier adsorbed on the surface of the boron nitride.
  • [9] Contains the above maleimide compound and The curable composition according to [8], wherein the epoxy compound contains an epoxy compound having a viscosity at 25 ° C. of less than 1000 mPa ⁇ s.
  • [10] Contains the above maleimide compound and In the curable composition, the ratio of the number of hydroxyl groups contained in the phenol compound to the total number of epoxy groups contained in the epoxy compound is 1.2 / 1.0 to 2.0 / 1.0.
  • [11] The present invention according to any one of [8] to [10], wherein the phenol compound satisfies at least one of the requirements that the phenol compound has a triazine skeleton and the epoxy compound contains an epoxy compound having a triazine skeleton. Curable composition.
  • a curable composition that provides a heat conductive material having excellent heat conductivity and heat resistance. Further, according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a heat conductive material, a heat conductive sheet, and a device with a heat conductive layer relating to the curable composition.
  • the curable composition, the heat conductive material, the heat conductive sheet, and the device with the heat conductive layer of the present invention will be described in detail.
  • the description of the constituent elements described below may be based on the representative embodiments of the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to such embodiments.
  • the numerical range represented by using "-" means a range including the numerical values before and after "-" as the lower limit value and the upper limit value.
  • (meth) acryloyl group means “either one or both of acryloyl group and methacryloyl group”.
  • (meth) acrylamide group means “either one or both of an acrylamide group and a methacrylamide group”.
  • (meth) acrylic means “either one or both of acrylic and methacrylic”.
  • the acid anhydride group may be a monovalent group or a divalent group.
  • the acid anhydride group represents a monovalent group, a substitution obtained by removing an arbitrary hydrogen atom from an acid anhydride such as maleic anhydride, phthalic anhydride, pyromellitic anhydride, and trimellitic anhydride.
  • the group is mentioned.
  • the acid anhydride group represents a divalent group, the group represented by * -CO-O-CO- * is intended (* represents a bond position).
  • substituents and the like that do not specify substitution or non-substitution if possible, further substituents (for example, a group of substituents described later) are added to the groups as long as the desired effect is not impaired.
  • Y may be possessed.
  • alkyl group means a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group (an alkyl group which may have a substituent) as long as the desired effect is not impaired.
  • the type of the substituent, the position of the substituent, and the number of the substituents in the case of "may have a substituent” are not particularly limited. Examples of the number of substituents include one or two or more.
  • substituent examples include a monovalent non-metal atomic group excluding a hydrogen atom, and a group selected from the following substituent group Y is preferable.
  • halogen atom examples include a chlorine atom, a fluorine atom, a bromine atom, and an iodine atom.
  • Substituent group Y Halogen atoms (-F, -Br, -Cl, -I, etc.), hydroxyl groups, amino groups, carboxylic acid groups and their conjugate base groups, anhydrous carboxylic acid groups, cyanate ester groups, unsaturated polymerizable groups, epoxy groups, oxetanyl Group, aziridinyl group, thiol group, isocyanate group, thioisocyanate group, aldehyde group, alkoxy group, allyloxy group, alkylthio group, arylthio group, alkyldithio group, aryldithio group, N-alkylamino group, N, N-dialkylamino Group, N-arylamino group, N, N-diarylamino group, N-alkyl-N-arylamino group, acyloxy group, carbamoyloxy group, N-alkylcarbamoyloxy group, N-ary
  • sulfinamoyl group N-alkylsulfinamoyl group, N, N-dialkylsulfinamoyl group, N-arylsulfinamoyl group, N, N-diarylsulfinamoyl group, N-alkyl-N-arylsulfina Moil group, sulfamoyl group, N-alkyl sulfamoyl group, N, N-dialkyl sulfamoyl group, N-aryl sulfamoyl group, N, N-diaryl sulfamoyl group, N-alkyl-N-arylsul Famoyl group, N-acylsulfamoyl group and its conjugated base group, N-alkylsulfonylsulfamoyl group (-SO 2 NHSO 2 (alkyl)) and its conjugated base group, N-arylsulfon
  • each of the above-mentioned groups may further have a substituent (for example, one or more groups among the above-mentioned groups), if possible.
  • a substituent for example, one or more groups among the above-mentioned groups
  • an aryl group which may have a substituent is also included as a group selectable from the substituent group Y.
  • the number of carbon atoms of the group is, for example, 1 to 20.
  • the number of atoms other than the hydrogen atom of the group selected from the substituent group Y is, for example, 1 to 30.
  • these substituents may or may not form a ring by bonding with each other or with a group to be substituted, if possible.
  • the alkyl group (or the alkyl group portion in a group containing an alkyl group as a partial structure such as an alkoxy group) may be a cyclic alkyl group (cycloalkyl group) and has one or more cyclic structures as a partial structure. It may be an alkyl group.
  • composition The curable composition of the present invention (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “composition”) is one or both of a phenol compound, a maleimide compound having one or more maleimide groups, and a cyanate compound having one or more cyanate groups. And inorganic substances.
  • the above-mentioned inorganic substances include inorganic nitrides.
  • Maleimide compounds having one or more maleimide groups and cyanate compounds having one or more cyanate groups are also collectively referred to as "specific compounds”.
  • the composition of the present invention contains an inorganic nitride having excellent thermal conductivity as an inorganic substance.
  • the organic component includes a phenol compound and a specific compound.
  • the specific compound in the composition can react with the phenol compound to form a heat conductive material (cured product) containing an inorganic nitride, and the polymer structure of such a heat conductive material has a high density, and the heat conduction of the heat conductive material is high. It is presumed that the improvement of the property and the heat resistance (Tg) could be realized.
  • the composition may also contain an epoxy compound, and in such a case, the heat conductivity and heat resistance (Tg) of the heat conductive material are more excellent.
  • Tg heat conductivity and heat resistance
  • the polymer structure generated by the reaction of the phenol compound with the specific compound and the polymer structure generated by the reaction of the phenol compound with the epoxy compound form an IPN structure (interpenetrating network structure), and further, epoxy. It is presumed that the hydroxyl group generated from the group undergoes a cross-linking reaction with a specific compound (reaction between the hydroxyl group derived from the epoxy group and the double bond of the maleimide group, etc.) to form a denser polymer structure.
  • the heat conductive material formed from the composition of the present invention has good insulating properties.
  • the effect of the present invention is that at least one of the heat conductivity, heat resistance, insulating property, hygroscopicity suppressing property, and solder heat resistance of the heat conductive material formed by using the composition of the present invention is excellent. Is also said to be excellent.
  • the composition of the present invention comprises a phenolic compound.
  • the phenol compound is a compound having 1 or more (preferably 2 or more, more preferably 2 to 10) hydroxyl groups (phenolic hydroxyl groups) directly bonded to the aromatic ring group.
  • the phenol compound preferably has a triazine skeleton.
  • a phenol compound means having one or more (for example, 1 to 5) triazine ring groups in the compound.
  • the phenol compound is preferably a compound represented by the general formula (Z).
  • E 1 to E 6 independently represent a single bond, -NH-, or -NR-.
  • R represents a substituent.
  • the substituent represented by R include a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms.
  • E 1 to E 6 are preferably -NH- or -NR-, and more preferably -NH-.
  • B 1 represents a single bond or a k + 1 valent organic group.
  • B 2 represents a single bond or an l + 1 valent organic group.
  • B 3 represents a single bond or m + 1 valent organic group.
  • B 4 represents a single bond or n + 1 valent organic group.
  • the values of k, l, m, and n in the above-mentioned k + 1-valent organic group, l + 1-valent organic group, m + 1-valent organic group, and n + 1-valent organic group are specified in the general formula (Z). , K, l, m, and n.
  • the value of m in the m + 1 valent organic group represented by B 3 indicates the number of X 3 to which the B 3 is bonded. Is the same as the value of.
  • Examples of the organic group represented by B 1 to B 4 include a group obtained by removing j hydrogen atoms from a hydrocarbon which may have a hetero atom having 1 to 20 carbon atoms.
  • j means k + 1, l + 1, m + 1, or n + 1.
  • an aliphatic hydrocarbon having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent and a carbon which may have a substituent may be used.
  • examples thereof include one or more hydrocarbons selected from the group consisting of an aliphatic ring having the number of 3 to 20 and an aromatic ring having 3 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent.
  • One or more of the divalent linking groups selected from may be combined.
  • the aliphatic hydrocarbon having 1 to 20 carbon atoms include methane, ethane, propane, butane, pentane, hexane, and heptane.
  • Examples of the aliphatic ring having 3 to 20 carbon atoms include a cyclohexane ring, a cycloheptane ring, a norbornane ring, and an adamantane ring.
  • Examples of the aromatic ring having 3 to 20 carbon atoms include aromatic hydrocarbons having 6 to 20 carbon atoms and aromatic heterocycles having 3 to 20 carbon atoms.
  • Examples of the aromatic hydrocarbon having 6 to 20 carbon atoms include a benzene ring, a naphthalene ring, an anthracene ring and the like
  • examples of the aromatic heterocyclic ring having 3 to 20 carbon atoms include a furan ring, a pyrrole ring and a thiophene. Examples thereof include a ring, a pyridine ring, a thiazole ring, a carbazole ring, an indole ring, and a benzothiazole ring.
  • k, l, m, and n each independently represent an integer of 0 or more.
  • the total of k, l, r ⁇ m, and n is 2 or more, preferably an integer of 2 to 12, and more preferably an integer of 4 to 8.
  • the value of m in "r ⁇ m" is an average value of m that may exist in a plurality of values.
  • an integer of 0 to 5 is preferable, and an integer of 1 to 2 is more preferable, respectively.
  • k is preferably 1 or more (for example, 1 to 2)
  • l is preferably 1 or more (for example, 1 to 2)
  • m is preferably 1 or more (for example, 1 to 2).
  • n is 1 or more (for example, 1 to 2).
  • L represents a divalent organic group.
  • the divalent organic group include a divalent aromatic ring group which may have a substituent, a divalent aliphatic hydrocarbon group which may have a substituent, and a substituent. Examples thereof include a divalent aliphatic ring group, -N ( RNA )-, -CO-, and a group combining these groups.
  • R NA represents an organic group. The group exemplified as the divalent organic group may further have —O—, —S—, —N (RN) ⁇ , and a group in which these are combined.
  • RN represents a substituent. Examples of the substituent represented by RN include a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms.
  • the aromatic ring group, the aliphatic hydrocarbon group, and the substituent that the aliphatic ring group may have include, for example, a linear or branched alkyl having 1 to 5 carbon atoms. The group etc. can be mentioned
  • Examples of the divalent aromatic ring group include a divalent aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms and a divalent aromatic heterocyclic group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms.
  • Examples of the aromatic ring constituting the divalent aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms include a monocyclic aromatic ring such as a benzene ring; a naphthalene ring, and a polycyclic aromatic ring such as an anthracene ring;
  • Examples of the aromatic heterocycle constituting a divalent aromatic heterocyclic group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms include a furan ring, a pyrrole ring, a thiophene ring, a pyridine ring, and a monocycle such as a thiazole ring.
  • aromatic rings polycyclic aromatic rings such as benzothiazole rings, carbazole rings, and indole rings; and the like.
  • divalent aromatic ring group as L, a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from the above example can be mentioned.
  • divalent aliphatic hydrocarbon group examples include an alkylene group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, and specifically, a methylene group, an ethylene group, a propylene group, a butylene group, a pentylene group, a hexylene group and a methyl group. Examples thereof include a hexylene group and a heptylene group.
  • Examples of the aliphatic ring constituting the divalent aliphatic ring group include a cyclohexane ring, a cycloheptane ring, a norbornane ring, and an adamantane ring.
  • As the aliphatic ring group as L a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from the above example can be mentioned.
  • a divalent aromatic ring group which may have a substituent a divalent aliphatic hydrocarbon group which may have a substituent, and a divalent aliphatic ring group which may have a substituent.
  • a divalent aliphatic hydrocarbon group which may have a substituent
  • a divalent aliphatic ring group which may have a substituent.
  • a group in which -O-, -S-, -NR N- or -CO- is combined, not only a divalent linking group consisting of two or more of these, but also a group of the same type (for example, an example). It may be a divalent linking group in which two or more aromatic ring groups) are combined via a single bond.
  • L in the above general formula (P2) may have a divalent aromatic ring group or a substituent which may have a substituent. It is a divalent organic group having at least one selected from the group consisting of a divalent aliphatic ring group which may have and an alkylene group which may have a branch having 2 or more carbon atoms. It is preferable, and a divalent organic group having a divalent aromatic ring group which may have a substituent may be more preferable because the thermal conductivity is more excellent.
  • r is an integer of 0 or more. r is preferably an integer of 0 to 20, and more preferably an integer of 0 to 10.
  • X 1 to X 4 each independently represent an aromatic ring group having a phenolic hydroxyl group.
  • the "aromatic ring group having a phenolic hydroxyl group” may be any aromatic ring group having one or more (for example, 1 to 4) hydroxyl groups (phenolic hydroxyl groups) directly bonded to the aromatic ring.
  • the aromatic ring group may or may not have a substituent other than the hydroxyl group.
  • the aromatic ring group may be monocyclic or polycyclic, and may have a heteroatom as a ring member atom.
  • the number of ring member atoms of the aromatic ring group is preferably 5 to 15, more preferably 6 to 10, and even more preferably 6.
  • the aromatic ring group is preferably a benzene ring group.
  • a substituent that the aromatic ring group may have other than the hydroxyl group a substituent having 1 to 6 carbon atoms is preferable, a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms is more preferable, and a linear chain having 1 to 6 carbon atoms is more preferable. Alternatively, a branched alkyl group is more preferable.
  • k X 1 , l X 2 , r ⁇ m X 3 , and n X 4 is a phenolic hydroxyl group. It is also preferable that the aromatic ring group has a substituent arranged at the ortho position of the phenolic hydroxyl group. The substituent may be present in only one of the ortho positions of the phenolic hydroxyl group, or may be present in both.
  • the value of m in "r ⁇ m" is an average value of m that may exist in a plurality of values.
  • the "substituted group arranged at the ortho position” is preferably a substituent having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, more preferably a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, and a linear or branched chain having 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • Alkyl groups in the form are more preferable.
  • the aromatic ring groups other than the "aromatic ring group having a phenolic hydroxyl group and a substituent arranged at the ortho position of the phenolic hydroxyl group” are It may or may not have a substituent other than a hydroxyl group (phenolic hydroxyl group).
  • the aromatic ring group other than the "aromatic ring group having a phenolic hydroxyl group and a substituent arranged at the ortho position of the phenolic hydroxyl group” include a hydroxyphenyl group.
  • aromatic ring groups having phenolic hydroxyl groups represented by any of X 1 to X 4
  • at least one is “phenolic hydroxyl group and phenol”. It is also preferable that it is an aromatic ring group other than the "aromatic ring group having a substituent arranged at the ortho position of the sex hydroxyl group”.
  • aromatic ring groups having phenolic hydroxyl groups represented by X 1 to X 4 there are also aromatic ring groups other than "aromatic ring groups having a phenolic hydroxyl group and a substituent arranged at the ortho position of the phenolic hydroxyl group”. It is considered that the symmetry of the compound as a whole is broken, the melting point of the compound is lowered, and the handleability of the semi-cured film formed from the composition is improved.
  • the phenol compound is also preferably a compound represented by the general formula (Z1).
  • the phenol compound preferably contains a compound represented by the general formula (Z1), and the phenol compound may be the compound itself represented by the general formula (Z1).
  • the content of the compound represented by the general formula (Z1) is preferably 10 to 100% by mass, more preferably 25 to 100% by mass, still more preferably 50 to 100% by mass, based on the total mass of the phenol compound.
  • r represents an integer of 0 or more. r is preferably an integer of 0 to 20, and more preferably an integer of 0 to 10.
  • L represents a divalent organic group.
  • the divalent organic group represented by L in the general formula (Z1) is, for example, the same as the divalent organic group represented by L in the general formula (Z1).
  • R Z represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
  • the substituent represented by RZ is preferably a substituent having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, more preferably a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, and a linear or linear group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms. It is more preferably a branched alkyl group.
  • At least one (preferably 30% or more, more preferably 50% or more, still more preferably 65% or more, preferably 90% or less, more preferably 80) of (3 + r) RZs present in the general formula (Z1). % Or less) may represent a substituent.
  • At least one (for example, 1 to 2) of R Z existing in (3 + r) in the general formula (Z1) may represent a hydrogen atom.
  • the above R z (preferably R z which is a substituent) is bonded to the above benzene ring group. It is also preferable that it exists in the para position with respect to NH.
  • the phenol compound is also preferably a compound represented by the general formula (Z2).
  • the phenol compound preferably contains a compound represented by the general formula (Z2), and the phenol compound may be the compound itself represented by the general formula (Z2).
  • the content of the compound represented by the general formula (Z2) is preferably 10 to 100% by mass, more preferably 25 to 100% by mass, still more preferably 50 to 100% by mass, based on the total mass of the phenol compound.
  • R Z represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent. It is also preferable that at least one of the two R Zs represents a substituent, and it is also preferable that both represent a substituent.
  • the substituent represented by RZ is preferably a substituent having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, more preferably a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, and an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms. Is even more preferable.
  • the alkyl group may be linear or branched. It is also preferable that the alkyl group is unsubstituted.
  • the two Rz in the general formula (Z2) may be the same or different from each other.
  • phenolic compounds include, for example, benzene polyols such as bisphenol A, F, S, AD, benzenediol or benzenetriol, biphenylaralkyl-type phenolic resins, phenol novolac resins, cresol novolac resins, and aromatic hydrocarbon formaldehyde resin modifications.
  • Phenolic resin dicyclopentadienephenol addition type resin, phenol aralkyl resin, polyhydric phenol novolac resin synthesized from polyhydric hydroxy compound and formaldehyde, naphthol aralkyl resin, trimethylolmethane resin, tetraphenylol ethane resin, naphthol novolac resin , Naftorphenol co-condensed novolak resin, naphthol cresol co-condensed novolak resin, biphenyl-modified phenol resin, biphenyl-modified naphthol resin, aminotriazine-modified phenol resin, alkoxy group-containing aromatic ring-modified novolak resin and the like are also preferable.
  • the molecular weight of the phenol compound is preferably 225 to 2000, more preferably 225 to 1000.
  • the molecular weight is a weight average molecular weight.
  • the hydroxyl group content of the phenol compound is preferably 2.0 mmol / g or more, more preferably 4.0 mmol / g or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 25.0 mmol / g or less, more preferably 10.0 mmol / g or less.
  • the hydroxyl group content is intended to be the number of hydroxyl groups (preferably phenolic hydroxyl groups) possessed by 1 g of the phenol compound.
  • the phenol compound may or may not have an active hydrogen-containing group (carboxylic acid group or the like) capable of polymerizing with the epoxy compound.
  • the lower limit of the active hydrogen content (total content of hydrogen atoms in hydroxyl groups, carboxylic acid groups, etc.) of the phenol compound is preferably 2.0 mmol / g or more, and more preferably 4.0 mmol / g or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 25.0 mmol / g or less, more preferably 10.0 mmol / g or less.
  • the composition of the present invention may contain a compound having a group capable of reacting with the epoxy compound (also referred to as “other active hydrogen-containing compound”).
  • the mass ratio of the content of other active hydrogen-containing compounds to the content of the phenol compound is preferably 0 to 1, more preferably 0 to 0.1, and 0 to 0.05. Is more preferable.
  • the content of the phenol compound in the composition is preferably 3 to 90% by mass, more preferably 5 to 50% by mass, still more preferably 7 to 40% by mass, based on the total solid content of the composition.
  • the solid content is intended as a component forming a heat conductive material and does not contain a solvent.
  • the component forming the heat conductive material referred to here may be a component whose chemical structure changes by reacting (polymerizing) when forming the heat conductive material. Further, if it is a component forming a heat conductive material, even if its property is liquid, it is regarded as a solid content.
  • the composition of the present invention contains an epoxy compound.
  • An epoxy compound is a compound having at least one epoxy group (oxylanyl group) in one molecule.
  • the epoxy group is a group obtained by removing one or more hydrogen atoms (preferably one hydrogen atom) from the oxylan ring. If possible, the epoxy group may further have a substituent (a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, or the like).
  • the number of epoxy groups contained in the epoxy compound is preferably 2 or more, more preferably 2 to 1000, and even more preferably 2 to 40 in one molecule.
  • the molecular weight of the epoxy compound is preferably 150 or more, more preferably 300 or more.
  • the upper limit of the molecular weight is not limited, and for example, 100,000 or less is preferable, and 10,000 or less is more preferable.
  • the molecular weight is a weight average molecular weight.
  • the number average molecular weight and the weight average molecular weight are the weight average molecular weights obtained in terms of polystyrene by gel permeation chromatography (GPC).
  • the epoxy group content of the epoxy compound is preferably 2.0 to 20.0 mmol / g, more preferably 5.0 to 15.0 mmol / g.
  • the epoxy group content is intended to be the number of epoxy groups contained in 1 g of the epoxy compound.
  • the epoxy compound also preferably has an aromatic ring group (preferably an aromatic hydrocarbon ring group).
  • the content of the epoxy compound having an aromatic ring group is preferably 5 to 100% by mass, more preferably 50 to 100% by mass, still more preferably 70 to 100% by mass, based on the total epoxy compound.
  • the epoxy compound may or may not exhibit liquid crystallinity. That is, the epoxy compound may be a liquid crystal compound. In other words, it may be a liquid crystal compound having an epoxy group.
  • the epoxy compound (which may be a liquid crystal epoxy compound) include a compound having at least a rod-like structure (rod-like compound) and a compound having at least a disk-like structure (disk-like compound). Can be mentioned.
  • the rod-shaped compound and the disk-shaped compound will be described in detail.
  • Examples of the epoxy compound which is a rod-shaped compound include azomethines, azoxys, cyanobiphenyls, cyanophenyl esters, benzoic acid esters, cyclohexanecarboxylic acid phenyl esters, cyanophenylcyclohexanes, cyano-substituted phenylpyrimidines, and alkoxy-substituted phenyls. Examples thereof include pyrimidines, phenyldioxans, trans, and alkenylcyclohexylbenzonitriles. Not only low molecular weight compounds as described above, but also high molecular weight compounds can be used.
  • the polymer compound is a polymer compound obtained by polymerizing a rod-shaped compound having a small molecule reactive group.
  • Preferred rod-shaped compounds include rod-shaped compounds represented by the following general formula (XXI).
  • Q 1 and Q 2 are independent epoxy groups, and L 111 , L 112 , L 113 , and L 114 independently represent a single bond or a divalent linking group, respectively. ..
  • a 111 and A 112 each independently represent a divalent linking group (spacer group) having 1 to 20 carbon atoms.
  • M represents a mesogen group.
  • the epoxy groups of Q1 and Q2 may or may not have a substituent.
  • L 111 , L 112 , L 113 , and L 114 each independently represent a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • the divalent linking groups represented by L 111 , L 112 , L 113 , and L 114 are independently -O-, -S-, -CO-, -NR 112- , and -CO-O, respectively.
  • R 112 is an alkyl group or a hydrogen atom having 1 to 7 carbon atoms.
  • L 113 and L 114 are preferably —O— independently of each other.
  • L 111 and L 112 are preferably single bonds independently of each other.
  • a 111 and A 112 each independently represent a divalent linking group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms.
  • the divalent linking group may contain heteroatoms such as non-adjacent oxygen and sulfur atoms.
  • an alkylene group, an alkenylene group, or an alkynylene group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms is preferable.
  • the above-mentioned alkylene group, alkenylene group, or alkynylene group may or may not have an ester group.
  • the divalent linking group is preferably linear, and the divalent linking group may or may not have a substituent.
  • substituents examples include a halogen atom (fluorine atom, chlorine atom, and bromine atom), a cyano group, a methyl group, and an ethyl group.
  • a 111 and A 112 are each independently preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, and more preferably a methylene group.
  • M represents a mesogen group, and examples of the mesogen group include known mesogen groups. Among them, the group represented by the following general formula (XXII) is preferable.
  • W 1 and W 2 independently represent a divalent cyclic alkylene group, a divalent cyclic alkaneylene group, an arylene group, or a divalent heterocyclic group, respectively.
  • L 115 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • n represents an integer of 1 to 4.
  • W 1 and W 2 examples include 1,4-cyclohexenediyl, 1,4-cyclohexanediyl, 1,4-phenylene, pyrimidine-2,5-diyl, pyridine-2,5-diyl, 1,3. 4-Thiadiazole-2,5-diyl, 1,3,4-oxadiazole-2,5-diyl, naphthalene-2,6-diyl, naphthalene-1,5-diyl, thiophene-2,5-diyl, And pyridazine-3,6-zyl.
  • W 1 and W 2 may each have a substituent.
  • substituents include the groups exemplified in the above-mentioned substituent group Y, and more specifically, a halogen atom (fluorine atom, chlorine atom, bromine atom, and iodine atom), cyano group, and carbon.
  • An alkyl group having a number of 1 to 10 for example, a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, etc.
  • an alkoxy group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms for example, a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, etc.
  • a group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms for example, an acyl group.
  • An acyl group for example, a formyl group and an acetyl group, etc.
  • an alkoxycarbonyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms for example, a methoxycarbonyl group, an ethoxycarbonyl group, etc.
  • an acyloxy group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms for example, an acyloxy group.
  • Acetyloxy group, propionyloxy group, etc.), nitro group, trifluoromethyl group, difluoromethyl group and the like can be mentioned.
  • the plurality of W 1s may be the same or different from each other.
  • L 115 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • the divalent linking group represented by L 115 include the above-mentioned divalent linking groups represented by L 111 to L 114 , and examples thereof include -CO-O- and -O-CO-. , -CH 2 -O-, and -O-CH 2- .
  • the plurality of L 115s may be the same or different from each other.
  • the preferred skeleton of the basic skeleton of the mesogen group represented by the above general formula (XXII) is illustrated below.
  • the above-mentioned mesogen groups may be substituted with a substituent in these skeletons.
  • the biphenyl skeleton is preferable in that the obtained heat conductive material has more excellent heat conductivity.
  • the compound represented by the general formula (XXI) can be synthesized by referring to the method described in JP-A No. 11-513019 (WO97 / 00600).
  • the rod-shaped compound may be a monomer having a mesogen group described in JP-A No. 11-323162 and Japanese Patent No. 4118691.
  • the rod-shaped compound is preferably a compound represented by the general formula (E1).
  • LE1 independently represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. Of these, LE1 is preferably a divalent linking group.
  • the alkylene group may be linear, branched or cyclic, but a linear alkylene group having 1 to 2 carbon atoms is preferable.
  • a plurality of LE1s may be the same or different from each other.
  • LE2 is preferably single-bonded, -CO-O-, or -O-CO- independently of each other. When there are a
  • LE3 is a 5-membered or 6-membered aromatic ring group or a 5-membered or 6-membered ring which may independently have a single bond or a substituent. Represents a non-aromatic ring group or a polycyclic group composed of these rings. Examples of the aromatic ring group and the non-aromatic ring group represented by LE3 include 1,4-cyclohexanediyl group, 1,4-cyclohexendyl group and 1,4-phenylene which may have a substituent.
  • pyrimidin-2,5-diyl group pyridine-2,5-diyl group, 1,3,4-thiadiazol-2,5-diyl group, 1,3,4-oxadiazole-2,5-diyl
  • examples thereof include a group, a naphthalene-2,6-diyl group, a naphthalene-1,5-diyl group, a thiophene-2,5-diyl group, and a pyridazine-3,6-diyl group.
  • a transformer body is preferable.
  • LE3 is preferably a single bond, a 1,4-phenylene group, or a 1,4-cyclohexenediyl group.
  • the substituent of the group represented by LE3 is preferably an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, a halogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, or an acetyl group, and more preferably an alkyl group (preferably 1 carbon number). preferable.
  • the substituents may be the same or different.
  • the plurality of LE3s may be the same or different.
  • pe represents an integer of 0 or more.
  • pe is an integer of 2 or more, a plurality of ( -LE3 - LE2- ) may be the same or different from each other.
  • pe is preferably 0 to 2, more preferably 0 or 1, and even more preferably 0.
  • LE4 independently represents a substituent.
  • the substituent an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, a halogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, or an acetyl group are preferable, and an alkyl group (preferably 1 carbon number) is more preferable.
  • a plurality of LE4s may be the same or different from each other. Further, when le described below is an integer of 2 or more, a plurality of LE4s existing in the same ( LE4 ) le may be the same or different.
  • le independently represents an integer of 0 to 4. Among them, le is preferably 0 to 2 independently of each other. A plurality of le's may be the same or different from each other.
  • one or both of the two existing "epoxy groups-LE1-" are replaced with diglycidylaminoalkylene groups (preferably diglycidyl aminomethylene groups). Is also preferable.
  • the rod-shaped compound has a biphenyl skeleton in that the obtained heat conductive material has better heat conductivity.
  • the epoxy compound preferably has a biphenyl skeleton, and the epoxy compound in this case is preferably a rod-shaped compound.
  • the epoxy compound which is a disc-shaped compound, has a disc-shaped structure at least partially.
  • the disc-like structure has at least an alicyclic or aromatic ring.
  • the disk-shaped compound can form a columnar structure by forming a stacking structure by ⁇ - ⁇ interaction between molecules.
  • Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. examples thereof include the triphenylene structure described in 2012, 51, 7990-7793 or JP-A-7-306317, and the tri-substituted benzene structure described in JP-A-2007-002220 and JP-A-2010-2440338.
  • a heat conductive material showing high heat conductivity can be obtained.
  • the rod-shaped compound can conduct heat only linearly (one-dimensionally), whereas the disk-shaped compound can conduct heat planarly (two-dimensionally) in the normal direction, so that the heat conduction path is It is thought that the number will increase and the thermal conductivity will improve.
  • the disk-shaped compound preferably has three or more epoxy groups.
  • a cured product of a composition containing a disk-shaped compound having three or more epoxy groups tends to have a high glass transition temperature and high heat resistance.
  • the number of epoxy groups contained in the disk-shaped compound is preferably 8 or less, and more preferably 6 or less.
  • disk-shaped compound examples include C.I. Destrade et al. , Mol. Crysr. Liq. Cryst. , Vol. 71, page 111 (1981); Chemical Society of Japan, Quarterly Review of Chemistry, No. 22, Liquid crystal chemistry, Chapter 5, Chapter 10, Section 2 (1994); B. Kohne et al. , Angew. Chem. Soc. Chem. Comm. , Page 1794 (1985); J. Mol. Zhang et al. , J. Am. Chem. Soc. , Vol. In the compounds described in 116, page 2655 (1994), and Japanese Patent No. 4592225, compounds having at least one end (preferably three or more) as an epoxy group can be mentioned.
  • disk-shaped compound examples include Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Ends in the triphenylene structure described in 2012, 51, 7990-7793, and JP-A-7-306317, and the tri-substituted benzene structure described in JP-A-2007-002220 and JP-A-2010-240383. Examples thereof include compounds in which at least one (preferably three or more) of the above is used as an epoxy group.
  • a compound represented by any of the following formulas (D1) to (D16) is preferable from the viewpoint of better thermal conductivity of the heat conductive material.
  • equations (D1) to (D15) will be described, and then the equation (D16) will be described.
  • "-LQ” represents “-L-Q”
  • QL- represents "QL-”.
  • L represents a divalent linking group.
  • L is independently an alkylene group, an alkaneylene group, an arylene group, -CO-, -NH-, -O-, -S-, and a combination thereof. It is preferable that the group is selected from the group consisting of, and two or more groups are selected from the group consisting of an alkylene group, an alkenylene group, an arylene group, -CO-, -NH-, -O-, and -S-. More preferably, it is a combined group.
  • the alkylene group preferably has 1 to 12 carbon atoms.
  • the number of carbon atoms of the alkenylene group is preferably 2 to 12.
  • the arylene group preferably has 10 or less carbon atoms.
  • the alkylene group, alkenylene group, and arylene group may have a substituent (preferably an alkyl group, a halogen atom, a cyano, an alkoxy group, an acyloxy group, etc.).
  • L is shown below.
  • the bond on the left side binds to the side of the central structure of the compound represented by any of the formulas (D1) to (D15) (hereinafter, also simply referred to as "central ring"), and the bond on the right side.
  • AL means an alkylene group or an alkenylene group
  • AR means an arylene group.
  • the alkylene group represented by AL may be linear or branched, and has, for example, 1 to 12 carbon atoms.
  • the alkenylene group represented by AL may be linear or branched, and has, for example, 2 to 12 carbon atoms.
  • the arylene group represented by AR may be monocyclic or polycyclic, and the number of ring member atoms is preferably 6 to 12.
  • Q independently represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
  • substituents include the groups exemplified in the above-mentioned substituent group Y. More specifically, as the substituent, the above-mentioned reactive functional group, halogen atom, isocyanate group, cyano group, unsaturated polymerizable group, epoxy group, oxetanyl group, aziridinyl group, thioisocyanate group, aldehyde group, and Examples include sulfo groups.
  • Q is a group other than the epoxy group, it is preferable that Q is stable with respect to the epoxy group.
  • one or more (preferably two or more) Qs represent an epoxy group. Above all, from the viewpoint of better thermal conductivity of the heat conductive material, it is preferable that all Qs represent epoxy groups.
  • the compounds represented by the formulas (D1) to (D15) preferably do not have -NH- from the viewpoint of the stability of the epoxy group.
  • the compound represented by the formula (D4) is preferable from the viewpoint of more excellent thermal conductivity of the heat conductive material.
  • the central ring of the disc-shaped compound is preferably a triphenylene ring.
  • the compound represented by the formula (XI) is preferable from the viewpoint of more excellent thermal conductivity of the heat conductive material.
  • R 11 , R 12 , R 13 , R 14 , R 15 , and R 16 are independently * -X 11 -L 11 -P 11 or * -X 12 -L, respectively.
  • * represents the bonding position with the triphenylene ring.
  • R 11 , R 12 , R 13 , R 14 , R 15 , and R 16 two or more are * -X 11 -L 11 -P 11 , and three or more are * -X 11 -L. 11 -P 11 is preferable.
  • R 11 and R 12 one or more of R 13 and R 14 , and any one of R 15 and R 16
  • the number is * -X 11 -L 11 -P 11 .
  • R 11 , R 12 , R 13 , R 14 , R 15 , and R 16 are all * -X 11 -L 11 -P 11 .
  • R 11 , R 12 , R 13 , R 14 , R 15 and R 16 are all the same.
  • X 11 is independently single-bonded, -O-, -CO-, -NH-, -O-CO-, -O-CO-O-, -O-CO-NH-, -O-CO-.
  • X 11 independently have -O-, -O-CO-, -O-CO-O-, -O-CO-NH-, -CO-O-, -CO-NH-, and -NH.
  • -CO- or -NH-CO-O- is preferable, and -O-, -O-CO-, -CO-O-, -O-CO-NH-, or -CO-NH- is more preferable.
  • -O-CO- or -CO-O- is even more preferred.
  • L 11 independently represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • divalent linking groups include -O-, -O-CO-, -CO-O-, -S-, -NH-, and alkylene groups (preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms, 1 to 8 carbon atoms). Is more preferable, 1 to 7 is more preferable), an arylene group (the number of carbon atoms is preferably 6 to 20, more preferably 6 to 14, and even more preferably 6 to 10), or a group consisting of a combination thereof. Can be mentioned.
  • Examples of the alkylene group include a methylene group, an ethylene group, a propylene group, a butylene group, a pentylene group, a hexylene group, and a heptylene group.
  • Examples of the arylene group include a 1,4-phenylene group, a 1,3-phenylene group, a 1,4-naphthylene group, a 1,5-naphthylene group and an anthrasenylene group, and a 1,4-phenylene group is preferable. ..
  • the alkylene group and the arylene group may each have a substituent.
  • the number of substituents is preferably 1 to 3, more preferably 1.
  • the substitution position of the substituent is not particularly limited.
  • As the substituent a halogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms is preferable, and a methyl group is more preferable. It is also preferable that the alkylene group and the arylene group are unsubstituted. Of these, the alkylene group is preferably unsubstituted.
  • Examples of ⁇ X 11 ⁇ L 11 ⁇ include L101 to L143, which are examples of L described above.
  • P 11 represents an epoxy group.
  • the epoxy group may or may not have a substituent.
  • X 12 is the same as X 11 , and the preferred conditions are also the same.
  • L 12 is the same as L 11 , and the preferred conditions are also the same.
  • Examples of ⁇ X 12 ⁇ L 12 ⁇ include L101 to L143, which are examples of L described above.
  • Y 12 is a hydrogen atom, a linear, branched or cyclic alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or a linear, branched or cyclic alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms.
  • one or more methylene groups are substituted with -O-, -S-, -NH-, -N (CH 3 )-, -CO-, -O-CO-, or -CO-O-.
  • One Y 12 is a linear, branched or cyclic alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or a linear, branched or cyclic alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms.
  • one or more hydrogen atoms contained in Y 12 may be substituted with halogen atoms.
  • the compound represented by the formula (XI) conforms to the methods described in JP-A-7-306317, JP-A-7-281028, JP-A-2005-156822, and JP-A-2006-301614. Can be synthesized.
  • the compound represented by the formula (D16) is also preferable as the disk-shaped compound.
  • R 17X , R 18X , and R 19X each independently represent * -X 211X- (Z 21X -X 212X ) n21X- L 21X -Q. * Represents the position of connection with the central ring.
  • X 211X and X 212X are independently single-bonded, -O-, -CO-, -NH-, -O-CO-, -O-CO-O-, -O-CO-NH-, -O. -CO-S-, -CO-O-, -CO-NH-, -CO-S-, -NH-CO-, -NH-CO-O-, -NH-CO-NH-, -NH-CO Represents —S—, —S—, —S—CO—, —S—CO—O—, —S—CO—NH—, or —S—CO—S—.
  • Z 21X independently represents a 5- or 6-membered aromatic ring group or a 5-membered or 6-membered non-aromatic ring group, respectively.
  • L 21X represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • Q is synonymous with Q in the formulas (D1) to (D15), and the preferred conditions are also the same.
  • at least one (preferably all) Q among the plurality of Qs present represents an epoxy group.
  • n21X represents an integer of 0 to 3. When n21X is 2 or more, a plurality of (Z 21X -X 212X ) may be the same or different.
  • the compound represented by the formula (D16) As the compound represented by the formula (D16), the compound represented by the formula (XII) is preferable.
  • R 17 , R 18 and R 19 are independently * -X 211- (Z 21 -X 212 ) n21 -L 21 -P 21 or * -X 221- (Z 22 -X 222 ). Represents n22 - Y22 . * Represents the position of connection with the central ring. Two or more of R 17 , R 18 , and R 19 are * -X 211- (Z 21 -X 212 ) n21 -L 21 -P 21 . From the viewpoint of better thermal conductivity of the heat conductive material, R 17 , R 18 and R 19 are all * -X 211- (Z 21 -X 212 ) n21 -L 21 -P 21 . preferable. In addition, it is preferable that R 17 , R 18 , and R 19 are all the same.
  • X 211 , X 212 , X 221 and X 222 are independently single-bonded, -O-, -CO-, -NH-, -O-CO-, -O-CO-O-, -O, respectively.
  • -CO-NH-, -O-CO-S-, -CO-O-, -CO-NH-, -CO-S-, -NH-CO-, -NH-CO-O-, -NH-CO Represents -NH-, -NH-CO-S-, -S-, -S-CO-, -S-CO-O-, -S-CO-NH-, or -S-CO-S-.
  • single bond, -NH-, -O-, -CO-O-, or -O-CO- is preferable, respectively.
  • Z 21 and Z 22 independently represent a 5-membered or 6-membered aromatic ring group or a 5-membered or 6-membered non-aromatic ring group, for example, a benzene ring group (1,4-). Examples thereof include a phenylene group and a 1,3-phenylene group), and an aromatic heterocyclic group.
  • the aromatic ring group and the non-aromatic ring group may have a substituent.
  • the number of substituents is preferably 1 to 4, more preferably 1 or 2, and even more preferably 1.
  • the substitution position of the substituent is not particularly limited.
  • a halogen atom or a methyl group is preferable. It is also preferable that the aromatic ring group and the non-aromatic ring group are unsubstituted. Further, as the substituent, it may further have a group represented by "-X 212 -L 21 -P 21 ".
  • aromatic heterocyclic group examples include the following aromatic heterocyclic groups.
  • * represents a site that binds to X 211 or X 221 .
  • ** represents a site that binds to X 212 or X 222 .
  • a 41 and A 42 each independently represent a methine group or a nitrogen atom.
  • X4 represents an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, or an imino group. It is preferable that at least one of A 41 and A 42 is a nitrogen atom, and it is more preferable that both are nitrogen atoms. Further, X4 is preferably an oxygen atom.
  • n21 and n22 which will be described later, are two or more, a plurality of (Z 21 -X 212 ) and (Z 22 -X 222 ) may be the same or different from each other.
  • L 21 independently represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, and is synonymous with L 11 in the above formula (XI).
  • Examples of L 21 include -O-, -O-CO-, -CO-O-, -S-, -NH-, and an alkylene group (the number of carbon atoms is preferably 1 to 10 and more preferably 1 to 8). ⁇ 7 is more preferable), an arylene group (the number of carbon atoms is preferably 6 to 20, more preferably 6 to 14, and even more preferably 6 to 10), or a group composed of a combination thereof is preferable.
  • examples of ⁇ X212 ⁇ L21 ⁇ include L101 to L143, which are examples of L in the above formulas (D1) to (D15).
  • the bond on the left side of L101 to L143 binds to the side of the central structure of the compound (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “central ring”), and the bond on the right side binds to P21.
  • P21 represents an epoxy group.
  • the epoxy group may or may not have a substituent.
  • Each of Y 22 has a hydrogen atom, a linear, branched or cyclic alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or a linear, branched or cyclic group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms.
  • one or more methylene groups are -O-, -S-, -NH-, -N (CH 3 )-, -CO-, -O-CO-, or -CO-. It represents a group substituted with O— and is synonymous with Y12 in the general formula ( XI ), and the preferred range is also the same.
  • n21 and n22 each independently represent an integer of 0 to 3, and an integer of 1 to 3 is preferable from the viewpoint of better thermal conductivity.
  • Preferred examples of the disk-shaped compound include the following compounds.
  • R represents -X 212 -L 21 -P 21 .
  • the compound represented by the formula (XII) can be synthesized according to the methods described in JP-A-2010-244038, JP-A-2006-07692, and JP-A-2007-002220.
  • the disk-shaped compound is preferably a compound having a hydrogen-bonding functional group from the viewpoint of reducing the electron density, strengthening the stacking, and facilitating the formation of a columnar aggregate.
  • Hydrogen-bonding functional groups include -O-CO-NH-, -CO-NH-, -NH-CO-, -NH-CO-O-, -NH-CO-NH-, and -NH-CO-S. -Or-S-CO-NH- and the like can be mentioned.
  • the epoxy compound contains, for example, a phenolic hydroxyl group as an epoxy-containing group in the general formula (Z), the general formula (Z1), or the general formula (Z2) described in the description of the phenol compound.
  • a compound represented by the general formula can also be used instead of.
  • the epoxy-containing group is a group that is the epoxy group itself, or a monovalent group that contains an epoxy group as a part.
  • the monovalent group containing the epoxy group as a part is a group having one or more (preferably 1 to 8) epoxy groups in the whole group.
  • the monovalent group containing the epoxy group as a part is preferably a group represented by "-(divalent hydrocarbon group) M1- (-O-2-valent hydrocarbon group-) M2 -epoxide group".
  • M1 represents 0 or 1.
  • M2 represents an integer of 1 or more (preferably 1 to 10).
  • the divalent hydrocarbon group may or may not have a substituent, and the divalent hydrocarbon group may further have an epoxy-containing group as a substituent.
  • the divalent hydrocarbon groups that may be present in a plurality thereof may be the same or different from each other.
  • an epoxy compound represented by the general formula (DN) can be mentioned.
  • nDN represents an integer of 0 or more, and an integer of 0 to 5 is preferable, and 1 is more preferable.
  • RDN represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • the divalent linking group includes -O-, -O-CO-, -CO-O-, -S-, an alkylene group (preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms), and an arylene group (the carbon number is preferably 1 to 10). 6 to 20 is preferable), or a group composed of a combination thereof is preferable, an alkylene group is more preferable, and a methylene group is more preferable.
  • epoxy compounds represented by the general formula (E2).
  • C represents a carbon atom.
  • U represents an integer of 3 or 4.
  • "U” in “4-U” indicating the number of V and "U” indicating the number of W show the same value. That is, the general formula (E2) is "VC (-W) 3 " or "C (-W) 4 ".
  • V represents a substituent or a hydrogen atom having no epoxy group.
  • the above-mentioned substituent having no epoxy group is a substituent other than the epoxy group and does not contain an epoxy group as a part of the substituent.
  • the substituent having no epoxy group include a group selected from the substituent group Y, excluding an epoxy group and a group containing an epoxy group as a part.
  • the substituent having no epoxy group is preferably an alkyl group, and more preferably a linear or branched alkyl group.
  • the alkyl group preferably has 1 to 5 carbon atoms.
  • W represents an epoxy-containing group.
  • the epoxy-containing group is a group that is the epoxy group itself, or a monovalent group that contains an epoxy group as a part.
  • the monovalent group containing the epoxy group as a part is a group having one or more (preferably 1 to 8) epoxy groups in the whole group.
  • the monovalent group containing the epoxy group as a part is preferably a group represented by "-(divalent hydrocarbon group) M1- (-O-2-valent hydrocarbon group-) M2 -epoxide group".
  • M1 represents 0 or 1.
  • M2 represents an integer of 1 or more (preferably 1 to 10).
  • the divalent hydrocarbon group may or may not have a substituent, and the divalent hydrocarbon group may further have an epoxy-containing group as a substituent.
  • the divalent hydrocarbon groups that may be present in a plurality thereof may be the same or different from each other.
  • a plurality of Ws existing in the general formula (E2) may be the same or different from each other.
  • Examples of other epoxy compounds include compounds in which the epoxy group is fused. Examples of such a compound include 3,4: 8,9-diepoxybicyclo [4.3.0] nonane and the like.
  • Examples of other epoxy compounds include epoxy compounds represented by the general formula (E3).
  • X represents an integer of 1 or more, preferably an integer of 1 to 50, more preferably an integer of 1 to 15, and even more preferably an integer of 1 to 3.
  • the alkylene group in the general formula (E3) may be linear or branched.
  • the alkylene group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 3 carbon atoms, and even more preferably 2.
  • the plurality of alkylene groups may be the same or different from each other.
  • epoxy compounds include, for example, bisphenol A type epoxy compounds, bisphenol F type epoxy compounds, bisphenol S type epoxy compounds, and bisphenol AD type epoxy compounds, which are glycidyl ethers such as bisphenol A, F, S, and AD. Etc .; hydrogenated bisphenol A type epoxy compound, hydrogenated bisphenol AD type epoxy compound, etc .; phenol novolac type glycidyl ether (phenol novolak type epoxy compound), cresol novolak type glycidyl ether (cresol novolak type epoxy compound), bisphenol A Novolak type glycidyl ether etc .; Dicyclopentadiene type glycidyl ether (dicyclopentadiene type epoxy compound); Dihydroxypentadiene type glycidyl ether (dihydroxypentadiene type epoxy compound); Poly such as resorcinol or other dihydroxybenzene glycidyl ether Hydroxybenzene type glycidyl ether (polyhydroxybenz
  • a compound in which one or more of the glycidyl ether group and / or the glycidyl ester group in each of the above compounds is replaced with a diglycidylamino group or a diglycidylaminoalkylene group (diglycidylaminomethylene group, etc.) is used as the epoxy compound. You may.
  • Each of the above compounds may have a substituent.
  • the aromatic ring group, cycloalkane ring group, and / or alkylene group contained in each of the above compounds is other than the glycidyl ether group, the glycidyl ester group, the diglycidyl amino group, and / or the diglycidyl aminoalkylene group. It may have a substituent of.
  • the epoxy compound is a polyhydroxybenzene type glycidyl ether, a bisphenol F type glycidyl ether, an epoxy compound represented by the general formula (DN), a rod-shaped compound (preferably a rod-shaped compound having a biphenyl skeleton), or a disk-shaped compound (preferably).
  • DN a rod-shaped compound
  • a rod-shaped compound preferably a rod-shaped compound having a biphenyl skeleton
  • a disk-shaped compound preferably.
  • a phenol novolac-type glycidyl ether a phenoxy resin
  • E2 a general formula (E2).
  • the epoxy compound represented by the general formula (E3) one or more selected from the group consisting of the epoxy compound represented by the general formula (E3).
  • the epoxy compound contains these compounds, the content thereof is more than 0% by mass and 100% by mass or less, preferably 30 to 100% by mass, more preferably 60 to 100% by mass, based on the total mass of the epoxy compound. It is preferable, 90 to 100% by mass is more preferable.
  • the epoxy compound contains an epoxy compound having a viscosity at 25 ° C. of less than 1000 mPa ⁇ s (also referred to as “low viscosity epoxy compound”).
  • the epoxy compound contains the above-mentioned low-viscosity epoxy compound.
  • the viscosity of the low-viscosity epoxy compound at 25 ° C. is less than 1000 mPa ⁇ s, preferably 500 mPa ⁇ s or less, and more preferably 300 mPa ⁇ s or less.
  • the lower limit of the viscosity is not particularly limited, but is, for example, 1 mPa ⁇ s or more.
  • the viscosity of the epoxy compound is a value obtained by measuring at 25 ° C. using RheoStress RS6000 (manufactured by Eiko Seiki Co., Ltd.) and reading the value 1 minute after the start of the measurement.
  • the shear rate is 10 (1 / s).
  • the content of the low-viscosity epoxy compound is preferably 5 to 100% by mass, more preferably 20 to 100% by mass, and 60 to 100% by mass with respect to the total epoxy compounds. More preferred.
  • the low-viscosity epoxy compound for example, an epoxy compound having a predetermined viscosity among the above-mentioned epoxy compounds can be used, and more specifically, for example, bisphenol F type glycidyl ether, X is an integer of 1 to 13. Examples thereof include an epoxy compound represented by a general formula (E3) and a dihydroxybenzene type glycidyl ether.
  • the phenol compound contains a phenol compound having a triazine skeleton (requirement 1)
  • the epoxy compound contains an epoxy compound having a triazine skeleton (requirement 2). It is preferable to meet at least one requirement.
  • the composition may satisfy only Requirement 1, only Requirement 2, or both Requirement 1 and Requirement 2.
  • a triazine skeleton of a phenol compound and an epoxy compound, it means that the compound has one or more (for example, 1 to 5) triazine ring groups.
  • the phenol compound having a triazine skeleton include the above-mentioned compound represented by the general formula (Z), the compound represented by the general formula (Z1), and the compound represented by the general formula (Z2). Be done.
  • the compound is represented by a general formula in which the phenolic hydroxyl group is replaced with an epoxy-containing group in the general formula (Z1), and a general formula in which the phenolic hydroxyl group is replaced with an epoxy-containing group in the general formula (Z2). Examples include compounds.
  • the content thereof is more than 0% by mass and 100% by mass or less with respect to the total mass of the phenol compound, and is 30 to 100. It is preferably by mass, more preferably 60 to 100% by mass, still more preferably 90 to 100% by mass.
  • the composition contains an epoxy compound and the epoxy compound contains an epoxy compound having a triazine skeleton (that is, when requirement 2 is satisfied)
  • the content of the phenol compound having a triazine skeleton is out of the above preferable range. Is also preferable.
  • the content thereof is more than 0% by mass and 100% based on the total mass of the epoxy compound. It is not more than mass%, preferably 30 to 100% by mass, more preferably 60 to 100% by mass, still more preferably 90 to 100% by mass.
  • the phenol compound contains a phenol compound having a triazine skeleton (that is, when requirement 1 is satisfied)
  • the content of the epoxy compound having a triazine skeleton may be outside the above preferable range.
  • the composition contains an epoxy compound
  • the total content of the phenol compound having a triazine skeleton and the epoxy compound having a triazine skeleton is the total phenol compound and the total content from the viewpoint of adjusting the cross-linking density and further improving the effect of the present invention.
  • the total content with the epoxy compound it is preferably more than 0% by mass and less than 100% by mass, more preferably 1 to 90% by mass, still more preferably 5 to 80% by mass.
  • the total content of the epoxy compound and the phenol compound in the composition is preferably 3 to 90% by mass, more preferably 5 to 50% by mass, and 7 to 40% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the composition. Is more preferable.
  • the epoxy compound and / or the phenol compound may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the ratio of the total number of hydroxyl groups (preferably phenolic hydroxyl groups) contained in the phenol compound to the total number of epoxy groups contained in the epoxy compound is usually used. It is 3/97 to 97/3, preferably 30/70 to 70/30, more preferably 40/60 to 60/40, and even more preferably 45/55 to 55/45. That is, the ratio of the content of the phenol compound to the epoxy compound in the composition is preferably such that the above-mentioned "number of epoxy groups / number of phenolic hydroxyl groups" is within the above range.
  • the equivalent ratio (may be active hydrogen derived from a phenolic hydroxyl group or active hydrogen of another active hydrogen-containing compound) between the epoxy group of the epoxy compound and the active hydrogen (may be active hydrogen derived from a phenolic hydroxyl group).
  • the number of epoxy groups / number of active hydrogens is usually 3/97 to 97/3, preferably 30/70 to 70/30, more preferably 40/60 to 60/40, and 45/55 to 55 /. 45 is more preferred.
  • the ratio of the total number of hydroxyl groups (preferably phenolic hydroxyl groups) contained in the phenol compound to the total number of epoxy groups contained in the epoxy compound (number of epoxy groups / number of hydroxyl groups) is , 1.1 / 1.0 to 3.0 / 1.0, more preferably 1.2 / 1.0 to 2.0 / 1.0, and 1.3 / 1. It is more preferably 0 to 1.8 / 1.0.
  • the ratio of the total number of epoxy groups contained in the epoxy compound (number of epoxy groups / number of hydroxyl groups) to the total number of hydroxyl groups (preferably phenolic hydroxyl groups) contained in the phenol compound is 1.1.
  • the above ratio is within the above range when the composition contains the maleimide compound described later.
  • flexibility is introduced into the semi-cured film formed from the composition to improve storage stability, and the handling property of the semi-cured film is improved even after a certain period of time has passed since the formation. Becomes good.
  • the above ratio is not more than a predetermined value, the heat resistance of the heat conductive material formed from the composition is more excellent. Such an improving effect is particularly remarkable when the composition contains a maleimide compound described later.
  • the composition may contain little or no epoxy compound.
  • the ratio of the number of hydroxyl groups (preferably phenolic hydroxyl groups) contained in the phenol compound to the total number of epoxy groups contained in the epoxy compound (number of epoxy groups / number of hydroxyl groups) in the composition is. For example, it is 0/100 or more and less than 3/97 (preferably 0/100 or more and 1/99 or less (0 or more and less than 0.031, preferably 0 or more and 0.011 or less)).
  • the composition comprises a specific compound.
  • the specific compound is a general term for a maleimide compound having one or more maleimide groups and a cyanate compound having one or more cyanate groups. That is, the composition comprises one or both of the maleimide compound and the cyanate compound.
  • compounds having both a maleimide group and a cyanate group are classified as follows. That is, among the maleimide groups and cyanate groups of the above compound, if the number of maleimide groups is larger, the above compound is classified as a maleimide compound, and if the number of cyanate groups is larger, the above compound is classified as a cyanate compound. When the number of maleimide group and cyanate group is the same, the above compound is classified as a maleimide compound.
  • the total content of the specific compound is preferably 0.1 to 40% by mass, more preferably 1 to 25% by mass, still more preferably 3.5 to 15% by mass, based on the total solid content of the composition.
  • the total content of the specific compound is preferably 5 to 200% by mass, more preferably 10 to 180% by mass, still more preferably 20 to 160% by mass, based on the total content of the epoxy compound and the phenol compound.
  • the total content means the content of the phenol compound alone. It is also preferred that the composition comprises substantially only one of the maleimide compound and the cyanate compound.
  • the content of one of the maleimide compound and the cyanate compound is preferably more than 98% by mass and 100% by mass or less, preferably 99 to 100% by mass, based on the total mass of the specific compound. Is more preferable, and 99.9 to 100% by mass is further preferable.
  • the mass ratio of the cyanate compound content to the maleimide compound content in the composition is 2/98 to 98/2 is preferable, 70/30 to 70/30 is more preferable, and 40/60 to 60/40 is even more preferable.
  • the composition preferably contains at least a maleimide compound among the specific compounds.
  • a maleimide compound is a compound having one or more maleimide groups.
  • the number of maleimide groups contained in the maleimide compound is 1 or more, preferably 1 to 100, more preferably 2 to 10, and even more preferably 2.
  • the maleimide compound may be a high molecular weight compound or a low molecular weight compound.
  • the molecular weight of the maleimide compound is preferably 100 to 3000, more preferably 200 to 2000, and even more preferably 300 to 1000.
  • the maleimide group contained in the maleimide compound is preferably a group represented by the following general formula (M).
  • X and Y each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent. Hydrogen atoms are preferable for X and Y independently of each other.
  • the maleimide compound is also preferably a compound having one or more (preferably 1 to 10) aromatic ring groups (benzene ring groups and the like). Among them, the maleimide compound is preferably a compound represented by the following general formula (1).
  • n 0 or 1.
  • R 1 and R 2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
  • an alkyl group is preferable.
  • the alkyl group may be linear or branched, and the number of carbon atoms is preferably 1 to 10. It is also preferable that R 1 and / or R 2 in the case of a substituent is present at a position adjacent to the maleimide group on the benzene ring group, for example.
  • R 1 and R 2 are substituents, it is also preferable that R 1 and R 2 are different substituents, for example, R 1 is a methyl group and R 2 is an ethyl group.
  • L 1 represents a divalent linking group.
  • the divalent linking group include an ether group (-O-), a carbonyl group (-CO-), an ester group (-COO-), a thioether group (-S-), -SO 2- , and -NR.
  • -(R is a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group), a divalent aliphatic hydrocarbon group (for example, an alkylene group, a cycloalkylene group, an alkenylene group (-CH CH-, etc.), an alkynylene group (-C ⁇ C).
  • the number of carbon atoms of L1 is preferably 1 or more, more preferably 1 to 100, and even more preferably 3 to 15.
  • L 1 is preferably a group represented by "* p- (L 2 -Ar) k- * q ".
  • * Q represents the bond position on the side that directly bonds to the maleimide group
  • * p represents the bond position on the opposite side.
  • k represents an integer of 1 or more, preferably 1 to 10, and more preferably 1.
  • L 2 represents a single bond, -C (R 3 ) (R 4 )-, -O-, or -CO-, with -C (R 3 ) (R 4 )-preferably.
  • R 3 and R 4 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent, and an alkyl group (which may be linear or branched and has, for example, 1 to 10 carbon atoms) is preferable.
  • Ar represents an arylene group.
  • the number of ring-membered atoms of the arylene group is preferably 6 to 15, and more preferably 6.
  • the number thereof is preferably 1 to 4, more preferably 1 or 2.
  • an alkyl group (which may be linear or branched and has, for example, 1 to 10 carbon atoms) is preferable.
  • Examples of the structure in which Ar can be formed include a structure in which a benzene ring group bonded to R 1 and R 2 can be formed, which is specified in the general formula (1).
  • the plurality of L 2 existing and the plurality of Ar existing may be the same or different from each other.
  • a maleimide group and a group represented by "-(L 1 ) m -maleimide group” are 2 on the benzene ring group bonded to R 1 and R 2 .
  • the two groups may be arranged in the ortho position, the meta position, or the para position with each other. Among them, it is preferable that the above two groups are arranged at the meta position or the para position.
  • n 1
  • the divalent linking group represented by L 1 has 3 to 15 carbon atoms. preferable.
  • the content of the maleimide compound is preferably 0.1 to 40% by mass, more preferably 1 to 15% by mass, and the handleability of the semi-cured film formed from the composition is more preferable with respect to the total solid content of the composition. From an excellent point of view, 3.5 to 8% by mass is more preferable. Further, from the viewpoint of more excellent thermal conductivity and / or insulating property of the obtained thermal conductive agent material, the content of the maleimide compound is 6% by mass or more (for example, 6) with respect to the total solid content of the composition. It is also preferable that it is ⁇ 12% by mass).
  • the content of the maleimide compound is, for example, 1 to 200% by mass, preferably 5 to 100% by mass, and 10 to 70% by mass, based on the total content of the epoxy compound and the phenol compound.
  • the mass% is more preferable, and 20 to 60% by mass is further preferable.
  • the content of the maleimide compound is, for example, 1 to 500% by mass, preferably 20 to 300% by mass, more preferably 50 to 200% by mass, still more preferably 70 to 130% by mass, based on the content of the phenol compound. ..
  • the composition preferably contains at least a cyanate compound among the specific compounds.
  • a cyanate compound is a compound having one or more cyanate groups (-OCN).
  • the number of cyanate groups contained in the cyanate compound is 1 or more, preferably 1 to 100, and more preferably 2 to 50.
  • the cyanate compound may be a high molecular weight compound or a low molecular weight compound.
  • the molecular weight of the cyanate compound is preferably 100 to 3000, more preferably 200 to 2000, and even more preferably 300 to 1000.
  • the cyanate compound is also preferably a compound having one or more (preferably 1 to 10) aromatic ring groups (benzene ring groups and the like). Among them, the cyanate compound is preferably a compound represented by the following general formula (2).
  • nc represents an integer of 0 or more.
  • the nc is preferably an integer of 0 to 100.
  • L c represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • the divalent linking group include an ether group (-O-), a carbonyl group (-CO-), an ester group (-COO-), a thioether group (-S-), -SO 2- , and -NR.
  • -(R is a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group), a divalent aliphatic hydrocarbon group (for example, an alkylene group, a cycloalkylene group, an alkenylene group (-CH CH-, etc.), an alkynylene group (-C ⁇ C).
  • the divalent linking group is preferably an alkylene group, a cycloalkylene group, or a thioether group.
  • the alkylene group may be linear or branched, and the number of carbon atoms is preferably 1 to 8.
  • the alkylene group is preferably —C ( RA ) ( RB ) —.
  • RA and RB each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, or an alkyl group.
  • the alkyl group may be linear or branched, and the number of carbon atoms is preferably 1 to 3.
  • the alkyl group may have, a halogen atom is preferable, and a fluorine atom is more preferable.
  • the alkyl group is also preferably a perfluoroalkyl group.
  • the cycloalkylene group may be monocyclic or polycyclic, and preferably has 3 to 20 carbon atoms.
  • As the cycloalkylene group a tetrahydrodicyclopentadiene ring group is preferable.
  • the plurality of L cs when a plurality of L cs are present, the plurality of L cs may be the same or different.
  • Arc represents an aromatic ring group.
  • the aromatic ring group may be monocyclic or polycyclic, and the number of ring member atoms is preferably 5 to 20.
  • the aromatic ring group may be an aromatic hydrocarbon ring group or an aromatic heterocyclic group, and an aromatic hydrocarbon ring group is preferable. Of these, the aromatic ring group is preferably a benzene ring group.
  • the aromatic ring group may have one or more substituents (for example, 1 to 4) in addition to the cyanate group (—OCN) specified in the general formula (2).
  • an alkyl group (which may be linear or branched, preferably having 1 to 3 carbon atoms) is preferable.
  • a cyanate group may be further provided as a substituent other than the cyanate group (—OCN) specified in the general formula (2).
  • the plurality of Arcs when a plurality of Arcs are present, the plurality of Arcs may be the same or different.
  • cyanate compound a prepolymerized product may be used, and for example, a prepolymerized product of the compound represented by the above-mentioned general formula (2) may be used.
  • the prepolymerized product referred to here is a cyanate compound in a prepolymer state in which cyanate compounds (preferably compounds represented by the above general formula (2)) are polymerized to a certain extent and then the reaction is stopped. ..
  • cyanate compound for example, a compound exemplified below and a prepolymer product of one or more compounds selected from the compounds exemplified below can be used.
  • n represents an integer of 1 or more.
  • cyanate compound a commercially available product may be used.
  • examples of commercially available products include CYTESTER TA, TA-100, TA-1500, P-201 (all manufactured by Mitsubishi Gas Chemical Company), and AROCY XU371 (manufactured by Huntsman).
  • the content of the cyanate compound is preferably 0.1 to 40% by mass, more preferably 1 to 15% by mass, still more preferably 3.5 to 10% by mass, based on the total solid content of the composition.
  • the content of the cyanate compound is, for example, 1 to 300% by mass, preferably 5 to 250% by mass, and 10 to 200% by mass, based on the total content of the epoxy compound and the phenol compound.
  • the mass% is more preferable, and 20 to 150% by mass is further preferable.
  • the content of the cyanate compound is, for example, 1 to 600% by mass, preferably 20 to 500% by mass, more preferably 50 to 400% by mass, still more preferably 70 to 300% by mass, based on the content of the phenol compound. ..
  • the composition comprises an inorganic substance.
  • the inorganic substance only one kind may be used, or two or more kinds may be used.
  • any inorganic substance conventionally used for the inorganic filler of the heat conductive material may be used.
  • the above-mentioned inorganic substance contains at least an inorganic nitride (preferably boron nitride).
  • the inorganic substance may further contain an inorganic oxide (preferably aluminum oxide) in addition to the inorganic nitride.
  • the shape of the inorganic substance is not particularly limited, and may be in the form of particles, a film, or a plate.
  • Examples of the shape of the particulate inorganic substance include rice granules, spherical shape, cube shape, spindle shape, scale shape, agglomerate shape, and indefinite shape.
  • the size of the inorganic substance is not particularly limited, but the average particle size of the inorganic substance is preferably 500 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 300 ⁇ m or less, still more preferably 200 ⁇ m or less, in that the dispersibility of the inorganic substance is more excellent.
  • the lower limit is not particularly limited, but in terms of handleability, 10 nm or more is preferable, and 100 nm or more is more preferable.
  • the average particle size of the inorganic substance the catalog value is adopted when a commercially available product is used. If there is no catalog value, as the method for measuring the average particle size, 100 inorganic substances are randomly selected, the particle size (major axis) of each inorganic substance is measured, and the arithmetic is performed. Calculate on average.
  • the composition is an inorganic substance (preferably an inorganic nitride or an inorganic oxide, more preferably an inorganic nitride) having an average particle size of 20 ⁇ m or more (preferably 30 ⁇ m or more). , More preferably, boron nitride, particularly preferably aggregated boron nitride).
  • Examples of the inorganic nitride which is a form of an inorganic substance, include boron nitride (BN), carbon nitride (C 3 N 4 ), silicon nitride (Si 3 N 4 ), gallium nitride (GaN), and indium nitride (InN).
  • BN boron nitride
  • C 3 N 4 carbon nitride
  • Si 3 N 4 silicon nitride
  • GaN gallium nitride
  • InN indium nitride
  • the inorganic nitride preferably contains an aluminum atom, a boron atom, or a silicon atom, more preferably aluminum nitride, boron nitride, or silicon nitride, and even more preferably aluminum nitride or boron nitride. It is particularly preferable to contain boron nitride. Most preferably, the boron nitride contains at least aggregated boron nitride having an average particle size of 20 ⁇ m or more.
  • the content of the inorganic nitride (preferably boron nitride and / or aluminum nitride, more preferably aggregated boron nitride having an average particle size of 20 ⁇ m or more) in the inorganic substance is 10 to 100% by mass with respect to the total mass of the inorganic substance. Is preferable, 40 to 100% by mass is more preferable, and 60 to 100% by mass is further preferable.
  • Examples of the inorganic oxide which is a form of an inorganic substance, include zirconium oxide (ZrO 2 ), titanium oxide (TIO 2 ), silicon oxide (SiO 2 ), aluminum oxide (Al 2 O 3 ), and iron oxide (Fe 2 O).
  • ZrO 2 zirconium oxide
  • TiO 2 titanium oxide
  • SiO 2 silicon oxide
  • Al 2 O 3 aluminum oxide
  • Fe 2 O iron oxide
  • the inorganic oxide is different from the inorganic ion scavenger described later. Only one kind of inorganic oxide may be used, or two or more kinds may be used.
  • the inorganic oxide is preferably titanium oxide, aluminum oxide (alumina), or zinc oxide, and more preferably aluminum oxide.
  • the inorganic oxide may be an oxide produced by oxidizing a metal prepared as a non-oxide in an environment or the like.
  • the inorganic substance may contain an inorganic substance (inorganic ion scavenger) corresponding to the ion scavenger.
  • the inorganic ion trapping agent include a cation adsorbent that captures cations by ion exchange, an anion adsorbent that captures anions by ion exchange, and an anion adsorbent that captures both cations and anions by ion exchange.
  • examples thereof include inorganic ion adsorbents such as both ion trapping agents.
  • the inorganic ion scavenger examples include an inorganic substance (preferably a composite inorganic substance) containing one or more (preferably two or more) selected from the group consisting of antimony, bismuth, zirconium, titanium, tin, and magnesium. Can be mentioned.
  • examples of the inorganic substance (preferably a composite inorganic substance) containing one or more of the above (preferably two or more) include an oxide (preferably a composite oxide), an oxidative hydrate (preferably a composite oxidative hydrate), and an oxide. , Hydroxides (preferably composite hydroxides).
  • a composite inorganic substance (composite oxide, composite oxidation) of one or more selected from the group consisting of antimony, bismuth, zirconium, titanium, tin, and magnesium and aluminum is used. Hydrate, composite hydroxide, etc.) can also be mentioned.
  • the composite oxide include aluminum oxide / magnesium oxide solid solution.
  • the inorganic ion trapping agent which is a composite is two or more kinds of oxides (composite oxides) and oxidative hydrates (composite oxide waters) selected from the group consisting of antimony, bismuth, zirconium, magnesium, and aluminum. Japanese products) or hydroxides (composite hydroxides) are preferable. Among them, the inorganic ion trapping agent is a two-component composite of magnesium, aluminum, and zirconium (composite oxide, composite oxidative hydrate, composite hydroxide, etc.), bismuth, and zirconium.
  • Substances (composite oxides, composite oxidative hydrates, composite hydroxides, etc.), two-component composites of bismuth and antimony (composite oxides, composite oxidative hydrates, composite hydroxides, etc.), Alternatively, a composite containing magnesium and aluminum (composite oxide, composite oxidative hydrate, composite hydroxide, etc.) is preferable, and a two-component composite of bismuth and zirconium or a two-component composite of magnesium and aluminum. Complexes are more preferred.
  • the inorganic ion trapping agent contains two or more kinds of metal atoms
  • the inorganic ion trapping agent contains two kinds of metal atoms in which the content of the inorganic ion trapping agent with respect to all metal atoms is in the range of 1 to 99 mol%. It is preferable to include the above (for example, 2 to 4 types), and 2 or more types (for example, 2 to 4 types) of metal atoms having an content of the inorganic ion trapping agent with respect to all metal atoms in the range of 5 to 95 mol% are contained. Is more preferable.
  • the content of the inorganic ion scavenger is preferably 0.01 to 40% by mass, more preferably 0.1 to 20% by mass, still more preferably 0.2 to 10% by mass, based on the total inorganic substances.
  • the inorganic substance in the composition is substantially composed of only the inorganic nitride and the inorganic ion adsorbent.
  • the total content of the inorganic nitride and the inorganic ion adsorbent is higher than that of the total inorganic substance. , 98 to 100% by mass, more preferably 99.95 to 100% by mass, and particularly preferably 99.995 to 100% by mass.
  • the inorganic material contained in the composition (preferably an inorganic nitride or an inorganic oxide, more preferably an inorganic nitride, further preferably boron nitride and / or aluminum nitride) has a substantially average particle size of 20 ⁇ m or more (preferably 30 ⁇ m). It is also preferable that only the inorganic substances of the above) are used.
  • the fact that the inorganic substances are substantially only inorganic substances having an average particle size of 20 ⁇ m or more means that the content of the inorganic substances having an average particle size of 20 ⁇ m or more is more than 99% by mass with respect to the total mass of the inorganic substances.
  • the inorganic substance preferably has an inorganic substance having a different average particle size, for example, both an inorganic substance X having an average particle size of 20 ⁇ m or more and an inorganic substance Y having an average particle size of less than 20 ⁇ m. It is also preferable to include it.
  • the average particle size of the inorganic substance X is preferably 20 to 300 ⁇ m, more preferably 30 to 200 ⁇ m.
  • the average particle size of the inorganic substance Y is preferably 1 nm or more and less than 20 ⁇ m, and more preferably 10 nm or more and 15 ⁇ m or less.
  • the inorganic substance X is preferably an inorganic nitride or an inorganic oxide, more preferably an inorganic nitride, and even more preferably boron nitride. It is also preferable that the inorganic substance X is in the form of agglomerates.
  • the inorganic substance Y is preferably an inorganic nitride or an inorganic oxide, more preferably boron nitride or aluminum oxide. It is also preferable that the inorganic substance Y is not in the form of agglomerates. As the inorganic substance X and the inorganic substance Y, one kind may be used alone, or two or more kinds may be used.
  • the mass ratio of the content of the inorganic substance X to the content of the inorganic substance Y is preferably 50/50 to 99/1, and 60/40 to 95/5. Is more preferable, and 60/40 to 90/10 is even more preferable.
  • Inorganic substances may be surface-treated.
  • the surface treatment is intended to be a treatment different from the surface modification using a surface modifier described later.
  • a functional group is introduced on the surface of the inorganic substance, and the inorganic substance easily interacts with a phenol compound, an epoxy compound, and / or a surface modifier described later, and is formed as a heat conductive material. It is considered that the thermal conductivity and peel strength of the above are further improved.
  • the surface treatment includes, for example, plasma treatment (vacuum plasma treatment, atmospheric pressure plasma treatment, aqua plasma treatment, etc.), ultraviolet irradiation treatment, corona treatment, electron beam irradiation treatment, ozone treatment, firing treatment, flame treatment, and Oxidizing agent treatment and the like can be mentioned.
  • the oxidizing agent treatment may be carried out under acidic conditions or basic conditions (pH 12 or higher, etc.).
  • the content of the inorganic substance in the composition is preferably 20% by mass or more, more preferably 50% by mass or more, further preferably 60% by mass or more, and particularly preferably 70% by mass or more, based on the total solid content of the composition. ..
  • the upper limit is less than 100% by mass, preferably 95% by mass or less, and more preferably 83% by mass or less.
  • the composition of the present invention may further contain a surface modifier as a component different from the above-mentioned components.
  • the surface modifier is a component that surface-modifies the above-mentioned inorganic substances.
  • surface modification means a state in which an organic substance is adsorbed on at least a part of the surface of the inorganic substance.
  • the form of adsorption is not particularly limited, and may be in a bonded state. That is, the surface modification also includes a state in which an organic group obtained by desorption of a part of an organic substance is bonded to the surface of the inorganic substance.
  • the bond may be any bond such as a covalent bond, a coordinate bond, an ionic bond, a hydrogen bond, a van der Waals bond, and a metal bond.
  • the surface modification may be made to form a monomolecular film on at least a part of the surface.
  • the monolayer is a monolayer formed by chemisorption of organic molecules and is known as Self-Assembled MonoLayer (SAM).
  • SAM Self-Assembled MonoLayer
  • the surface modification may be only a part of the surface of an inorganic substance, or may be the whole.
  • the "surface-modified inorganic substance” is an inorganic substance that has been surface-modified with a surface-modifying agent. That is, the surface-modifying inorganic substance is a material containing the inorganic substance and the surface modifying agent adsorbed on the surface of the inorganic substance. That is, in the composition of the present invention, the inorganic substance may constitute a surface-modifying inorganic substance together with the surface modifying agent adsorbed on the surface of the inorganic substance. Further, in the present invention, the composition may contain an inorganic substance and a surface modifying agent by containing the surface-modifying inorganic substance. The inorganic substance in the composition may be partially or wholly composed of the surface-modifying inorganic substance together with the surface-modifying agent.
  • the composition there may be an inorganic substance that constitutes a surface-modified inorganic substance of some inorganic substances and at the same time does not participate in the composition of the surface-modified inorganic substance.
  • a part or all of the surface modifier in the composition may constitute a surface-modifying inorganic substance together with the inorganic substance.
  • some surface modifiers may constitute the surface-modifying inorganic substance, and at the same time, a surface modifier which is not involved in the composition of the surface-modifying inorganic substance may be present.
  • the composition is a surface-modified inorganic nitride (preferably boron nitride, more preferably agglomerated boron nitride having an average particle size of 20 ⁇ m or more) as the inorganic substance constituting the surface-modified inorganic substance.
  • Surface-modified boron nitride is preferably contained.
  • a part or all of the inorganic nitride (preferably boron nitride) in the composition may constitute a surface-modified inorganic nitride (preferably surface-modified boron nitride) together with the surface modifier.
  • the composition may contain a surface-modified inorganic oxide (preferably surface-modified aluminum) in which the inorganic substance constituting the surface-modified inorganic substance is an inorganic oxide (preferably aluminum oxide).
  • a part or all of the inorganic oxide (preferably aluminum oxide) in the composition may constitute a surface-modified inorganic oxide (preferably surface-modified aluminum oxide) together with the surface modifier.
  • the surface-modifying inorganic substance can be formed, for example, by contacting the inorganic substance with the surface modifying agent.
  • an inorganic substance, a surface modifier, and other components constituting the composition of the present invention may be mixed to form a surface-modifying inorganic substance in the composition in the process of producing the composition of the present invention.
  • the inorganic substance and the surface modifying agent are mixed in a solvent to prepare a mixed solution containing the surface modifying inorganic substance, and the surface modifying inorganic substance is separated from the above mixed solution by means such as filtration and separation.
  • the surface-modified inorganic substance may be obtained.
  • the composition of the present invention may be prepared using the separated surface-modified inorganic substance.
  • a conventionally known surface modifier such as a carboxylic acid such as a long-chain alkyl fatty acid, an organic phosphonic acid, an organic phosphoric acid ester, and an organic silane molecule (silane coupling agent) can be used.
  • a carboxylic acid such as a long-chain alkyl fatty acid, an organic phosphonic acid, an organic phosphoric acid ester, and an organic silane molecule (silane coupling agent)
  • silane coupling agent organic silane molecule
  • the silane coupling agent is, for example, a compound having a hydrolyzable group directly bonded to a Si atom.
  • the hydrolyzable group include an alkoxy group (preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms) and a halogen atom such as a chlorine atom.
  • the number of hydrolyzable groups directly bonded to the Si atom of the silane coupling agent is preferably 1 or more, more preferably 2 or more, still more preferably 3 or more. There is no upper limit to the above number, for example, 10,000 or less. It is also preferable that the silane coupling agent has a reactive group.
  • the reactive group examples include an epoxy group, an oxetanyl group, a vinyl group, a (meth) krill group, a styryl group, an amino group, an isocyanate group, a mercapto group, and an acid anhydride group.
  • the number of reactive groups contained in the silane coupling agent is preferably 1 or more, more preferably 2 or more, and even more preferably 3 or more. There is no upper limit to the above number, for example, 10,000 or less.
  • silane coupling agent examples include 3-aminopropyltriethoxysilane, 3- (2-aminoethyl) aminopropyltriethoxysilane, 3-aminopropyltrimethoxysilane, and 3- (2-aminoethyl) aminopropyltri.
  • examples thereof include methoxysilane, N-phenyl-3-aminopropyltrimethoxysilane, 3-mercaptotriethoxysilane, and 3-ureidopropyltriethoxysilane.
  • a surface-modifying inorganic substance may be prepared in advance and used as a part of the raw material of the composition. That is, by mixing the surface-modified inorganic substance prepared in advance with various other components of the composition, all or part of the surface modifier and the inorganic substance can be obtained as a form contained in the surface-modified inorganic substance prepared in advance. It may be introduced into the composition. Further, other than the surface modifier and the inorganic substance introduced in the form contained in the surface-modified inorganic substance, the surface modifier and / or the inorganic substance in a state where the surface-modified inorganic substance is not formed is mixed with other components of the composition.
  • All or part of the surface modifier and / or the inorganic material may be introduced into the composition.
  • the surface modifier is adsorbed on the surface of the inorganic substance in the mixing process to form the surface-modified inorganic substance in the composition.
  • a part of the surface modifying agent may be present in the composition in a state of not contributing to the formation of the surface modifying inorganic substance.
  • the surface modifier may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the content of the surface modifier is preferably 0.005 to 5% by mass, more preferably 0.05 to 3% by mass, based on the total solid content of the composition.
  • the content of the surface modifier is preferably 0.01 to 10% by mass, more preferably 0.10 to 5% by mass, based on the total inorganic substances.
  • the mass ratio of the surface modifier to the inorganic substance (mass of the surface modifier adsorbed on the surface of the inorganic substance / mass of the inorganic substance) in the surface-modified inorganic substance is preferably 0.00001 to 0.5, preferably 0.0001 to 0.0001. 0.1 is more preferable.
  • the content of the surface-modified inorganic substance is preferably 20% by mass or more, more preferably 50% by mass or more, still more preferably 60% by mass or more, based on the total solid content of the composition. , 75% by mass or more is particularly preferable.
  • the upper limit is less than 100% by mass, preferably 95% by mass or less, and more preferably 83% by mass or less.
  • the content of the surface-modified nitride is 10 to 100% by mass with respect to the total surface-modified inorganic substance.
  • 40 to 100% by mass is more preferable, and 60 to 100% by mass is further preferable.
  • the composition also preferably contains a curing accelerator.
  • the curing accelerator preferably contains at least one selected from the group consisting of the compound represented by the general formula (P1) and the compound represented by the general formula (P2), and is represented by the general formula (P3). It is more preferable to contain the above compounds.
  • any optical isomer may be used. Further, one kind of optical isomer may be used alone, or a plurality of optical isomers may be mixed and used. When one kind of optical isomer is mainly used, its optical purity (ee) is preferably 90 or more, more preferably 95 or more.
  • the general formulas (P1) to (P3) shown below when an optical isomer is present, any optical isomer may be contained.
  • L p represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • the divalent linking group include an ether group (-O-), a carbonyl group (-CO-), an ester group (-COO-), a thioether group (-S-), -SO 2- , and -NR.
  • -(R is a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group), a divalent aliphatic hydrocarbon group (for example, an alkylene group, a cycloalkylene group, an alkenylene group (-CH CH-, etc.), an alkynylene group (-C ⁇ C).
  • the divalent linking group may further have a substituent.
  • the substituent include the substituents exemplified in the above-mentioned Substituent Group Y.
  • the arylene group may be monocyclic or polycyclic, and preferably has 6 to 25 carbon atoms.
  • a phenylene group, a naphthylene group, an anthrasenylene group or a binaphthylene group is preferable, and a binaphthylene group is more preferable.
  • L p a divalent aliphatic hydrocarbon group or a divalent aromatic ring group is preferable, and an alkylene group or an arylene group is more preferable.
  • R p11 to R p14 each independently represent a phenyl group which may have a substituent.
  • substituents include the substituents exemplified in the above-mentioned substituent group Y, preferably an alkyl group, and more preferably a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
  • n p represents 0 or 1. As n p , 1 is preferable.
  • R p21 to R p24 each independently represent a phenyl group which may have a substituent.
  • substituents include the substituents exemplified in the above-mentioned substituent group Y, preferably an alkyl group, and more preferably a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
  • X - represents an anion.
  • the anion include hydroxide ion, fluoride ion, chloride ion, bromide ion, iodide ion, hexafluorophosphate ion, tetrafluoroborate ion, tetraphenylborate ion, dicyanamide ion, and alkylphosphate.
  • Ions eg, diethyl phosphate ion, etc.
  • hydrogen sulfate ion, dihydrogen phosphate ion, hydrogen phosphate ion, sulfamate ion, perchlorate ion, benzotriazolide anion, tetratolylborate anion (eg, eg) Tetra-p-tolylborate anion, etc.) can be mentioned.
  • tetratrilborate anion eg, eg) Tetra-p-tolylborate anion, etc.
  • a tetratrilborate anion is preferable.
  • R p31 to R p34 each independently represent a phenyl group which may have a substituent.
  • substituents include the substituents exemplified in the above-mentioned substituent group Y, preferably an alkyl group, and more preferably a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
  • curing accelerator examples include trisorthotrilphosfin, triphenylphosphine, trispalatrilphosfin, tri-t-butylphosphin, tri-i-butylphosphin, tricyclohexylphosfin, tri-2-furylphosfin, and dicyclohexylphenylphosphine.
  • Dit-butylphenylphosphine 1,2-bis (diphenylphosphino) ethane, cis-1,2-bis (diphenylphosphino) ethylene, 1,3-bis (diphenylphosphino) propane, 1,4- Bis (diphenylphosphino) butane, 1,5-bis (diphenylphosfino) pentan, 4- (diphenylphosfino) styrene, 2- (diphenylphosfino) benzoic acid, 4- (diphenylphosfino) benzoic acid , 1,2-bis (diphenylphosphino) benzene, bis [2- (diphenylphosphino) phenyl] ether, 1,1'-bis (diphenylphosphino) ferrocene (dppf), BINAP (2,2'-bis (2,2'-bis) Diphenylphosphino) -1,1'
  • curing accelerator examples include tetraphenylphosphonium tetraphenylborate (TPP-K), tetraphenylphosphonium tetra-p-tolylborate (TPP-MK), tetra-n-butylphosphonium laurate (TBP-LA), and bis ( Also onium salt-based curing accelerators such as tetra-n-butylphosphonium) pyromeritate and quaternary phosphonium compounds (phosphonium salts) such as bis (naphthalen-2,3-dioxy) phenylsilicate adducts of tetraphenylphosphonium. Can be mentioned.
  • JP2012-06722A a boron trifluoride amine complex and a compound described in paragraph 0052 of JP2012-06722A can also be mentioned.
  • 2-methylimidazole (trade name; 2MZ), 2-undecylimidazole (trade name; C11-Z), 2-heptadecylimidazole (trade name; C17Z), 1,2-dimethylimidazole (trade name).
  • triarylphosphine-based curing accelerator the compound described in paragraph 0052 of JP-A-2004-043405 can also be mentioned.
  • Examples of the phosphorus-based curing accelerator to which triphenylborane is added to triarylphosphine include the compounds described in paragraph 0024 of JP-A-2014-005382.
  • the molecular weight of the curing accelerator is often 200 or more, preferably 250 or more, more preferably 400 or more, further preferably 430 or more, and particularly preferably 600 or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 10,000 or less, more preferably 1000 or less, and even more preferably 800 or less.
  • heat treatment for example, evaluation of solder heat resistance II in the column of Examples
  • the curing accelerator itself and / or the curing accelerator The volatilization of pyrolyzed products can be further suppressed, and the solder heat resistance is more excellent.
  • the molecular weight of the curing accelerator is 10,000 or less, it easily functions as a curing accelerator.
  • the curing accelerator preferably contains a compound containing a phosphorus atom, and preferably contains a phosphonium salt, because the effect of the present invention is more excellent.
  • the curing accelerator may be a compound containing a phosphorus atom or a phosphonium salt itself.
  • a phosphonium salt is used as a curing accelerator, the storage stability of the semi-cured film formed from the composition is also improved.
  • the content of the compound containing a phosphorus atom or the phosphonium salt is preferably 10 to 100% by mass, more preferably 50 to 100% by mass, still more preferably 80 to 100% by mass, based on the total mass of the curing accelerator.
  • the curing accelerator may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the content of the curing accelerator is preferably 0.002% by mass or more, more preferably 0.02% by mass or more, still more preferably 0.07% by mass or more, based on the total solid content of the composition.
  • the content of the curing accelerator is preferably 5% by mass or less, more preferably 2% by mass or less, still more preferably 1% by mass or less, based on the total solid content of the composition.
  • the content of the curing accelerator is preferably 0.01% by mass or more, more preferably 0.10% by mass or more, still more preferably 0.55% by mass or more, based on the total epoxy compound.
  • the content of the curing accelerator is preferably 40% by mass or less, more preferably 12% by mass or less, further preferably 10% by mass or less, and particularly preferably 5% by mass or less, based on the total epoxy compound.
  • the composition of the present invention may contain an ion scavenger.
  • the ionic scavenger adsorbs ionic impurities in the composition or in the heat conductive material formed with the composition. Thereby, even when the heat conductive material absorbs moisture in the composition, the insulating property of the heat conductive material can be better maintained.
  • the ion scavenger include an inorganic ion scavenger as described above and an organic ion scavenger.
  • organic ion scavenger examples include triazinethiol compounds; triazineamine compounds; benzoimidazole compounds; benzotriazole compounds; aminotriazole compounds; and bisphenol-based reducing agents.
  • organic ion scavenger examples include triazinethiol compounds; triazineamine compounds; benzoimidazole compounds; benzotriazole compounds; aminotriazole compounds; and bisphenol-based reducing agents.
  • all or a part of the above-mentioned inorganic substances may also function as an ion scavenger.
  • Examples of the triazine thiol compound include 2-dibutylamino-4,6-dimercapto-s-triazine.
  • Examples of the benzimidazole compound include benzimidazole.
  • Examples of the benzotriazole compound include 1H-benzotriazole, carboxybenzotriazole, 2- (2'-hydroxy-5'-tert-octylphenyl) benzotriazole, 2- (2'-hydroxy-5'-methylphenyl).
  • Benzotriazole and 2,2'-methylenebis [6- (2H-benzotriazole-2-yl) -4-tert-octylphenol] can be mentioned.
  • aminotriazole compound examples include 3-amino-1,2,4-triazole and 3,5-diamino-1,2,4-triazole.
  • bisphenol-based reducing agent examples include 2,2'-methylenebis- (4-ethyl-6-t-butylphenol) and 4,4'-butylidenebis- (6-t-butyl-3-methylphenol). Can be mentioned.
  • ion scavenger for example, DHF-4A, DHT-4A, DHT-4A-2, DHT-4C, Kyoward 500, KW-2000, and KW-2100 (trade name, Kyowa).
  • IXE-100, IXE-500, IXE-600, IXE-700F, IXE-800, IXE-6107, IXEPLAS-A1, IXEPLAS-A2, and IXEPLAS-B1 (trade name, manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.) ); Gisnet DB (trade name, manufactured by Sankyo Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd.); VD-3 and VD-5 (trade name, manufactured by Shikoku Kasei Co., Ltd.); and Yoshinox BB (trade name, manufactured by Yoshitomi Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd.). ..
  • the content of the ion scavenger is 0.01 to 10 with respect to the total solid content of the composition.
  • the mass% is preferable, 0.1 to 20% by mass is more preferable, and 0.2 to 10% by mass is further preferable.
  • the ion scavenger contains an inorganic ion scavenger, a part or all of the ion scavenger may be an inorganic substance at the same time.
  • the ion scavenger may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the composition may further contain a solvent.
  • the type of solvent is not particularly limited, and it is preferably an organic solvent.
  • the organic solvent include cyclopentanone, cyclohexanone, ethyl acetate, methyl ethyl ketone, dichloromethane, tetrahydrofuran and the like.
  • the content of the solvent is preferably 20 to 90% by mass, more preferably 30 to 85% by mass, and 50 to 80% by mass. Is more preferable.
  • the content of the solvent is preferably 10 to 80% by mass, more preferably 15 to 70% by mass, still more preferably 20 to 50% by mass, based on the total mass of the composition.
  • the method for producing the composition is not particularly limited, and a known method can be adopted.
  • the above-mentioned various components can be mixed and produced.
  • various components may be mixed all at once or sequentially.
  • the method of mixing the components is not particularly limited, and a known method can be used.
  • the mixing device used for mixing is preferably a liquid disperser, for example, a stirrer such as a rotating revolution mixer, a high-speed rotary shear type stirrer, a colloid mill, a roll mill, a high-pressure injection disperser, an ultrasonic disperser, a bead mill, etc. And a homogenizer can be mentioned.
  • the mixing device may be used alone or in combination of two or more. Degassing may be performed before, after, and / or at the same time as mixing.
  • the composition of the present invention is preferably a composition for forming a heat conductive material.
  • the composition of the present invention is cured to obtain a heat conductive material.
  • the curing method of the composition is not particularly limited, but a thermosetting reaction is preferable.
  • the heating temperature during the thermosetting reaction is not particularly limited. For example, it may be appropriately selected in the range of 50 to 250 ° C. Further, when the thermosetting reaction is carried out, heat treatments having different temperatures may be carried out a plurality of times.
  • the curing treatment is preferably performed on a film-like or sheet-like composition. Specifically, for example, the composition may be applied to form a film and a curing reaction may be carried out.
  • the composition When performing the curing treatment, it is preferable to apply the composition on the substrate to form a coating film and then cure. At this time, a different base material may be brought into contact with the coating film formed on the base material, and then the curing treatment may be performed. The cured product (heat conductive material) obtained after curing may or may not be separated from one or both of the substrates. Further, when performing the curing treatment, the composition may be applied on different substrates to form coating films, and the curing treatment may be performed in a state where the obtained coating films are in contact with each other. The cured product (heat conductive material) obtained after curing may or may not be separated from one or both of the substrates.
  • the curing treatment may be completed when the composition is in a semi-cured state. Further, after the composition is made into a semi-cured state, further curing treatment may be carried out to complete the curing.
  • the curing treatment for making the composition semi-cured also referred to as "semi-cured treatment”
  • the curing treatment for completing the curing also referred to as “main curing treatment” are divided into separate steps. You may go.
  • a composition is applied onto a substrate to form a coating film, and then the coating film on the substrate is heated without pressure to form a semi-cured heat conductive material (“semi-cured”). It may be a "cured film” or a "semi-cured sheet"), or the coating film on the substrate may be heated or the like to form a semi-cured film while being pressed together.
  • the press working may be carried out before or after the above heating or the like, or may be carried out during the press working.
  • press working is performed in the semi-cured film, it may be easy to adjust the film thickness of the obtained semi-cured film and / or reduce the amount of voids in the semi-cured film.
  • the semi-curing treatment may be performed in a state where the coating films formed on different substrates are laminated, or the semi-curing treatment may be performed without laminating the coating films.
  • the semi-curing treatment may be carried out in a state where the coating film formed from the composition is further in contact with a material other than the coating film.
  • the obtained semi-cured film may be used as it is as a heat conductive material, or may be used as a completely cured heat conductive material after the semi-cured film is further subjected to the main curing treatment.
  • the semi-cured film may be heated as it is without pressure, or may be heated after being pressed or while being pressed.
  • the main curing treatment may be performed in a state where the separate semi-cured films are laminated, or the main curing treatment may be performed without laminating the semi-cured films.
  • the main curing treatment may be carried out in a state where the semi-cured film is arranged so as to be in contact with the device or the like to be used. It is also preferable that the device and the heat conductive material of the present invention are adhered to each other by this curing treatment.
  • a flat plate press may be used or a roll press may be used.
  • a roll press for example, a substrate with a coating film obtained by forming a coating film on the substrate is sandwiched between a pair of rolls in which two rolls face each other, and the above pair of rolls is used. It is preferable to apply pressure in the film thickness direction of the coated substrate while rotating the substrate to pass the coated substrate.
  • the base material may be present on only one side of the coating film, or the base material may be present on both sides of the coating film.
  • the substrate with a coating film may be passed through the roll press only once or may be passed a plurality of times.
  • the semi-curing treatment and / or the curing treatment in the main curing treatment or the like only one of the treatment by the flat plate press and the treatment by the roll press may be carried out, or both may be carried out.
  • the shape of the heat conductive material is not particularly limited, and can be molded into various shapes depending on the application.
  • a typical shape of the molded heat conductive material is, for example, a sheet shape. That is, the heat conductive material obtained by using the composition of the present invention is preferably a heat conductive sheet. Further, the thermal conductivity of the heat conductive material obtained by using the composition of the present invention is preferably isotropic rather than anisotropic.
  • the heat conductive material (preferably a heat conductive sheet) has suppressed hygroscopicity.
  • the heat conductive material preferably a heat conductive sheet
  • the heat conductive material preferably has a mass change rate of less than 1.0%, more preferably less than 0.7%, as determined by the following formula. It is more preferably less than 0.5%.
  • the lower limit of the mass change rate is usually 0% by mass or more.
  • W2 The heat-conducting material (preferably a heat-conducting sheet) in a dry state is 85 ° C.
  • the mass of the heat-conducting material (preferably a heat-conducting sheet) in a moisture-absorbing state after being left in an environment of 85 RH% for 24 hours. Drying in an environment of 120 ° C. when determining W1 was sufficiently dehumidified. It will be done in the environment.
  • the heat conductive material is preferably insulating (electrically insulating).
  • the composition of the present invention is preferably a thermally conductive insulating composition.
  • the volume resistivity of the heat conductive material at 23 ° C. and 65% relative humidity is preferably 10 10 ⁇ ⁇ cm or more, more preferably 10 12 ⁇ ⁇ cm or more, and even more preferably 10 14 ⁇ ⁇ cm or more.
  • the upper limit is not particularly limited, but is usually 10 18 ⁇ ⁇ cm or less.
  • the heat conductive material obtained by using the composition of the present invention can be used as a heat radiating material such as a heat radiating sheet, and can be used for heat radiating applications of various devices. More specifically, a device with a heat conductive layer can be produced by arranging a heat conductive layer containing the heat conductive material of the present invention on the device, and heat generated from the device can be efficiently dissipated by the heat conductive layer.
  • the heat conductive layer may be a heat conductive layer including a heat conductive multilayer sheet described later. Since the heat conductive material obtained by using the composition of the present invention has sufficient heat conductivity and high heat resistance, it is used for various electric devices such as personal computers, general household appliances, and automobiles.
  • the heat conductive material obtained by using the composition of the present invention has sufficient heat conductivity even in a semi-cured state, it reaches light for photocuring such as gaps between members of various devices. It can also be used as a heat radiating material to be placed in areas where it is difficult to make it. In addition, since it has excellent adhesiveness, it can also be used as an adhesive having thermal conductivity.
  • the heat conductive material obtained by using the composition of the present invention may be used in combination with other members other than the members formed from the present composition.
  • the heat conductive material heat conductive sheet or the like
  • a support adhesion material
  • the support include a plastic material, a metal material, and glass.
  • the plastic material include polyester such as polyethylene terephthalate (PET), polycarbonate, acrylic resin, epoxy resin, polyurethane, polyamide, polyolefin, cellulose derivative, and silicone.
  • the metal material include copper and aluminum.
  • the support (adhesive material) is also preferably in the form of a sheet.
  • the film thickness of the sheet-shaped heat conductive material (heat conductive sheet) is preferably 100 to 300 ⁇ m, more preferably 150 to 250 ⁇ m.
  • an adhesive layer and / or an adhesive layer may be combined with the heat conductive material (preferably a heat conductive sheet).
  • the heat conductive material preferably a heat conductive sheet.
  • a heat conductive multilayer sheet having a heat conductive sheet and an adhesive layer or an adhesive layer provided on one side or both sides of the heat conductive sheet may be produced. ..
  • one of the adhesive layer and the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer may be provided on one side or both sides of the heat conductive sheet, respectively, or both may be provided.
  • An adhesive layer may be provided on one surface of the heat conductive sheet, and an adhesive layer may be provided on the other surface. Further, the adhesive layer and / or the adhesive layer may be partially provided on one side or both sides of the heat conductive sheet, or may be provided on the entire surface.
  • the heat conductive material such as the heat conductive sheet may be in a semi-cured state (semi-cured film), and the heat conductive sheet in the heat conductive multilayer sheet may be in a semi-cured state. ..
  • the adhesive layer in the heat conductive multilayer sheet may be in a cured state, a semi-cured state, or an uncured state.
  • Test X (Examples 1 to 75, Comparative Examples 1 and 2) was carried out based on the conditions and procedures as shown below.
  • MEH-7500 Phenolic compound manufactured by Meiwa Kasei, which does not have a triazine skeleton
  • ⁇ Cyanate compound> The cyanate compounds used in Examples and Comparative Examples are shown below.
  • G-4 P-201 (manufactured by Mitsubishi Gas Chemical Company)
  • Inorganic nitride, inorganic oxide, or its surface modifier The following shows the inorganic nitrides, inorganic oxides, or surface-modified products thereof (surface-modified inorganic nitrides or surface-modified inorganic oxides) used in Examples and Comparative Examples.
  • the content of the surface-modifying agent with respect to the total mass of the surface-modified product was more than 0% by mass and less than 1% by mass. ..
  • -HP-40 Aggregate boron nitride, average particle size: 40 ⁇ m, manufactured by Mizushima Alloy Iron Co., Ltd.-AA-3: Aluminum oxide, average particle size: 3 ⁇ m, manufactured by Sumitomo Chemical Co., Ltd.-PTX-60: Aggregate boron nitride, average Particle size: 60 ⁇ m, Momentive, SP-3: scaly boron nitride, average particle size: 4 ⁇ m, Denka, BN1: Surface-modified boron nitride produced by the production method 1 shown below, BN2: shown below.
  • the boron nitride in the NaOH water is collected by filtration, and the collected boron nitride is washed with water (500 ml) and acetonitrile (250 ml) to obtain modified boron nitride 1. Obtained.
  • the obtained modified boron nitride 1 was stirred in acetonitrile (100 ml), and a hydrolysis adjusting solution (1.25 g) of a silane coupling agent (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd .: X12-984S) was further added to the acetonitrile. ..
  • the acetonitrile was stirred at room temperature for 3 hours to perform an adsorption treatment (adsorption step). After the modified boron nitride 1 in acetonitrile is collected by filtration, the removed modified boron nitride 1 is washed with acetonitrile (100 ml) and dried in an oven at 40 ° C. to obtain surface-modified boron nitride 1 (“BN1”). Also called).
  • the hydrolysis adjustment solution for the silane coupling agent is a mixture of silane coupling agent (1 g), ethanol (500 ⁇ l), 2-propanol (500 ⁇ l), water (720 ⁇ l), and acetic acid (100 ⁇ l), and the mixture is stirred for 1 hour.
  • X12-984S is a polymer type silane coupling agent having an epoxy group and an ethoxysilyl group.
  • the boron nitride in the mixed solution is collected by filtration, and the collected boron nitride is washed with water (500 ml) and acetonitrile (250 ml) to obtain modified boron nitride. rice field.
  • the obtained modified boron nitride was stirred in acetonitrile (100 ml), and a hydrolysis adjusting solution (1.25 g) of a silane coupling agent (KBM-403) was further added to the acetonitrile.
  • KBM-403 silane coupling agent
  • modified boron nitride in acetonitrile is collected by filtration, the removed modified boron nitride is washed with acetonitrile (100 ml) and dried in an oven at 40 ° C. to obtain surface-modified boron nitride 2 (also referred to as "BN2"). I got).
  • surface-modified boron nitride 2 also referred to as "BN2"
  • KBM-403 is 3-glycidoxypropyltrimethoxysilane.
  • the pH of the liquid (aqueous solution) in which water (400 ml), 50 g of boron nitride, and 30 mass% hydrogen peroxide solution (30 ml) was mixed was 5.
  • modified boron nitride in acetonitrile is collected by filtration, the removed modified boron nitride is washed with acetonitrile (100 ml) and dried in an oven at 40 ° C. to obtain surface-modified boron nitride 4 (also referred to as "BN4"). I got).
  • the obtained modified boron nitride was stirred in acetonitrile (30 ml), and a hydrolysis adjusting solution (0.42 g) of a silane coupling agent (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd .: X12-984S) was further added to the acetonitrile. ..
  • the acetonitrile was stirred at room temperature for 3 hours for adsorption treatment.
  • the modified boron nitride in acetonitrile is collected by filtration, the removed modified boron nitride is washed with acetonitrile (30 ml) and dried in an oven at 40 ° C.
  • boron nitride 6 also referred to as "BN6”
  • X12-984S is a polymer type silane coupling agent having an epoxy group and an ethoxysilyl group.
  • the boron nitride in the aqueous NaOH solution is collected by filtration, and the collected boron nitride is washed with water (500 ml) and acetonitrile (250 ml) to obtain modified boron nitride. Obtained.
  • the obtained modified boron nitride was stirred in acetonitrile (100 ml), and a hydrolysis adjusting solution (1.25 g) of a silane coupling agent (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd .: X12-984S) was further added to the acetonitrile. ..
  • the acetonitrile was stirred at room temperature for 3 hours for adsorption treatment. After the modified boron nitride in acetonitrile is collected by filtration, the removed modified boron nitride is washed with acetonitrile (100 ml) and dried in an oven at 40 ° C. to obtain surface-modified boron nitride 7 (also referred to as "BN7"). ) was obtained.
  • the boron nitride in the mixed solution is collected by filtration, and the collected boron nitride is washed with water (500 ml) and acetonitrile (250 ml) to obtain modified boron nitride. rice field.
  • the obtained modified boron nitride was stirred in acetonitrile (100 ml), and a hydrolysis adjusting solution (1.25 g) of a silane coupling agent (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd .: X12-984S) was further added to the acetonitrile. ..
  • the acetonitrile was stirred at room temperature for 3 hours for adsorption treatment. After the modified boron nitride in acetonitrile is collected by filtration, the removed modified boron nitride is washed with acetonitrile (100 ml) and dried in an oven at 40 ° C. to obtain surface-modified boron nitride 8 (also referred to as "BN8"). I got).
  • modified boron nitride in acetonitrile is collected by filtration, the removed modified boron nitride is washed with acetonitrile (100 ml) and dried in an oven at 40 ° C. to obtain surface-modified boron nitride 9 (also referred to as "BN9"). I got).
  • surface-modified boron nitride 9 also referred to as "BN9”
  • KBM-403 is 3-glycidoxypropyltrimethoxysilane.
  • modified boron nitride in acetonitrile is collected by filtration, the removed modified boron nitride is washed with acetonitrile (100 ml) and dried in an oven at 40 ° C. to obtain surface-modified boron nitride 10 (also referred to as "BN10"). I got).
  • C-1 Tris orthotrilphosphine (304.37)
  • C-2 Triphenylphosphine (262.29)
  • C-3 2PHZ-PW (2-phenyl-4,5-dihydroxymethylimidazole) (204.23)
  • C-4 TPP-MK (Tetraphenylphosphonium Tetra-p-Trillbolate) (658.62)
  • C-5 (S)-(-)-BINAP ((S)-(-)-2,2'-bis (diphenylphosphino) -1,1'-binaphthyl) (622.69)
  • C-6 (S)-(-)-TolbINAP ((S)-(-)-2,2'-bis (di-p-tolylphosphino) -1,1'-binaphthyl) (678.80)
  • C-1 Tris orthotrilphosphine (304.37)
  • C-2 Triphenylphosphine (262.29)
  • C-3 2PHZ
  • ⁇ Ion scavenger> The ion scavengers used in Examples and Comparative Examples are shown below.
  • ⁇ F-1 KW-2000, aluminum oxide / magnesium oxide solid solution (Mg 0.7 Al 0.3 O 1.15 ), manufactured by Kyowa Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.
  • ⁇ F-2 KW-2100, aluminum oxide / magnesium oxide solid solution , Kyowa Kagaku Kogyo Co., Ltd.
  • ⁇ F-3 KW-2200, Aluminum oxide / magnesium oxide solid solution, Kyowa Kagaku Kogyo Co., Ltd.
  • ⁇ F-4 IXE-600, Bi, Sb system, Toa Synthetic Co., Ltd.
  • ⁇ F-5 IXE-700F, Mg, Al series, manufactured by Toa Synthetic Co., Ltd.
  • ⁇ F-6 IXE-6107, Zr, Bi series, manufactured by Toa Synthetic Co., Ltd.
  • composition After mixing the solvent, phenol compound, epoxy compound used as desired, ion scavenger used as desired, specific compound (maleimide compound and / or cyanate compound), and curing accelerator in this order, an inorganic substance or Surface-modified inorganic substances were added.
  • the obtained mixture was treated with a rotation revolution mixer (manufactured by THINKY, Awatori Rentaro ARE-310) for 5 minutes to obtain a composition (curable composition) of each Example or Comparative Example.
  • the amount of the solvent added was set so that the solid content concentration of the composition was 50 to 80% by mass.
  • the solid content concentration of the composition was adjusted for each composition within the above range so that the viscosities of the compositions were about the same.
  • the total content of the epoxy compound and the phenol compound is shown in the "total amount (% by mass)" column in Table 1 with respect to the total solid content of the composition.
  • the addition amount was adjusted so that the amount was equal to that of the epoxy compound and the phenol compound (the number of epoxy groups in the epoxy compound was equal to the number of hydroxyl groups in the phenol compound).
  • the content of one of the components is the amount shown in the "total amount (% by mass)" column in Table 1 with respect to the total solid content of the composition.
  • the amount of addition was adjusted so as to be.
  • the amounts of the curing accelerator, the inorganic substance (inorganic nitride, inorganic oxide, or its surface modifier), the ion scavenger, the maleimide compound, and the cyanate compound are respectively added to the total solid content of the composition.
  • the amount (% by mass) shown in parentheses in each cell in Table 1 was set.
  • the thermal conductivity of the heat conductive sheet was classified according to the following criteria, and the heat conductivity of the heat conductive sheet (heat conductive material) obtained by using the composition of each Example or Comparative Example was evaluated.
  • Tg heat resistance
  • the Tg of the heat conductive sheet was classified according to the following criteria, and the heat resistance of the heat conductive sheet (heat conductive material) obtained by using the composition of each Example or Comparative Example was evaluated.
  • the hygroscopicity of the obtained heat conductive sheet was evaluated.
  • the heat conductive sheet was dried at 120 ° C. for 2 hours using a sufficiently dehumidified dryer to obtain a dried heat conductive sheet.
  • the heat conductive sheet in a dry state was placed in an environment of 85 ° C. and 85 RH% for 24 hours to obtain a heat conductive sheet in a hygroscopic state.
  • the mass of these heat conductive sheets was compared with the following formula to determine the mass change rate, and the hygroscopicity of the heat conductive sheets was evaluated in light of the following categories. The smaller the mass change rate, the more the hygroscopicity is suppressed, which is preferable.
  • Mass change rate (%) (W2-W1) / W1 ⁇ 100 W1: Mass of the heat conductive sheet in a dry state after being dried in an environment of 120 ° C. for 2 hours W2: Moisture absorption state after the heat conductive sheet in a dry state is placed in an environment of 85 ° C. and 85 RH% for 24 hours. Mass of heat conductive sheet A: Mass change rate is less than 0.5% B: Mass change rate is 0.5% or more and less than 0.7% C: Mass change rate is 0.7% or more and less than 1.0% D : Mass change rate is 1.0% or more
  • the above sample was heated at 300 ° C. for 3 minutes and then cooled to room temperature (25 ° C.) at least once. Then, a circular copper foil having a diameter of 2 cm was peeled off from the sample that had been heat-treated one or more times. Visually observe the fracture state of the peeled sample, and if the heat conductive sheet is aggregated and broken on the entire peeled surface, pass the test, and pass between "copper substrate-heat conductive sheet" and / or "heat conductive sheet-". If interfacial peeling occurred in a part or the entire surface between the "circular copper foils with a diameter of 2 cm", it was rejected.
  • the solder heat resistance of the heat conductive sheet was evaluated in light of the following categories. A: Passed even after 3 heat treatments B: Passed even after 2 heat treatments, but failed after 3 heat treatments C: Passed even after 1 heat treatment However, it failed when it was performed twice. D: It failed when the heat treatment was performed once.
  • solder heat resistance II evaluation of solder heat resistance II
  • the solder heat resistance II was evaluated by the same procedure except that the heating temperature was changed from 300 ° C to 320 ° C.
  • Table 1 shows the composition of the solid content and the test results of the composition in each Example or Comparative Example.
  • the effect of the present invention is more excellent when the inorganic substance contains substantially only boron nitride and an inorganic ion scavenger (see comparison of results of Examples 5, 21 and 22).
  • the effect of the present invention is more excellent when the curing accelerator contains a compound containing a phosphorus atom or a phosphonium salt (see comparison of results of Examples 2 to 5 and the like). Further, it was confirmed that the effect of the present invention is more excellent when the curing accelerator contains a compound represented by the general formula (P3) (see Example 3, Comparison of Results of 59 to 65).
  • the effect of the present invention is more excellent when the maleimide compound has two maleimide groups (see comparison of the results of Examples 3 and 51, etc.).
  • the maleimide compound is a compound represented by the general formula (1) in which m is 1, n is 1, and L 1 is a divalent linking group having 3 to 15 carbon atoms
  • the present invention is used. It was confirmed that the effect was superior (see comparison of the results of Examples 5 to 9 and the like).
  • the phenol compound has a triazine skeleton, and the total content of the phenol compound having a triazine skeleton and the epoxy compound having a triazine skeleton is 5 to 80 mass with respect to the total content of the total phenol compound and the total epoxy compound. When it is%, it was confirmed that the effect of the present invention is more excellent (see comparison of results of Examples 5, 10 to 20 and the like).
  • the effect of the present invention is more excellent when the ion scavenger of the composition is a composite of magnesium and aluminum or a composite of zirconium and bismuth (comparison with Examples 9 and 31). , Comparison of the results of Examples 24, 33-36, etc.).
  • the epoxy compound is a polyhydroxybenzene-type glycidyl ether, a bisphenol F-type glycidyl ether, a rod-shaped compound, a phenoxy resin, or a disk-shaped epoxy compound because the heat-conducting material formed is more excellent in suppressing moisture absorption and solder heat resistance. It was confirmed that it was preferable to include a compound (see Examples 5, 11 to 20 comparison of results, etc.). Further, when the epoxy compound contains an epoxy compound having a triazine ring as the central ring, it has a phenol compound having a triazine skeleton and a triazine skeleton because the formed heat conductive material is more excellent in suppressing moisture absorption and solder heat resistance. It was confirmed that the total content of the epoxy compound is preferably 5 to 80% by mass with respect to the total content of the total phenol compound and the total epoxy compound (results of Examples 10 and 20). See comparison etc.).
  • the molecular weight of the curing accelerator of the composition is 250 or more, it is confirmed that the solder heat resistance II is more excellent, and when the molecular weight of the curing accelerator of the composition is 430 or more, the solder heat resistance II is further improved. It was confirmed to be excellent (see comparison of results of Examples 2 to 5, 24, 29, 30, 59 to 75, etc.).
  • Test Y (Example 76 or later) was carried out based on the conditions and procedures as shown below.
  • composition After mixing the solvent (cyclopentanone), phenol compound, epoxy compound, ion scavenger to be used as desired, specific compound (maleimide compound), and curing accelerator in this order, an inorganic substance or a surface-modified inorganic substance was added. .. The obtained mixture was treated with a rotation revolution mixer (manufactured by THINKY, Awatori Rentaro ARE-310) for 5 minutes to obtain a composition (curable composition) of each example.
  • the amount of the solvent added was such that the solid content concentration of the composition was 42.5% by volume (in the range of 52 to 58% by mass on a mass basis).
  • the solid content concentration of the composition was adjusted for each composition within the above range so that the viscosities of the compositions were about the same.
  • the total content of the epoxy compound and the phenol compound is the amount shown in the "total amount (% by mass)" column in Table 2 with respect to the total solid content of the composition, and the total number of epoxy groups of the epoxy compound.
  • the ratio to the total number of hydroxyl groups of the phenol compound was adjusted to be the ratio shown in the "[epoxide / phenol] functional group ratio" column in Table 2.
  • the composition of the solid content of the composition of Example 76 in Test Y is the same as the composition of the solid content of the composition of Example 11 in Test X, respectively.
  • a semi-cured sheet (semi-cured film) using the composition of each example of Test Y was prepared by the method shown in [Preparation of semi-cured sheet (semi-cured film)] in Test X.
  • the PET film was peeled off from the obtained semi-cured sheet and allowed to stand at room temperature (25 ° C.) for 1 hour immediately after production.
  • the semi-cured sheet after standing was cut into strips of 5 cm ⁇ 10 cm to prepare a sample for bending test. The obtained sample was further allowed to stand at room temperature (25 ° C.) for 23 hours.
  • the sample after standing was subjected to a bending test using a cylindrical mandrel testing machine (manufactured by Cortec Co., Ltd.) according to the method described in JIS K 5600-5-1.
  • a cylindrical mandrel testing machine manufactured by Cortec Co., Ltd.
  • cylindrical mandrel with diameters of 25 mm, 20 mm, and 16 mm, respectively from the diameter of the mandrel used for the bending test when the sample was broken or broken, one day after preparation based on the following evaluation criteria.
  • the handleability of the semi-cured sheet (after 24 hours) was evaluated. The shorter the diameter of the mandrel used when the sample is damaged, the better the handling of the semi-cured sheet after storage over time.
  • the diameter of the mandrel at the time of breakage was classified according to the following criteria, and the handleability (preservability over time) was evaluated.
  • Table 2 shows the composition of the solid content and the test results of the composition in each example.
  • Table 2 shows the composition of the solid content and the test results of the composition in each example.
  • the mass ratio of the content of each epoxy compound is shown in the form of "X / Y" when a plurality of types of epoxy compounds are used.
  • the "Viscosity (mPa ⁇ s, 25 ° C.)" column indicates the viscosity of the used epoxy compound at 25 ° C. The method for measuring the viscosity is as shown in the specification.
  • Test Y it was confirmed that if the composition of the present invention is used, a heat conductive material having excellent heat conductivity and heat resistance can be formed. It was also confirmed that the heat conductive material formed by using the composition of the present invention has excellent insulating properties.
  • the epoxy compound is an epoxy compound having an aromatic ring group, or is represented by the general formula (E3) in which X is an integer of 1 to 3. It was confirmed that the epoxy compound to be used is preferable, and the epoxy compound having an aromatic ring group is more preferable. (See Comparison of Results of Examples 77, 79, 88, 90, Comparison of Results of Examples 80, 89, 91, etc.).
  • the content of the maleimide compound is preferably 6% by mass or more with respect to the total solid content of the composition from the viewpoint of more excellent thermal conductivity and / or insulating property of the obtained thermal conductive agent material. (See Comparison of Results in Examples 77, 78, etc.).
  • the ratio to the number (number of epoxy groups / number of hydroxyl groups) is preferably 1.1 / 1.0 to 3.0 / 1.0, and 1.2 / 1.0 to 2.0 / 1. It was confirmed that the value is more preferably 1.0, and the value is further preferably 1.3 / 1.0 to 1.8 / 1.0. (See Comparison of Results of Examples 85-87, Comparison of Results of Examples 77 and 84, Comparison of Results of Examples 78 and 85, etc.).

Landscapes

  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Polymers & Plastics (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Materials Engineering (AREA)
  • Manufacturing & Machinery (AREA)
  • Microelectronics & Electronic Packaging (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Condensed Matter Physics & Semiconductors (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Computer Hardware Design (AREA)
  • Power Engineering (AREA)
  • Compositions Of Macromolecular Compounds (AREA)

Abstract

The present invention provides a curable composition giving thermally conductive materials excellent in terms of thermal conductivity and heat resistance, a thermally conductive material, a thermally conductive sheet, and a device with a thermally conductive layer. This curable composition comprises a phenol compound, a maleimide compound having one or more maleimide groups and/or a cyanate compound having one or more cyanate groups, and an inorganic substance, wherein the inorganic substance comprises an inorganic nitride.

Description

硬化性組成物、熱伝導材料、熱伝導シート、熱伝導層付きデバイスCurable composition, heat conductive material, heat conductive sheet, device with heat conductive layer
 本発明は、硬化性組成物、熱伝導材料、熱伝導シート、及び、熱伝導層付きデバイスに関する。 The present invention relates to a curable composition, a heat conductive material, a heat conductive sheet, and a device with a heat conductive layer.
 パーソナルコンピュータ、一般家電、及び自動車等の様々な電気機器に用いられているパワー半導体デバイスは、近年、小型化が急速に進んでいる。小型化に伴い高密度化されたパワー半導体デバイスから発生する熱の制御が困難になっている。
 このような問題に対応するため、パワー半導体デバイスからの放熱を促進する熱伝導材料が用いられている。
 例えば、特許文献1には、硬化後には高い熱伝導率を達成可能な樹脂組成物として、多官能エポキシ樹脂を含むエポキシ樹脂と、所定の構造単位を有するノボラック樹脂を含む硬化剤と、窒化物粒子を含む無機充填材とを含有する樹脂組成物が挙げられている(請求項1)。
In recent years, power semiconductor devices used in various electric devices such as personal computers, general household appliances, and automobiles have been rapidly miniaturized. With the miniaturization, it is difficult to control the heat generated from the power semiconductor device whose density has been increased.
In order to deal with such a problem, a heat conductive material that promotes heat dissipation from a power semiconductor device is used.
For example, Patent Document 1 describes an epoxy resin containing a polyfunctional epoxy resin, a curing agent containing a novolak resin having a predetermined structural unit, and a nitride as a resin composition capable of achieving high thermal conductivity after curing. A resin composition containing an inorganic filler containing particles is mentioned (claim 1).
特開2016-104862号公報Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-104862
 ところで、熱伝導材料には、熱伝導性に優れることとともに、高温下で継続的に使用していても性能の劣化が生じにくい優れた耐熱性を有することも求められている。
 高温下で熱伝導材料の性能が劣化するのは、熱伝導材料のTg(ガラス転移点)が不十分であることに要因がある。すなわち、熱伝導材料のTgが不十分であると、高温下において、熱伝導材料と熱伝導材料が熱を移動させるべき対象物との間での密着が弱くなり、熱伝導材料が対象物から熱を移動させる効率が劣化する。熱伝導材料のTgが十分に高ければ、熱伝導材料は優れた熱伝導性を発揮し続けることができ、耐熱性が良好になる。本明細書では、熱伝導材料のTgが高いことを、熱伝導材料の耐熱性が優れるともいう。
By the way, the heat conductive material is required to have not only excellent heat conductivity but also excellent heat resistance in which performance is less likely to deteriorate even when continuously used at a high temperature.
The deterioration of the performance of the heat conductive material at high temperature is due to the insufficient Tg (glass transition point) of the heat conductive material. That is, if the Tg of the heat conductive material is insufficient, the adhesion between the heat conductive material and the object to which the heat transfer material should transfer becomes weak at high temperature, and the heat conductive material is removed from the object. The efficiency of heat transfer deteriorates. If the Tg of the heat conductive material is sufficiently high, the heat conductive material can continue to exhibit excellent heat conductivity, and the heat resistance becomes good. In the present specification, a high Tg of the heat conductive material is also referred to as excellent heat resistance of the heat conductive material.
 以上のような事情を鑑みて、本発明は、熱伝導性及び耐熱性に優れた熱伝導材料を与える硬化性組成物を提供することを課題とする。
 また、本発明は、上記硬化性組成物に関する熱伝導材料、熱伝導シート、及び、熱伝導層付きデバイスを提供することをも課題とする。
In view of the above circumstances, it is an object of the present invention to provide a curable composition that provides a heat conductive material having excellent heat conductivity and heat resistance.
Another object of the present invention is to provide a heat conductive material, a heat conductive sheet, and a device with a heat conductive layer relating to the curable composition.
 本発明者らは、上記課題を解決すべく鋭意検討した結果、以下の構成により上記課題が解決できることを見出した。 As a result of diligent studies to solve the above problems, the present inventors have found that the above problems can be solved by the following configuration.
 〔1〕
 フェノール化合物と、
 1つ以上のマレイミド基を有するマレイミド化合物、及び、1つ以上のシアネート基を有するシアネート化合物の一方又は両方と、
 無機物と、を含み、
 上記無機物が、無機窒化物を含む、硬化性組成物。
 〔2〕
 上記マレイミド化合物を含み、
 上記マレイミド化合物が、一般式(1)で表される化合物である、〔1〕に記載の硬化性組成物。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003

 一般式(1)中、mは、0又は1を表す。
 nは、0又は1を表す。
 R及びRは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子又は置換基を表す。
 Lは、2価の連結基を表す。
 〔3〕
 上記一般式(1)中、mが1を表し、nが1を表し、Lで表される上記2価の連結基の炭素数が3~15である、〔2〕に記載の硬化性組成物。
 〔4〕
 上記マレイミド化合物を含み、
 上記マレイミド化合物が、2つの上記マレイミド基を有する、〔1〕~〔3〕のいずれかに記載の硬化性組成物。
 〔5〕
 上記無機物が、窒化ホウ素を含む、〔1〕~〔4〕のいずれかに記載の硬化性組成物。
 〔6〕
 上記窒化ホウ素が、平均粒径が20μm以上である凝集状窒化ホウ素を含む、〔5〕に記載の硬化性組成物。
 〔7〕
 更に、表面修飾剤を含み、
 上記窒化ホウ素が、上記窒化ホウ素の表面上に吸着した上記表面修飾剤とともに、表面修飾窒化ホウ素を構成している、〔5〕又は〔6〕に記載の硬化性組成物。
 〔8〕
 更に、エポキシ化合物を含む、〔1〕~〔7〕のいずれかに記載の硬化性組成物。
 〔9〕
 上記マレイミド化合物を含み、かつ、
 上記エポキシ化合物が、25℃における粘度が1000mPa・s未満のエポキシ化合物を含む、〔8〕に記載の硬化性組成物。
 〔10〕
 上記マレイミド化合物を含み、かつ、
 上記硬化性組成物中、フェノール化合物に含まれる水酸基の数に対する、上記エポキシ化合物に含まれる合計のエポキシ基の数との比が、1.2/1.0~2.0/1.0である、〔8〕又は〔9〕に記載の硬化性組成物。
 〔11〕
 上記フェノール化合物がトリアジン骨格を有するフェノール化合物を含むこと、及び、上記エポキシ化合物がトリアジン骨格を有するエポキシ化合物を含むこと、の少なくとも一方の要件を満たす、〔8〕~〔10〕のいずれかに記載の硬化性組成物。
 〔12〕
 更に、硬化促進剤を含む、〔1〕~〔11〕のいずれかに記載の硬化性組成物。
 〔13〕
 上記硬化促進剤が、リン原子を含む化合物を含む、〔12〕に記載の硬化性組成物。
 〔14〕
 上記硬化促進剤が、ホスホニウム塩を含む、〔12〕又は〔13〕に記載の硬化性組成物。
 〔15〕
 上記硬化促進剤の分子量が、430以上である、〔12〕~〔14〕のいずれか1つに記載の硬化性組成物。
 〔16〕
 上記硬化促進剤が、一般式(P3)で表される化合物を含む、〔12〕又は〔13〕に記載の硬化性組成物。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004

 一般式(P3)中、Rp31~Rp34は、それぞれ独立に、置換基を有していてもよいフェニル基を表す。
 〔17〕
 更に、イオン捕捉剤を含む、〔1〕~〔16〕のいずれか1つに記載の硬化性組成物。
 〔18〕
 〔1〕~〔17〕のいずれか1つに記載の硬化性組成物を硬化して得られる、熱伝導材料。
 〔19〕
 〔18〕に記載の熱伝導材料からなる、熱伝導シート。
 〔20〕
 下記式で求められる質量変化率が、1.0%未満となる、〔19〕に記載の熱伝導シート。
  質量変化率(%)=(W2-W1)/W1×100
 W1:120℃の環境下で2時間乾燥させた後の乾燥状態の熱伝導シートの質量
 W2:上記乾燥状態の熱伝導シートを85℃、85RH%の環境下に24時間おいた後の、吸湿状態の熱伝導シートの質量
 〔21〕
 デバイスと、上記デバイス上に配置された〔19〕又は〔20〕に記載の熱伝導シートを含む熱伝導層とを有する、熱伝導層付きデバイス。
[1]
Phenolic compounds and
One or both of a maleimide compound having one or more maleimide groups and a cyanate compound having one or more cyanate groups.
Inorganic, including
A curable composition in which the above-mentioned inorganic substance contains an inorganic nitride.
[2]
Contains the above maleimide compounds
The curable composition according to [1], wherein the maleimide compound is a compound represented by the general formula (1).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003

In the general formula (1), m represents 0 or 1.
n represents 0 or 1.
R 1 and R 2 independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
L 1 represents a divalent linking group.
[3]
The curability according to [2], wherein in the general formula (1), m represents 1, n represents 1 , and the divalent linking group represented by L1 has 3 to 15 carbon atoms. Composition.
[4]
Contains the above maleimide compounds
The curable composition according to any one of [1] to [3], wherein the maleimide compound has two maleimide groups.
[5]
The curable composition according to any one of [1] to [4], wherein the inorganic substance contains boron nitride.
[6]
The curable composition according to [5], wherein the boron nitride contains aggregated boron nitride having an average particle size of 20 μm or more.
[7]
In addition, it contains a surface modifier and
The curable composition according to [5] or [6], wherein the boron nitride constitutes a surface-modified boron nitride together with the surface modifier adsorbed on the surface of the boron nitride.
[8]
The curable composition according to any one of [1] to [7], further comprising an epoxy compound.
[9]
Contains the above maleimide compound and
The curable composition according to [8], wherein the epoxy compound contains an epoxy compound having a viscosity at 25 ° C. of less than 1000 mPa · s.
[10]
Contains the above maleimide compound and
In the curable composition, the ratio of the number of hydroxyl groups contained in the phenol compound to the total number of epoxy groups contained in the epoxy compound is 1.2 / 1.0 to 2.0 / 1.0. The curable composition according to [8] or [9].
[11]
The present invention according to any one of [8] to [10], wherein the phenol compound satisfies at least one of the requirements that the phenol compound has a triazine skeleton and the epoxy compound contains an epoxy compound having a triazine skeleton. Curable composition.
[12]
The curable composition according to any one of [1] to [11], further comprising a curing accelerator.
[13]
The curable composition according to [12], wherein the curing accelerator contains a compound containing a phosphorus atom.
[14]
The curable composition according to [12] or [13], wherein the curing accelerator contains a phosphonium salt.
[15]
The curable composition according to any one of [12] to [14], wherein the curing accelerator has a molecular weight of 430 or more.
[16]
The curable composition according to [12] or [13], wherein the curing accelerator contains a compound represented by the general formula (P3).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004

In the general formula (P3), R p31 to R p34 each independently represent a phenyl group which may have a substituent.
[17]
The curable composition according to any one of [1] to [16], further comprising an ion scavenger.
[18]
A heat conductive material obtained by curing the curable composition according to any one of [1] to [17].
[19]
A heat conductive sheet made of the heat conductive material according to [18].
[20]
The heat conductive sheet according to [19], wherein the mass change rate obtained by the following formula is less than 1.0%.
Mass change rate (%) = (W2-W1) / W1 × 100
W1: Mass of the heat-conducting sheet in a dry state after being dried in an environment of 120 ° C. for 2 hours W2: Moisture absorption after the heat-conducting sheet in a dry state is placed in an environment of 85 ° C. and 85 RH% for 24 hours. Mass of heat conductive sheet in state [21]
A device with a heat conductive layer having a device and a heat conductive layer including the heat conductive sheet according to [19] or [20] arranged on the device.
 本発明によれば、熱伝導性及び耐熱性に優れた熱伝導材料を与える硬化性組成物を提供できる。
 また、本発明によれば、上記硬化性組成物に関する熱伝導材料、熱伝導シート、及び、熱伝導層付きデバイスを提供できる。
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a curable composition that provides a heat conductive material having excellent heat conductivity and heat resistance.
Further, according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a heat conductive material, a heat conductive sheet, and a device with a heat conductive layer relating to the curable composition.
 以下、本発明の硬化性組成物、熱伝導材料、熱伝導シート、及び、熱伝導層付きデバイスについて詳細に説明する。
 以下に記載する構成要件の説明は、本発明の代表的な実施態様に基づいてなされる場合があるが、本発明はそのような実施態様に制限されない。
 なお、本明細書において、「~」を用いて表される数値範囲は、「~」の前後に記載される数値を下限値及び上限値として含む範囲を意味する。
Hereinafter, the curable composition, the heat conductive material, the heat conductive sheet, and the device with the heat conductive layer of the present invention will be described in detail.
The description of the constituent elements described below may be based on the representative embodiments of the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to such embodiments.
In the present specification, the numerical range represented by using "-" means a range including the numerical values before and after "-" as the lower limit value and the upper limit value.
 また、本明細書において、「(メタ)アクリロイル基」との記載は、「アクリロイル基及びメタクリロイル基のいずれか一方又は双方」の意味を表す。また、「(メタ)アクリルアミド基」との記載は、「アクリルアミド基及びメタクリルアミド基のいずれか一方又は双方」の意味を表す。「(メタ)アクリル」との記載は、「アクリル及びメタクリルのいずれか一方又は双方」の意味を表す。 Further, in the present specification, the description of "(meth) acryloyl group" means "either one or both of acryloyl group and methacryloyl group". Further, the description of "(meth) acrylamide group" means "either one or both of an acrylamide group and a methacrylamide group". The description "(meth) acrylic" means "either one or both of acrylic and methacrylic".
 本明細書において、酸無水物基は、1価の基であってもよく、2価の基であってもよい。なお、酸無水物基が1価の基を表す場合、無水マレイン酸、無水フタル酸、無水ピロメリット酸、及び、無水トリメリット酸等の酸無水物から任意の水素原子を除いて得られる置換基が挙げられる。また、酸無水物基が2価の基を表す場合、*-CO-O-CO-*で表される基を意図する(*は結合位置を表す)。 In the present specification, the acid anhydride group may be a monovalent group or a divalent group. When the acid anhydride group represents a monovalent group, a substitution obtained by removing an arbitrary hydrogen atom from an acid anhydride such as maleic anhydride, phthalic anhydride, pyromellitic anhydride, and trimellitic anhydride. The group is mentioned. When the acid anhydride group represents a divalent group, the group represented by * -CO-O-CO- * is intended (* represents a bond position).
 なお、本明細書において、置換又は無置換を明記していない置換基等については、可能な場合、目的とする効果を損なわない範囲で、その基に更に置換基(例えば、後述する置換基群Y)を有していてもよい。例えば、「アルキル基」という表記は、目的とする効果を損なわない範囲で、置換又は無置換のアルキル基(置換基を有してもよいアルキル基)を意味する。
 また、本明細書において、「置換基を有していてもよい」という場合の置換基の種類、置換基の位置、及び置換基の数は特に制限されない。置換基の数としては、例えば、1個、又は、2個以上が挙げられる。置換基としては、例えば、水素原子を除く1価の非金属原子団が挙げられ、以下の置換基群Yから選択される基が好ましい。
 本明細書において、ハロゲン原子としては、例えば、塩素原子、フッ素原子、臭素原子、及び、ヨウ素原子が挙げられる。
In the present specification, for substituents and the like that do not specify substitution or non-substitution, if possible, further substituents (for example, a group of substituents described later) are added to the groups as long as the desired effect is not impaired. Y) may be possessed. For example, the notation "alkyl group" means a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group (an alkyl group which may have a substituent) as long as the desired effect is not impaired.
Further, in the present specification, the type of the substituent, the position of the substituent, and the number of the substituents in the case of "may have a substituent" are not particularly limited. Examples of the number of substituents include one or two or more. Examples of the substituent include a monovalent non-metal atomic group excluding a hydrogen atom, and a group selected from the following substituent group Y is preferable.
In the present specification, examples of the halogen atom include a chlorine atom, a fluorine atom, a bromine atom, and an iodine atom.
 置換基群Y:
 ハロゲン原子(-F、-Br、-Cl、-I等)、水酸基、アミノ基、カルボン酸基及びその共役塩基基、無水カルボン酸基、シアネートエステル基、不飽和重合性基、エポキシ基、オキセタニル基、アジリジニル基、チオール基、イソシアネート基、チオイソシアネート基、アルデヒド基、アルコキシ基、アリーロキシ基、アルキルチオ基、アリールチオ基、アルキルジチオ基、アリールジチオ基、N-アルキルアミノ基、N,N-ジアルキルアミノ基、N-アリールアミノ基、N,N-ジアリールアミノ基、N-アルキル-N-アリールアミノ基、アシルオキシ基、カルバモイルオキシ基、N-アルキルカルバモイルオキシ基、N-アリールカルバモイルオキシ基、N,N-ジアルキルカルバモイルオキシ基、N,N-ジアリールカルバモイルオキシ基、N-アルキル-N-アリールカルバモイルオキシ基、アルキルスルホキシ基、アリールスルホキシ基、アシルチオ基、アシルアミノ基、N-アルキルアシルアミノ基、N-アリールアシルアミノ基、ウレイド基、N’-アルキルウレイド基、N’,N’-ジアルキルウレイド基、N’-アリールウレイド基、N’,N’-ジアリールウレイド基、N’-アルキル-N’-アリールウレイド基、N-アルキルウレイド基、N-アリールウレイド基、N’-アルキル-N-アルキルウレイド基、N’-アルキル-N-アリールウレイド基、N’,N’-ジアルキル-N-アルキルウレイド基、N’,N’-ジアルキル-N-アリールウレイド基、N’-アリール-N-アルキルウレイド基、N’-アリール-N-アリールウレイド基、N’,N’-ジアリール-N-アルキルウレイド基、N’,N’-ジアリール-N-アリールウレイド基、N’-アルキル-N’-アリール-N-アルキルウレイド基、N’-アルキル-N’-アリール-N-アリールウレイド基、アルコキシカルボニルアミノ基、アリーロキシカルボニルアミノ基、N-アルキル-N-アルコキシカルボニルアミノ基、N-アルキル-N-アリーロキシカルボニルアミノ基、N-アリール-N-アルコキシカルボニルアミノ基、N-アリール-N-アリーロキシカルボニルアミノ基、ホルミル基、アシル基、アルコキシカルボニル基、アリーロキシカルボニル基、カルバモイル基、N-アルキルカルバモイル基、N,N-ジアルキルカルバモイル基、N-アリールカルバモイル基、N,N-ジアリールカルバモイル基、N-アルキル-N-アリールカルバモイル基、アルキルスルフィニル基、アリールスルフィニル基、アルキルスルホニル基、アリールスルホニル基、スルホ基(-SOH)及びその共役塩基基、アルコキシスルホニル基、アリーロキシスルホニル基、スルフィナモイル基、N-アルキルスルフィナモイル基、N,N-ジアルキルスルフィナモイル基、N-アリールスルフィナモイル基、N,N-ジアリールスルフィナモイル基、N-アルキル-N-アリールスルフィナモイル基、スルファモイル基、N-アルキルスルファモイル基、N,N-ジアルキルスルファモイル基、N-アリールスルファモイル基、N,N-ジアリールスルファモイル基、N-アルキル-N-アリールスルファモイル基、N-アシルスルファモイル基及びその共役塩基基、N-アルキルスルホニルスルファモイル基(-SONHSO(alkyl))及びその共役塩基基、N-アリールスルホニルスルファモイル基(-SONHSO(aryl))及びその共役塩基基、N-アルキルスルホニルカルバモイル基(-CONHSO(alkyl))及びその共役塩基基、N-アリールスルホニルカルバモイル基(-CONHSO(aryl))及びその共役塩基基、アルコキシシリル基(-Si(Oalkyl))、アリーロキシシリル基(-Si(Oaryl))、ヒドロキシシリル基(-Si(OH))及びその共役塩基基、ホスホノ基(-PO)及びその共役塩基基、ジアルキルホスホノ基(-PO(alkyl))、ジアリールホスホノ基(-PO(aryl))、アルキルアリールホスホノ基(-PO(alkyl)(aryl))、モノアルキルホスホノ基(-POH(alkyl))及びその共役塩基基、モノアリールホスホノ基(-POH(aryl))及びその共役塩基基、ホスホノオキシ基(-OPO)及びその共役塩基基、ジアルキルホスホノオキシ基(-OPO(alkyl))、ジアリールホスホノオキシ基(-OPO(aryl))、アルキルアリールホスホノオキシ基(-OPO(alkyl)(aryl))、モノアルキルホスホノオキシ基(-OPOH(alkyl))及びその共役塩基基、モノアリールホスホノオキシ基(-OPOH(aryl))及びその共役塩基基、シアノ基、ニトロ基、アリール基、アルケニル基、アルキニル基、及びアルキル基。また、上述の各基は、可能な場合、更に置換基(例えば、上述の各基のうちの1以上の基)を有してもよい。例えば、置換基を有してもよいアリール基も、置換基群Yから選択可能な基として含まれる。
 置換基群Yから選択される基が炭素原子を有する場合、上記基が有する炭素数としては、例えば、1~20である。
 置換基群Yから選択される基が有する水素原子以外の原子の数としては、例えば、1~30である。
 また、これらの置換基は、可能であるならば置換基同士、又は置換している基と結合して環を形成してもよいし、していなくてもよい。例えば、アルキル基(又は、アルコキシ基のように、アルキル基を部分構造として含む基におけるアルキル基部分)は、環状のアルキル基(シクロアルキル基)でもよく、部分構造として1以上の環状構造を有するアルキル基でもよい。
Substituent group Y:
Halogen atoms (-F, -Br, -Cl, -I, etc.), hydroxyl groups, amino groups, carboxylic acid groups and their conjugate base groups, anhydrous carboxylic acid groups, cyanate ester groups, unsaturated polymerizable groups, epoxy groups, oxetanyl Group, aziridinyl group, thiol group, isocyanate group, thioisocyanate group, aldehyde group, alkoxy group, allyloxy group, alkylthio group, arylthio group, alkyldithio group, aryldithio group, N-alkylamino group, N, N-dialkylamino Group, N-arylamino group, N, N-diarylamino group, N-alkyl-N-arylamino group, acyloxy group, carbamoyloxy group, N-alkylcarbamoyloxy group, N-arylcarbamoyloxy group, N, N -Dialkylcarbamoyloxy group, N, N-diarylcarbamoyloxy group, N-alkyl-N-arylcarbamoyloxy group, alkylsulfoxy group, arylsulfoxi group, acylthio group, acylamino group, N-alkylacylamino group, N -Arylacylamino group, ureido group, N'-alkyl ureido group, N', N'-dialkyl ureido group, N'-aryl ureido group, N', N'-diaryl ureido group, N'-alkyl-N' -Allyl ureido group, N-alkyl ureido group, N-aryl ureido group, N'-alkyl-N-alkyl ureido group, N'-alkyl-N-aryl ureido group, N', N'-dialkyl-N-alkyl Ureid group, N', N'-dialkyl-N-aryl ureido group, N'-aryl-N-alkyl ureido group, N'-aryl-N-aryl ureido group, N', N'-diaryl-N-alkyl Ureid group, N', N'-diaryl-N-aryl ureido group, N'-alkyl-N'-aryl-N-alkyl ureido group, N'-alkyl-N'-aryl-N-aryl ureido group, alkoxy Carbonylamino group, allyloxycarbonylamino group, N-alkyl-N-alkoxycarbonylamino group, N-alkyl-N-allyloxycarbonylamino group, N-aryl-N-alkoxycarbonylamino group, N-aryl-N- Allyloxycarbonylamino group, formyl group, acyl group, alkoxycarbonyl group, allyloxycarbonyl group, carbamoyl group, N-alkylcarbamoyl group, N, N-dialkylcarbamoyl group, N-arylcarbamoyl group, N, N-diaryl Carbamoyl group, N-alkyl-N-arylcarbamoyl group, alkylsulfinyl group, arylsulfinyl group, alkylsulfonyl group, arylsulfonyl group, sulfo group (-SO 3H ) and its conjugated base group, alkoxysulfonyl group, aryloxysulfonyl. Group, sulfinamoyl group, N-alkylsulfinamoyl group, N, N-dialkylsulfinamoyl group, N-arylsulfinamoyl group, N, N-diarylsulfinamoyl group, N-alkyl-N-arylsulfina Moil group, sulfamoyl group, N-alkyl sulfamoyl group, N, N-dialkyl sulfamoyl group, N-aryl sulfamoyl group, N, N-diaryl sulfamoyl group, N-alkyl-N-arylsul Famoyl group, N-acylsulfamoyl group and its conjugated base group, N-alkylsulfonylsulfamoyl group (-SO 2 NHSO 2 (alkyl)) and its conjugated base group, N-arylsulfonylsulfamoyl group ( -SO 2 NHSO 2 (aryl)) and its conjugated bases, N-alkylsulfonylcarbamoyl groups (-CONHSO 2 (alkyl)) and its conjugated bases, N-arylsulfonylcarbamoyl groups (-CONHSO 2 (aryl)) and Its conjugated base group, alkoxysilyl group (-Si (Oalkyl) 3 ), aryloxysilyl group (-Si (Oaryl) 3 ), hydroxysilyl group (-Si (OH) 3 ) and its conjugated base group, phosphono group ( -PO 3 H 2 ) and its conjugate base group, dialkylphosphono group (-PO 3 (alkyl) 2 ), diarylphosphono group (-PO 3 (aryl) 2 ), alkylarylphosphono group (-PO 3 (-PO 3) Alkyl)), monoalkylphosphono groups (-PO 3 H (alkyl)) and their conjugated base groups, monoarylphosphono groups (-PO 3 H (aryl)) and their conjugated base groups, phosphonooxy groups ( -OPO 3 H 2 ) and its conjugate base group, dialkylphosphonooxy group (-OPO 3 (alkyl) 2 ), diarylphosphonooxy group (-OPO 3 (aryl) 2 ), alkylarylphosphonooxy group (- OPO 3 (alkyl) (aryl)), monoalkylphosphonooxy group (-OPO 3 H (alkyl)) and its conjugate base group, monoarylphospho Nooxy group (-OPO 3H (aryl)) and its conjugated base group, cyano group, nitro group, aryl group, alkenyl group, alkynyl group, and alkyl group. Further, each of the above-mentioned groups may further have a substituent (for example, one or more groups among the above-mentioned groups), if possible. For example, an aryl group which may have a substituent is also included as a group selectable from the substituent group Y.
When the group selected from the substituent group Y has a carbon atom, the number of carbon atoms of the group is, for example, 1 to 20.
The number of atoms other than the hydrogen atom of the group selected from the substituent group Y is, for example, 1 to 30.
Further, these substituents may or may not form a ring by bonding with each other or with a group to be substituted, if possible. For example, the alkyl group (or the alkyl group portion in a group containing an alkyl group as a partial structure such as an alkoxy group) may be a cyclic alkyl group (cycloalkyl group) and has one or more cyclic structures as a partial structure. It may be an alkyl group.
[組成物]
 本発明の硬化性組成物(以下、単に「組成物」とも言う)は、フェノール化合物と1つ以上のマレイミド基を有するマレイミド化合物、及び、1つ以上のシアネート基を有するシアネート化合物の一方又は両方と、無機物と、を含む。
 また、上記無機物は、無機窒化物を含む。
 1つ以上のマレイミド基を有するマレイミド化合物、及び、1つ以上のシアネート基を有するシアネート化合物を総称して「特定化合物」ともいう。
[Composition]
The curable composition of the present invention (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “composition”) is one or both of a phenol compound, a maleimide compound having one or more maleimide groups, and a cyanate compound having one or more cyanate groups. And inorganic substances.
In addition, the above-mentioned inorganic substances include inorganic nitrides.
Maleimide compounds having one or more maleimide groups and cyanate compounds having one or more cyanate groups are also collectively referred to as "specific compounds".
 本発明の組成物が、上記のような構成で本発明の課題が解決されるメカニズムは必ずしも明らかではないが、本発明者らは以下のように推測している。
 まず、本発明の組成物は、無機物として、熱伝導性に優れる無機窒化物を含む。
 更に、有機成分として、フェノール化合物、及び、特定化合物を含む。組成物中の特定化合物はフェノール化合物と反応して無機窒化物を含む熱伝導材料(硬化物)を形成でき、このような熱伝導材料の高分子構造は密度が高く、熱伝導材料の熱伝導性及び耐熱性(Tg)の向上が実現できた、と推測されている。
 また、後述の通り組成物は、エポキシ化合物を含むこともでき、このような場合、熱伝導材料の熱伝導性及び耐熱性(Tg)がより優れる。これは、フェノール化合物が特定化合物と反応して生じる高分子構造と、フェノール化合物がエポキシ化合物と反応して生じる高分子構造とが、IPN構造(相互侵入網目構造)を形成したり、更に、エポキシ基から生成する水酸基が特定化合物と架橋反応(エポキシ基由来の水酸基とマレイミド基の二重結合との反応等)したりして、より密な高分子構造が形成されたためと推測されている。
 また、熱伝導材料中により密な高分子構造が形成されるため、熱伝導材料中に水が浸入しにくくなり吸湿性も抑制され、加えて、熱伝導材料が高温にさらされた場合において構成成分が熱分解して熱伝導材料中に揮発性の低分子が生成されることも抑制される。その結果、熱伝導材料を高温下に置いた場合でも、熱伝導材料から揮発性成分が気化して接着性が低下することが抑制され、熱伝導材料のハンダ耐熱性がより向上する、と考えられている。
 更に、本発明の組成物から形成される熱伝導材料は、絶縁性も良好である。
 以下、本発明の組成物を用いて形成される熱伝導材料の熱伝導性、耐熱性、絶縁性、吸湿性の抑制性、及び、ハンダ耐熱性の少なくとも1つが優れることを、本発明の効果が優れるともいう。
The mechanism by which the composition of the present invention solves the problem of the present invention with the above-mentioned constitution is not always clear, but the present inventors speculate as follows.
First, the composition of the present invention contains an inorganic nitride having excellent thermal conductivity as an inorganic substance.
Further, the organic component includes a phenol compound and a specific compound. The specific compound in the composition can react with the phenol compound to form a heat conductive material (cured product) containing an inorganic nitride, and the polymer structure of such a heat conductive material has a high density, and the heat conduction of the heat conductive material is high. It is presumed that the improvement of the property and the heat resistance (Tg) could be realized.
Further, as described later, the composition may also contain an epoxy compound, and in such a case, the heat conductivity and heat resistance (Tg) of the heat conductive material are more excellent. This is because the polymer structure generated by the reaction of the phenol compound with the specific compound and the polymer structure generated by the reaction of the phenol compound with the epoxy compound form an IPN structure (interpenetrating network structure), and further, epoxy. It is presumed that the hydroxyl group generated from the group undergoes a cross-linking reaction with a specific compound (reaction between the hydroxyl group derived from the epoxy group and the double bond of the maleimide group, etc.) to form a denser polymer structure.
In addition, since a denser polymer structure is formed in the heat conductive material, it becomes difficult for water to penetrate into the heat conductive material and moisture absorption is suppressed. In addition, it is configured when the heat conductive material is exposed to high temperature. It is also suppressed that the components are thermally decomposed to generate volatile small molecules in the heat conductive material. As a result, even when the heat conductive material is placed at a high temperature, it is suppressed that the volatile components are vaporized from the heat conductive material and the adhesiveness is lowered, and the solder heat resistance of the heat conductive material is further improved. Has been done.
Further, the heat conductive material formed from the composition of the present invention has good insulating properties.
Hereinafter, the effect of the present invention is that at least one of the heat conductivity, heat resistance, insulating property, hygroscopicity suppressing property, and solder heat resistance of the heat conductive material formed by using the composition of the present invention is excellent. Is also said to be excellent.
 以下、組成物に含まれる成分について詳述する。 Hereinafter, the components contained in the composition will be described in detail.
〔フェノール化合物〕
 本発明の組成物はフェノール化合物を含む。
 フェノール化合物は、芳香環基に直接結合する水酸基(フェノール性水酸基)を1以上(好ましくは2以上、より好ましくは2~10)有する化合物である。
 中でも、フェノール化合物は、トリアジン骨格を有することが好ましい。
 フェノール化合物が「トリアジン骨格を有する」とは、化合物中に1個以上(例えば1~5個)のトリアジン環基を有することを意味する。
[Phenol compound]
The composition of the present invention comprises a phenolic compound.
The phenol compound is a compound having 1 or more (preferably 2 or more, more preferably 2 to 10) hydroxyl groups (phenolic hydroxyl groups) directly bonded to the aromatic ring group.
Above all, the phenol compound preferably has a triazine skeleton.
By "having a triazine skeleton", a phenol compound means having one or more (for example, 1 to 5) triazine ring groups in the compound.
 フェノール化合物は、一般式(Z)で表される化合物が好ましい。 The phenol compound is preferably a compound represented by the general formula (Z).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005
 上記一般式(Z)中、同一の符号で表される基が複数存在する場合、特段の断りがない限り、複数存在する同一の符号で表される基は、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。 In the above general formula (Z), when a plurality of groups represented by the same reference numeral are present, the plurality of groups represented by the same reference numeral may be the same or different, unless otherwise specified. ..
 一般式(Z)中、E~Eは、それぞれ独立に、単結合、-NH-、又は、-NR-を表す。
 Rは、置換基を表す。Rの表す置換基としては、例えば、炭素数1~5の直鎖状又は分岐鎖状のアルキル基が挙げられる。
 E~Eは、それぞれ独立に、-NH-、又は、-NR-が好ましく、-NH-がより好ましい。
In the general formula (Z), E 1 to E 6 independently represent a single bond, -NH-, or -NR-.
R represents a substituent. Examples of the substituent represented by R include a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms.
Independently, E 1 to E 6 are preferably -NH- or -NR-, and more preferably -NH-.
 一般式(Z)中、Bは、単結合又はk+1価の有機基を表す。
 Bは、単結合又はl+1価の有機基を表す。
 Bは、単結合又はm+1価の有機基を表す。
 Bは、単結合又はn+1価の有機基を表す。
 上記k+1価の有機基、l+1価の有機基、m+1価の有機基、及び、n+1価の有機基におけるk、l、m、及び、nの値は、一般式(Z)中に明示される、k、l、m、及び、nの値と一致する。
 なお、rが2以上であって、複数存在するmの値が異なる場合、Bで表されるm+1価の有機基におけるmの値は、そのBが結合するXの数を示すmの値と同一である。
In the general formula (Z), B 1 represents a single bond or a k + 1 valent organic group.
B 2 represents a single bond or an l + 1 valent organic group.
B 3 represents a single bond or m + 1 valent organic group.
B 4 represents a single bond or n + 1 valent organic group.
The values of k, l, m, and n in the above-mentioned k + 1-valent organic group, l + 1-valent organic group, m + 1-valent organic group, and n + 1-valent organic group are specified in the general formula (Z). , K, l, m, and n.
When r is 2 or more and the values of a plurality of existing m are different, the value of m in the m + 1 valent organic group represented by B 3 indicates the number of X 3 to which the B 3 is bonded. Is the same as the value of.
 B~Bが表す有機基としては、例えば、炭素数1~20のヘテロ原子を有していてもよい炭化水素からj個の水素原子を除いた基等が挙げられる。なお、j個とは、k+1個、l+1個、m+1個、又は、n+1個のことをいう。
 ここで、j個の水素原子を除く前の上記炭化水素としては、例えば、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20の脂肪族炭化水素、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数3~20の脂肪族環、及び、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数3~20の芳香環からなる群から選択される1以上の炭化水素が挙げられる。また、上記1以上の炭化水素に対して、更に、-O-、-S-、-CO-、-NR-(Rは水素原子又は置換基)、及び、-SO-からなる群から選択される2価の連結基の1以上を組み合わせてもよい。
 炭素数1~20の脂肪族炭化水素としては、例えば、メタン、エタン、プロパン、ブタン、ペンタン、ヘキサン、及び、ヘプタン等が挙げられる。
 炭素数3~20の脂肪族環としては、例えば、シクロヘキサン環、シクロヘプタン環、ノルボルナン環、及び、アダマンタン環等が挙げられる。
 炭素数3~20の芳香環としては、例えば、炭素数6~20の芳香族炭化水素、及び、炭素数3~20の芳香族複素環等が挙げられる。
 炭素数6~20の芳香族炭化水素としては、例えば、ベンゼン環、ナフタレン環、アントラセン環等が挙げられ、炭素数3~20の芳香族複素環としては、例えば、フラン環、ピロール環、チオフェン環、ピリジン環、チアゾール環、カルバゾール環、インドール環、及び、ベンゾチアゾール環等が挙げられる。
Examples of the organic group represented by B 1 to B 4 include a group obtained by removing j hydrogen atoms from a hydrocarbon which may have a hetero atom having 1 to 20 carbon atoms. In addition, j means k + 1, l + 1, m + 1, or n + 1.
Here, as the above-mentioned hydrocarbon before removing j hydrogen atoms, for example, an aliphatic hydrocarbon having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent and a carbon which may have a substituent may be used. Examples thereof include one or more hydrocarbons selected from the group consisting of an aliphatic ring having the number of 3 to 20 and an aromatic ring having 3 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent. Further, for the above 1 or more hydrocarbons, a group consisting of -O-, -S-, -CO-, -NR N- ( RN is a hydrogen atom or a substituent), and -SO 2- . One or more of the divalent linking groups selected from may be combined.
Examples of the aliphatic hydrocarbon having 1 to 20 carbon atoms include methane, ethane, propane, butane, pentane, hexane, and heptane.
Examples of the aliphatic ring having 3 to 20 carbon atoms include a cyclohexane ring, a cycloheptane ring, a norbornane ring, and an adamantane ring.
Examples of the aromatic ring having 3 to 20 carbon atoms include aromatic hydrocarbons having 6 to 20 carbon atoms and aromatic heterocycles having 3 to 20 carbon atoms.
Examples of the aromatic hydrocarbon having 6 to 20 carbon atoms include a benzene ring, a naphthalene ring, an anthracene ring and the like, and examples of the aromatic heterocyclic ring having 3 to 20 carbon atoms include a furan ring, a pyrrole ring and a thiophene. Examples thereof include a ring, a pyridine ring, a thiazole ring, a carbazole ring, an indole ring, and a benzothiazole ring.
 一般式(Z)中、k、l、m、及び、nは、それぞれ独立に、0以上の整数を表す。ただし、k、l、r×m、及び、nの合計は2以上であり、2~12の整数であることが好ましく、4~8の整数であることがより好ましい。
 なお、「r×m」におけるmの値は、複数存在し得るmの平均値である。
 k、l、m、及び、nは、それぞれ独立に、0~5の整数が好ましく、1~2の整数がより好ましい。
 例えば、kが1以上(例えば1~2)であるのが好ましく、lが1以上(例えば1~2)であるのが好ましく、mが1以上(例えば1~2)であるのが好ましく、nが1以上(例えば1~2)であるのが好ましい。
 なお、kが0の場合、BはXを有さない。lが0の場合、BはXを有さない。mが0の場合、BはXを有さない。nが0の場合、BはXを有さない。
 また、Bが単結合の場合、kは1である。Bが単結合の場合、lは1である。Bが単結合の場合、mは1である。Bが単結合の場合、nは1である。
In the general formula (Z), k, l, m, and n each independently represent an integer of 0 or more. However, the total of k, l, r × m, and n is 2 or more, preferably an integer of 2 to 12, and more preferably an integer of 4 to 8.
The value of m in "r × m" is an average value of m that may exist in a plurality of values.
For k, l, m, and n, an integer of 0 to 5 is preferable, and an integer of 1 to 2 is more preferable, respectively.
For example, k is preferably 1 or more (for example, 1 to 2), l is preferably 1 or more (for example, 1 to 2), and m is preferably 1 or more (for example, 1 to 2). It is preferable that n is 1 or more (for example, 1 to 2).
When k is 0, B 1 does not have X 1 . When l is 0, B 2 does not have X 2 . If m is 0, then B 3 does not have X 3 . If n is 0, then B 4 does not have X 4 .
Further, when B 1 is a single bond, k is 1. When B 2 is a single bond, l is 1. When B 3 is a single bond, m is 1. When B 4 is a single bond, n is 1.
 Lは、2価の有機基を表す。
 2価の有機基としては、例えば、置換基を有していてもよい2価の芳香環基、置換基を有していてもよい2価の脂肪族炭化水素基、置換基を有していてもよい2価の脂肪族環基、-N(RNA)-、-CO-、及び、これらを組み合わせた基が挙げられる。RNAは有機基を表す。上記2価の有機基として例示される基は、更に、-O-、-S-、-N(R)-、、及び、これらを組み合わせた基を有していてもよい。
 Rは、置換基を表す。Rの表す置換基としては、例えば、炭素数1~5の直鎖状又は分岐鎖状のアルキル基等が挙げられる。
 また、上記芳香環基、上記脂肪族炭化水素基、及び、上記脂肪族環基が有していてもよい置換基としては、例えば、炭素数1~5の直鎖状又は分岐鎖状のアルキル基等が挙げられる。
L represents a divalent organic group.
Examples of the divalent organic group include a divalent aromatic ring group which may have a substituent, a divalent aliphatic hydrocarbon group which may have a substituent, and a substituent. Examples thereof include a divalent aliphatic ring group, -N ( RNA )-, -CO-, and a group combining these groups. R NA represents an organic group. The group exemplified as the divalent organic group may further have —O—, —S—, —N (RN) −, and a group in which these are combined.
RN represents a substituent. Examples of the substituent represented by RN include a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms.
The aromatic ring group, the aliphatic hydrocarbon group, and the substituent that the aliphatic ring group may have include, for example, a linear or branched alkyl having 1 to 5 carbon atoms. The group etc. can be mentioned.
 2価の芳香環基としては、例えば、炭素数6~20の2価の芳香族炭化水素基、及び、炭素数3~20の2価の芳香族複素環基が挙げられる。
 炭素数6~20の2価の芳香族炭化水素基を構成する芳香環としては、例えば、ベンゼン環等の単環式芳香環;ナフタレン環、及び、アントラセン環等の多環式芳香環;等が挙げられ、炭素数3~20の2価の芳香族複素環基を構成する芳香族複素環としては、例えば、フラン環、ピロール環、チオフェン環、ピリジン環、及び、チアゾール環等の単環式芳香環;ベンゾチアゾール環、カルバゾール環、及び、インドール環等の多環式芳香環;等が挙げられる。
 なお、Lとしての2価の芳香環基は、上記例示から2個の水素原子を除いた基が挙げられる。
Examples of the divalent aromatic ring group include a divalent aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms and a divalent aromatic heterocyclic group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms.
Examples of the aromatic ring constituting the divalent aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms include a monocyclic aromatic ring such as a benzene ring; a naphthalene ring, and a polycyclic aromatic ring such as an anthracene ring; Examples of the aromatic heterocycle constituting a divalent aromatic heterocyclic group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms include a furan ring, a pyrrole ring, a thiophene ring, a pyridine ring, and a monocycle such as a thiazole ring. Formula aromatic rings; polycyclic aromatic rings such as benzothiazole rings, carbazole rings, and indole rings; and the like.
As the divalent aromatic ring group as L, a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from the above example can be mentioned.
 2価の脂肪族炭化水素基としては、例えば、炭素数1~12のアルキレン基等が挙げられ、具体的には、メチレン基、エチレン基、プロピレン基、ブチレン基、ペンチレン基、ヘキシレン基、メチルヘキシレン基、及び、へプチレン基等が挙げられる。 Examples of the divalent aliphatic hydrocarbon group include an alkylene group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, and specifically, a methylene group, an ethylene group, a propylene group, a butylene group, a pentylene group, a hexylene group and a methyl group. Examples thereof include a hexylene group and a heptylene group.
 2価の脂肪族環基を構成する脂肪族環としては、例えば、シクロヘキサン環、シクロヘプタン環、ノルボルナン環、及び、アダマンタン環等が挙げられる。
 なお、Lとしての脂肪族環基は、上記例示から2個の水素原子を除いた基が挙げられる。
Examples of the aliphatic ring constituting the divalent aliphatic ring group include a cyclohexane ring, a cycloheptane ring, a norbornane ring, and an adamantane ring.
As the aliphatic ring group as L, a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from the above example can be mentioned.
 置換基を有していてもよい2価の芳香環基、置換基を有していてもよい2価の脂肪族炭化水素基、置換基を有していてもよい2価の脂肪族環基、又は、-O-、-S-、-NR-若しくは-CO-を組み合わせた基としては、これらの2つ以上の組み合わせからなる2価の連結基だけでなく、同種の基(例えば、芳香環基)を単結合を介して2つ以上組み合わせた2価の連結基であってもよい。 A divalent aromatic ring group which may have a substituent, a divalent aliphatic hydrocarbon group which may have a substituent, and a divalent aliphatic ring group which may have a substituent. Or, as a group in which -O-, -S-, -NR N- or -CO- is combined, not only a divalent linking group consisting of two or more of these, but also a group of the same type (for example, an example). It may be a divalent linking group in which two or more aromatic ring groups) are combined via a single bond.
 本発明においては、熱伝導材料の熱伝導性がより優れる点から、Lの両末端が炭素原子であることが好ましい。末端の炭素原子は環状構造の一部でもよい。
 また、本発明においては、熱伝導材料の熱伝導性がより優れる点から、上記一般式(P2)中のLが、置換基を有していてもよい2価の芳香環基、置換基を有していてもよい2価の脂肪族環基、及び、炭素数2以上の分岐を有していてもよいアルキレン基からなる群から選択される少なくとも1種を有する2価の有機基であることが好ましく、熱伝導性がより優れるとの理由から置換基を有していてもよい2価の芳香環基を有する2価の有機基がより好ましい。
In the present invention, it is preferable that both ends of L are carbon atoms from the viewpoint that the heat conductivity of the heat conductive material is more excellent. The terminal carbon atom may be part of a cyclic structure.
Further, in the present invention, from the viewpoint that the thermal conductivity of the heat conductive material is more excellent, L in the above general formula (P2) may have a divalent aromatic ring group or a substituent which may have a substituent. It is a divalent organic group having at least one selected from the group consisting of a divalent aliphatic ring group which may have and an alkylene group which may have a branch having 2 or more carbon atoms. It is preferable, and a divalent organic group having a divalent aromatic ring group which may have a substituent may be more preferable because the thermal conductivity is more excellent.
 一般式(Z)中、rは0以上の整数である。
 rは0~20の整数であることが好ましく、0~10の整数であることがより好ましい。
In the general formula (Z), r is an integer of 0 or more.
r is preferably an integer of 0 to 20, and more preferably an integer of 0 to 10.
 一般式(Z)中、X~X4は、それぞれ独立に、フェノール性水酸基を有する芳香環基を表す。
 「フェノール性水酸基を有する芳香環基」は、芳香環に直接結合する水酸基(フェノール性水酸基)を1個以上(例えば1~4個)有する芳香環基であればよい。上記芳香環基は上記水酸基以外の置換基を有しいてもよく、有していなくてもよい。上記芳香環基は、単環でも多環でもよく、環員原子としてヘテロ原子を有していてもよい。上記芳香環基の環員原子の数は5~15が好ましく、6~10がより好ましく、6が更に好ましい。
 上記芳香環基は、ベンゼン環基が好ましい。
 上記芳香環基が上記水酸基以外に有し得る置換基としては、炭素数1~6の置換基が好ましく、炭素数1~6の炭化水素基がより好ましく、炭素数1~6の直鎖状又は分岐鎖状のアルキル基が更に好ましい。
In the general formula (Z), X 1 to X 4 each independently represent an aromatic ring group having a phenolic hydroxyl group.
The "aromatic ring group having a phenolic hydroxyl group" may be any aromatic ring group having one or more (for example, 1 to 4) hydroxyl groups (phenolic hydroxyl groups) directly bonded to the aromatic ring. The aromatic ring group may or may not have a substituent other than the hydroxyl group. The aromatic ring group may be monocyclic or polycyclic, and may have a heteroatom as a ring member atom. The number of ring member atoms of the aromatic ring group is preferably 5 to 15, more preferably 6 to 10, and even more preferably 6.
The aromatic ring group is preferably a benzene ring group.
As the substituent that the aromatic ring group may have other than the hydroxyl group, a substituent having 1 to 6 carbon atoms is preferable, a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms is more preferable, and a linear chain having 1 to 6 carbon atoms is more preferable. Alternatively, a branched alkyl group is more preferable.
 一般式(Z)中、k個存在するX、l個存在するX、r×m個存在するX、及び、n個存在するXのうちの少なくとも1個は、フェノール性水酸基とフェノール性水酸基のオルト位に配置された置換基とを有する芳香環基であることも好ましい。上記置換基は、上記フェノール性水酸基のオルト位の一方だけに存在してもよいし、両方に存在してもよい。
 なお、「r×m」におけるmの値は、複数存在し得るmの平均値である。
 また、「オルト位に配置された置換基」は、炭素数1~6の置換基が好ましく、炭素数1~6の炭化水素基がより好ましく、炭素数1~6の直鎖状又は分岐鎖状のアルキル基が更に好ましい。
 言い換えると、(k+l+r×m+n)個存在するX~Xのいずれかで表される「フェノール性水酸基を有する芳香環基」のうち、少なくとも1個(好ましくは30%以上、より好ましくは50%以上、更に好ましくは65%以上。好ましくは100%以下、より好ましくは90%以下、更に好ましくは80%以下)が「フェノール性水酸基とフェノール性水酸基のオルト位に配置された置換基とを有する芳香環基」を表してもよい。
In the general formula (Z), at least one of k X 1 , l X 2 , r × m X 3 , and n X 4 is a phenolic hydroxyl group. It is also preferable that the aromatic ring group has a substituent arranged at the ortho position of the phenolic hydroxyl group. The substituent may be present in only one of the ortho positions of the phenolic hydroxyl group, or may be present in both.
The value of m in "r × m" is an average value of m that may exist in a plurality of values.
The "substituted group arranged at the ortho position" is preferably a substituent having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, more preferably a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, and a linear or branched chain having 1 to 6 carbon atoms. Alkyl groups in the form are more preferable.
In other words, at least one (preferably 30% or more, more preferably 50) of the "aromatic ring groups having a phenolic hydroxyl group" represented by any of X 1 to X 4 existing (k + l + r × m + n). % Or more, more preferably 65% or more, preferably 100% or less, more preferably 90% or less, still more preferably 80% or less) "a phenolic hydroxyl group and a substituent arranged at the ortho position of the phenolic hydroxyl group. It may represent "having an aromatic ring group".
 X~X4で表されるフェノール性水酸基を有する芳香環基において、「フェノール性水酸基とフェノール性水酸基のオルト位に配置された置換基とを有する芳香環基」以外の芳香環基は、水酸基(フェノール性水酸基)以外の置換基を有してもよく有してなくてもよい。
 「フェノール性水酸基とフェノール性水酸基のオルト位に配置された置換基とを有する芳香環基」以外の芳香環基は、例えば、ヒドロキシフェニル基が挙げられる。
 (k+l+r×m+n)個存在するX~Xのいずれかで表される「フェノール性水酸基を有する芳香環基」のうち、少なくとも1個(例えば1~2個)が「フェノール性水酸基とフェノール性水酸基のオルト位に配置された置換基とを有する芳香環基」以外の芳香環基であることも好ましい。
 X~X4で表されるフェノール性水酸基を有する芳香環基において、「フェノール性水酸基とフェノール性水酸基のオルト位に配置された置換基とを有する芳香環基」以外の芳香環基も存在していることで、化合物全体としての対称性が崩れ、化合物の融点が低下し、組成物から形成される半硬化膜の取り扱い性が向上すると考えられている。
Among the aromatic ring groups having a phenolic hydroxyl group represented by X 1 to X 4 , the aromatic ring groups other than the "aromatic ring group having a phenolic hydroxyl group and a substituent arranged at the ortho position of the phenolic hydroxyl group" are It may or may not have a substituent other than a hydroxyl group (phenolic hydroxyl group).
Examples of the aromatic ring group other than the "aromatic ring group having a phenolic hydroxyl group and a substituent arranged at the ortho position of the phenolic hydroxyl group" include a hydroxyphenyl group.
Of the (k + l + r × m + n) “aromatic ring groups having phenolic hydroxyl groups” represented by any of X 1 to X 4 , at least one (for example, 1 to 2) is “phenolic hydroxyl group and phenol”. It is also preferable that it is an aromatic ring group other than the "aromatic ring group having a substituent arranged at the ortho position of the sex hydroxyl group".
Among the aromatic ring groups having phenolic hydroxyl groups represented by X 1 to X 4 , there are also aromatic ring groups other than "aromatic ring groups having a phenolic hydroxyl group and a substituent arranged at the ortho position of the phenolic hydroxyl group". It is considered that the symmetry of the compound as a whole is broken, the melting point of the compound is lowered, and the handleability of the semi-cured film formed from the composition is improved.
 フェノール化合物は、一般式(Z1)で表される化合物であることも好ましい。
 フェノール化合物は、一般式(Z1)で表される化合物を含むことが好ましく、フェノール化合物が一般式(Z1)で表される化合物そのものであってもよい。一般式(Z1)で表される化合物の含有量は、フェノール化合物の全質量に対して、10~100質量%が好ましく、25~100質量%がより好ましく、50~100質量%が更に好ましい。
The phenol compound is also preferably a compound represented by the general formula (Z1).
The phenol compound preferably contains a compound represented by the general formula (Z1), and the phenol compound may be the compound itself represented by the general formula (Z1). The content of the compound represented by the general formula (Z1) is preferably 10 to 100% by mass, more preferably 25 to 100% by mass, still more preferably 50 to 100% by mass, based on the total mass of the phenol compound.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006
 一般式(Z1)中、rは0以上の整数を表す。rは0~20の整数であることが好ましく、0~10の整数であることがより好ましい。
 Lは、2価の有機基を表す。一般式(Z1)におけるLで表される2価の有機基は、例えば、一般式(Z1)におけるLで表される2価の有機基と同様である。
 Rは、水素原子又は置換基を表す。
 Rで表される置換基は、炭素数1~6の置換基であることが好ましく、炭素数1~6の炭化水素基であることがより好ましく、炭素数1~6の直鎖状又は分岐鎖状のアルキル基であることが更に好ましい。
 一般式(Z1)中に(3+r)個存在するRの少なくとも1個(好ましくは30%以上、より好ましくは50%以上、更に好ましくは65%以上。好ましくは90%以下、より好ましくは80%以下)は置換基を表してもよい。
 一般式(Z1)中に(3+r)個存在するRの少なくとも1個(例えば1~2個)は水素原子を表してもよい。
 一般式(Z1)中におけるR(好ましくは置換基であるR)及びOHが結合したベンゼン環基において、上記R(好ましくは置換基であるR)は、上記ベンゼン環基が結合するNHに対するパラ位に存在していることも好ましい。
In the general formula (Z1), r represents an integer of 0 or more. r is preferably an integer of 0 to 20, and more preferably an integer of 0 to 10.
L represents a divalent organic group. The divalent organic group represented by L in the general formula (Z1) is, for example, the same as the divalent organic group represented by L in the general formula (Z1).
R Z represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
The substituent represented by RZ is preferably a substituent having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, more preferably a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, and a linear or linear group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms. It is more preferably a branched alkyl group.
At least one (preferably 30% or more, more preferably 50% or more, still more preferably 65% or more, preferably 90% or less, more preferably 80) of (3 + r) RZs present in the general formula (Z1). % Or less) may represent a substituent.
At least one (for example, 1 to 2) of R Z existing in (3 + r) in the general formula (Z1) may represent a hydrogen atom.
In the benzene ring group to which R z (preferably R z which is a substituent) and OH are bonded in the general formula (Z1), the above R z (preferably R z which is a substituent) is bonded to the above benzene ring group. It is also preferable that it exists in the para position with respect to NH.
 フェノール化合物は、一般式(Z2)で表される化合物であることも好ましい。
 フェノール化合物は、一般式(Z2)で表される化合物を含むことが好ましく、フェノール化合物が一般式(Z2)で表される化合物そのものであってもよい。一般式(Z2)で表される化合物の含有量は、フェノール化合物の全質量に対して、10~100質量%が好ましく、25~100質量%がより好ましく、50~100質量%が更に好ましい。
The phenol compound is also preferably a compound represented by the general formula (Z2).
The phenol compound preferably contains a compound represented by the general formula (Z2), and the phenol compound may be the compound itself represented by the general formula (Z2). The content of the compound represented by the general formula (Z2) is preferably 10 to 100% by mass, more preferably 25 to 100% by mass, still more preferably 50 to 100% by mass, based on the total mass of the phenol compound.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007
 一般式(Z2)中、Rは、水素原子又は置換基を表す。
 2個存在するRの少なくとも一方は置換基を表すことも好ましく、両方が置換基を表すことも好ましい。
 Rで表される置換基は、炭素数1~6の置換基であることが好ましく、炭素数1~6の炭化水素基であることがより好ましく、炭素数1~6のアルキル基であることが更に好ましい。
 上記アルキル基は、直鎖状でも分岐鎖状でもよい。上記アルキル基は無置換であることも好ましい。
 一般式(Z2)中の2個のRは、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。
In the general formula (Z2), R Z represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
It is also preferable that at least one of the two R Zs represents a substituent, and it is also preferable that both represent a substituent.
The substituent represented by RZ is preferably a substituent having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, more preferably a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, and an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms. Is even more preferable.
The alkyl group may be linear or branched. It is also preferable that the alkyl group is unsubstituted.
The two Rz in the general formula (Z2) may be the same or different from each other.
 その他にもフェノール化合物としては、例えば、ビスフェノールA、F、S、AD、ベンゼンジオール若しくはベンゼントリオール等のベンゼンポリオール、ビフェニルアラルキル型フェノール樹脂、フェノールノボラック樹脂、クレゾールノボラック樹脂、芳香族炭化水素ホルムアルデヒド樹脂変性フェノール樹脂、ジシクロペンタジエンフェノール付加型樹脂、フェノールアラルキル樹脂、多価ヒドロキシ化合物とホルムアルデヒドとから合成される多価フェノールノボラック樹脂、ナフトールアラルキル樹脂、トリメチロールメタン樹脂、テトラフェニロールエタン樹脂、ナフトールノボラック樹脂、ナフトールフェノール共縮ノボラック樹脂、ナフトールクレゾール共縮ノボラック樹脂、ビフェニル変性フェノール樹脂、ビフェニル変性ナフトール樹脂、アミノトリアジン変性フェノール樹脂、又は、アルコキシ基含有芳香環変性ノボラック樹脂等も好ましい。 Other phenolic compounds include, for example, benzene polyols such as bisphenol A, F, S, AD, benzenediol or benzenetriol, biphenylaralkyl-type phenolic resins, phenol novolac resins, cresol novolac resins, and aromatic hydrocarbon formaldehyde resin modifications. Phenolic resin, dicyclopentadienephenol addition type resin, phenol aralkyl resin, polyhydric phenol novolac resin synthesized from polyhydric hydroxy compound and formaldehyde, naphthol aralkyl resin, trimethylolmethane resin, tetraphenylol ethane resin, naphthol novolac resin , Naftorphenol co-condensed novolak resin, naphthol cresol co-condensed novolak resin, biphenyl-modified phenol resin, biphenyl-modified naphthol resin, aminotriazine-modified phenol resin, alkoxy group-containing aromatic ring-modified novolak resin and the like are also preferable.
 フェノール化合物の分子量は、225~2000が好ましく、225~1000がより好ましい。
 なお、上記分子量に分子量分布がある場合、上記分子量は重量平均分子量である。
The molecular weight of the phenol compound is preferably 225 to 2000, more preferably 225 to 1000.
When the molecular weight has a molecular weight distribution, the molecular weight is a weight average molecular weight.
 フェノール化合物の水酸基含有量は、2.0mmol/g以上が好ましく、4.0mmol/g以上がより好ましい。上限値は、25.0mmol/g以下が好ましく、10.0mmol/g以下がより好ましい。
 なお、上記水酸基含有量は、フェノール化合物1gが有する、水酸基(好ましくはフェノール性水酸基)の数を意図する。
 また、フェノール化合物は、水酸基以外にも、エポキシ化合物と重合反応できる活性水素含有基(カルボン酸基等)を有していてもよいし、有していなくてもよい。フェノール化合物の活性水素の含有量(水酸基及びカルボン酸基等における水素原子の合計含有量)の下限値は、2.0mmol/g以上が好ましく、4.0mmol/g以上がより好ましい。上限値は、25.0mmol/g以下が好ましく、10.0mmol/g以下がより好ましい。
The hydroxyl group content of the phenol compound is preferably 2.0 mmol / g or more, more preferably 4.0 mmol / g or more. The upper limit is preferably 25.0 mmol / g or less, more preferably 10.0 mmol / g or less.
The hydroxyl group content is intended to be the number of hydroxyl groups (preferably phenolic hydroxyl groups) possessed by 1 g of the phenol compound.
In addition to the hydroxyl group, the phenol compound may or may not have an active hydrogen-containing group (carboxylic acid group or the like) capable of polymerizing with the epoxy compound. The lower limit of the active hydrogen content (total content of hydrogen atoms in hydroxyl groups, carboxylic acid groups, etc.) of the phenol compound is preferably 2.0 mmol / g or more, and more preferably 4.0 mmol / g or more. The upper limit is preferably 25.0 mmol / g or less, more preferably 10.0 mmol / g or less.
 なお、本発明の組成物は、フェノール化合物以外にも、エポキシ化合物と反応可能な基を有する化合物(「その他の活性水素含有化合物」ともいう)を含んでもよい。
 ただし、本発明の組成物において、フェノール化合物の含有量に対する、その他の活性水素含有化合物の含有量の質量比は、0~1が好ましく、0~0.1がより好ましく、0~0.05が更に好ましい。
In addition to the phenol compound, the composition of the present invention may contain a compound having a group capable of reacting with the epoxy compound (also referred to as “other active hydrogen-containing compound”).
However, in the composition of the present invention, the mass ratio of the content of other active hydrogen-containing compounds to the content of the phenol compound is preferably 0 to 1, more preferably 0 to 0.1, and 0 to 0.05. Is more preferable.
 組成物中、フェノール化合物の含有量は、組成物の全固形分に対して、3~90質量%が好ましく、5~50質量%がより好ましく、7~40質量%が更に好ましい。
 なお、固形分とは、熱伝導材料を形成する成分を意図し、溶媒は含まれない。ここでいう、熱伝導材料を形成する成分は、熱伝導材料を形成する際に反応(重合)して化学構造が変化する成分でもよい。また、熱伝導材料を形成する成分であれば、その性状が液体状であっても、固形分とみなす。
The content of the phenol compound in the composition is preferably 3 to 90% by mass, more preferably 5 to 50% by mass, still more preferably 7 to 40% by mass, based on the total solid content of the composition.
The solid content is intended as a component forming a heat conductive material and does not contain a solvent. The component forming the heat conductive material referred to here may be a component whose chemical structure changes by reacting (polymerizing) when forming the heat conductive material. Further, if it is a component forming a heat conductive material, even if its property is liquid, it is regarded as a solid content.
〔エポキシ化合物〕
 本発明の組成物はエポキシ化合物を含むことも好ましい。
 エポキシ化合物は、1分子中に、少なくとも1つのエポキシ基(オキシラニル基)を有する化合物である。
 上記エポキシ基は、オキシラン環から1以上の水素原子(好ましくは1の水素原子)を除いてなる基である。上記エポキシ基は、可能な場合、更に置換基(直鎖状又は分岐鎖状の炭素数1~5のアルキル基等)を有していてもよい。
[Epoxy compound]
It is also preferable that the composition of the present invention contains an epoxy compound.
An epoxy compound is a compound having at least one epoxy group (oxylanyl group) in one molecule.
The epoxy group is a group obtained by removing one or more hydrogen atoms (preferably one hydrogen atom) from the oxylan ring. If possible, the epoxy group may further have a substituent (a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, or the like).
 エポキシ化合物が有するエポキシ基の数は、1分子中、2以上が好ましく、2~1000がより好ましく、2~40が更に好ましい。 The number of epoxy groups contained in the epoxy compound is preferably 2 or more, more preferably 2 to 1000, and even more preferably 2 to 40 in one molecule.
 エポキシ化合物の分子量は、150以上が好ましく、300以上がより好ましい。上記分子量の上限に制限はなく、例えば100000以下が好ましく、10000以下がより好ましい。
 なお、上記分子量に分子量分布がある場合、上記分子量は重量平均分子量である。
 本明細書において、数平均分子量及び重量平均分子量は、ゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフィ(GPC)によるポリスチレン換算で求めた重量平均分子量である。
The molecular weight of the epoxy compound is preferably 150 or more, more preferably 300 or more. The upper limit of the molecular weight is not limited, and for example, 100,000 or less is preferable, and 10,000 or less is more preferable.
When the molecular weight has a molecular weight distribution, the molecular weight is a weight average molecular weight.
In the present specification, the number average molecular weight and the weight average molecular weight are the weight average molecular weights obtained in terms of polystyrene by gel permeation chromatography (GPC).
 エポキシ化合物のエポキシ基含有量は、2.0~20.0mmol/gが好ましく、5.0~15.0mmol/gがより好ましい。
 なお、上記エポキシ基含有量は、エポキシ化合物1gが有する、エポキシ基の数を意図する。
 エポキシ化合物は、芳香環基(好ましくは芳香族炭化水素環基)を有するのも好ましい。
 芳香環基を有するエポキシ化合物の含有量は、全エポキシ化合物に対して、5~100質量%が好ましく、50~100質量%がより好ましく、70~100質量%が更に好ましい。
The epoxy group content of the epoxy compound is preferably 2.0 to 20.0 mmol / g, more preferably 5.0 to 15.0 mmol / g.
The epoxy group content is intended to be the number of epoxy groups contained in 1 g of the epoxy compound.
The epoxy compound also preferably has an aromatic ring group (preferably an aromatic hydrocarbon ring group).
The content of the epoxy compound having an aromatic ring group is preferably 5 to 100% by mass, more preferably 50 to 100% by mass, still more preferably 70 to 100% by mass, based on the total epoxy compound.
 エポキシ化合物は、液晶性を示してもよく示さなくてもよい。
 つまり、エポキシ化合物は、液晶化合物であってよい。言い換えれば、エポキシ基を有する液晶化合物であってもよい。
 エポキシ化合物(液晶性のエポキシ化合物であってもよい)としては、例えば、少なくとも部分的に棒状構造を含む化合物(棒状化合物)、及び、少なくとも部分的に円盤状構造を含む化合物(円盤状化合物)が挙げられる。
 以下、棒状化合物及び円盤状化合物について詳述する。
The epoxy compound may or may not exhibit liquid crystallinity.
That is, the epoxy compound may be a liquid crystal compound. In other words, it may be a liquid crystal compound having an epoxy group.
Examples of the epoxy compound (which may be a liquid crystal epoxy compound) include a compound having at least a rod-like structure (rod-like compound) and a compound having at least a disk-like structure (disk-like compound). Can be mentioned.
Hereinafter, the rod-shaped compound and the disk-shaped compound will be described in detail.
(棒状化合物)
 棒状化合物であるエポキシ化合物としては、アゾメチン類、アゾキシ類、シアノビフェニル類、シアノフェニルエステル類、安息香酸エステル類、シクロヘキサンカルボン酸フェニルエステル類、シアノフェニルシクロヘキサン類、シアノ置換フェニルピリミジン類、アルコキシ置換フェニルピリミジン類、フェニルジオキサン類、トラン類、及び、アルケニルシクロヘキシルベンゾニトリル類が挙げられる。以上のような低分子化合物だけではなく、高分子化合物も使用できる。上記高分子化合物は、低分子の反応性基を有する棒状化合物が重合した高分子化合物である。
 好ましい棒状化合物としては、下記一般式(XXI)で表される棒状化合物が挙げられる。
 一般式(XXI):Q-L111-A111-L113-M-L114-A112-L112-Q
(Stick compound)
Examples of the epoxy compound which is a rod-shaped compound include azomethines, azoxys, cyanobiphenyls, cyanophenyl esters, benzoic acid esters, cyclohexanecarboxylic acid phenyl esters, cyanophenylcyclohexanes, cyano-substituted phenylpyrimidines, and alkoxy-substituted phenyls. Examples thereof include pyrimidines, phenyldioxans, trans, and alkenylcyclohexylbenzonitriles. Not only low molecular weight compounds as described above, but also high molecular weight compounds can be used. The polymer compound is a polymer compound obtained by polymerizing a rod-shaped compound having a small molecule reactive group.
Preferred rod-shaped compounds include rod-shaped compounds represented by the following general formula (XXI).
General formula (XXI): Q1 - L 111 -A 111 -L 113 -ML 114 -A 112 -L 112 -Q 2
 一般式(XXI)中、Q及びQはそれぞれ独立に、エポキシ基であり、L111、L112、L113、及び、L114はそれぞれ独立に、単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。A111及びA112はそれぞれ独立に、炭素数1~20の2価の連結基(スペーサ基)を表す。Mはメソゲン基を表す。
 Q及びQのエポキシ基は、置換基を有していてもよいし、有していなくてもよい。
In the general formula (XXI), Q 1 and Q 2 are independent epoxy groups, and L 111 , L 112 , L 113 , and L 114 independently represent a single bond or a divalent linking group, respectively. .. A 111 and A 112 each independently represent a divalent linking group (spacer group) having 1 to 20 carbon atoms. M represents a mesogen group.
The epoxy groups of Q1 and Q2 may or may not have a substituent.
 一般式(XXI)中、L111、L112、L113、及び、L114はそれぞれ独立に、単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。
 L111、L112、L113、及び、L114で表される2価の連結基としては、それぞれ独立に、-O-、-S-、-CO-、-NR112-、-CO-O-、-O-CO-O-、-CO-NR112-、-NR112-CO-、-O-CO-、-CH-O-、-O-CH-、-O-CO-NR112-、-NR112-CO-O-、及び、-NR112-CO-NR112-からなる群より選ばれる2価の連結基であるのが好ましい。上記R112は炭素数1~7のアルキル基又は水素原子である。
 中でも、L113及びL114は、それぞれ独立に、-O-が好ましい。
 L111及びL112は、それぞれ独立に、単結合が好ましい。
In the general formula (XXI), L 111 , L 112 , L 113 , and L 114 each independently represent a single bond or a divalent linking group.
The divalent linking groups represented by L 111 , L 112 , L 113 , and L 114 are independently -O-, -S-, -CO-, -NR 112- , and -CO-O, respectively. -, -O-CO-O-, -CO-NR 112- , -NR 112 -CO-, -O-CO-, -CH 2 -O-, -O-CH 2- , -O-CO-NR It is preferably a divalent linking group selected from the group consisting of 112- , -NR 112 -CO-O-, and -NR 112 -CO-NR 112- . The above R 112 is an alkyl group or a hydrogen atom having 1 to 7 carbon atoms.
Among them, L 113 and L 114 are preferably —O— independently of each other.
L 111 and L 112 are preferably single bonds independently of each other.
 一般式(XXI)中、A111及びA112は、それぞれ独立に、炭素数1~20の2価の連結基を表す。
 2価の連結基は、隣接していない酸素原子及び硫黄原子等のヘテロ原子を含んでいてもよい。中でも、炭素数1~12の、アルキレン基、アルケニレン基、又は、アルキニレン基が好ましい。上記、アルキレン基、アルケニレン基、又は、アルキニレン基がエステル基を有していてもよいし、有していなくてもよい。
 2価の連結基は直鎖状であるのが好ましく、また、上記2価の連結基は置換基を有していてもよいし、有していなくてもよい。置換基としては、例えば、ハロゲン原子(フッ素原子、塩素原子、及び、臭素原子)、シアノ基、メチル基、及び、エチル基が挙げられる。
 中でも、A111及びA112は、それぞれ独立に、炭素数1~12のアルキレン基が好ましく、メチレン基がより好ましい。
In the general formula (XXI), A 111 and A 112 each independently represent a divalent linking group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms.
The divalent linking group may contain heteroatoms such as non-adjacent oxygen and sulfur atoms. Of these, an alkylene group, an alkenylene group, or an alkynylene group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms is preferable. The above-mentioned alkylene group, alkenylene group, or alkynylene group may or may not have an ester group.
The divalent linking group is preferably linear, and the divalent linking group may or may not have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom (fluorine atom, chlorine atom, and bromine atom), a cyano group, a methyl group, and an ethyl group.
Among them, A 111 and A 112 are each independently preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, and more preferably a methylene group.
 一般式(XXI)中、Mはメソゲン基を表し、上記メソゲン基としては、公知のメソゲン基が挙げられる。中でも、下記一般式(XXII)で表される基が好ましい。
 一般式(XXII):-(W-L115-W
In the general formula (XXI), M represents a mesogen group, and examples of the mesogen group include known mesogen groups. Among them, the group represented by the following general formula (XXII) is preferable.
General formula (XXII):-(W 1 -L 115 ) n -W 2-
 一般式(XXII)式中、W及びWは、それぞれ独立に、2価の環状アルキレン基、2価の環状アルケニレン基、アリーレン基、又は、2価のヘテロ環基を表す。L115は、単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。nは、1~4の整数を表す。 In the general formula (XXII), W 1 and W 2 independently represent a divalent cyclic alkylene group, a divalent cyclic alkaneylene group, an arylene group, or a divalent heterocyclic group, respectively. L 115 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. n represents an integer of 1 to 4.
 W及びWとしては、例えば、1,4-シクロヘキセンジイル、1,4-シクロヘキサンジイル、1,4-フェニレン、ピリミジン-2,5-ジイル、ピリジン-2,5-ジイル、1,3,4-チアジアゾール-2,5-ジイル、1,3,4-オキサジアゾール-2,5-ジイル、ナフタレン-2,6-ジイル、ナフタレン-1,5-ジイル、チオフェン-2,5-ジイル、及び、ピリダジン-3,6-ジイルが挙げられる。1,4-シクロヘキサンジイルの場合、トランス体及びシス体の構造異性体のどちらの異性体であってもよく、任意の割合の混合物でもよい。中でも、トランス体が好ましい。
 W及びWは、それぞれ置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、例えば、上述した置換基群Yで例示された基が挙げられ、より具体的には、ハロゲン原子(フッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子、及び、ヨウ素原子)、シアノ基、炭素数1~10のアルキル基(例えば、メチル基、エチル基、及び、プロピル基等)、炭素数1~10のアルコキシ基(例えば、メトキシ基、及び、エトキシ基等)、炭素数1~10のアシル基(例えば、ホルミル基、及び、アセチル基等)、炭素数1~10のアルコキシカルボニル基(例えば、メトキシカルボニル基、及び、エトキシカルボニル基等)、炭素数1~10のアシルオキシ基(例えば、アセチルオキシ基、及び、プロピオニルオキシ基等)、ニトロ基、トリフルオロメチル基、及び、ジフルオロメチル基等が挙げられる。
 Wが複数存在する場合、複数存在するWは、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。
Examples of W 1 and W 2 include 1,4-cyclohexenediyl, 1,4-cyclohexanediyl, 1,4-phenylene, pyrimidine-2,5-diyl, pyridine-2,5-diyl, 1,3. 4-Thiadiazole-2,5-diyl, 1,3,4-oxadiazole-2,5-diyl, naphthalene-2,6-diyl, naphthalene-1,5-diyl, thiophene-2,5-diyl, And pyridazine-3,6-zyl. In the case of 1,4-cyclohexanediyl, it may be either a trans isomer or a cis structural isomer, or a mixture in any proportion. Of these, the transformer body is preferable.
W 1 and W 2 may each have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include the groups exemplified in the above-mentioned substituent group Y, and more specifically, a halogen atom (fluorine atom, chlorine atom, bromine atom, and iodine atom), cyano group, and carbon. An alkyl group having a number of 1 to 10 (for example, a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, etc.), an alkoxy group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms (for example, a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, etc.), and a group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms. An acyl group (for example, a formyl group and an acetyl group, etc.), an alkoxycarbonyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms (for example, a methoxycarbonyl group, an ethoxycarbonyl group, etc.), and an acyloxy group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms (for example, an acyloxy group). Acetyloxy group, propionyloxy group, etc.), nitro group, trifluoromethyl group, difluoromethyl group and the like can be mentioned.
When a plurality of W 1s exist, the plurality of W 1s may be the same or different from each other.
 一般式(XXII)式中、L115は、単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。L115で表される2価の連結基としては、上述したL111~L114で表される2価の連結基の具体例が挙げられ、例えば、-CO-O-、-O-CO-、-CH-O-、及び、-O-CH-が挙げられる。
 L115が複数存在する場合、複数存在するL115は、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。
In the general formula (XXII), L 115 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. Specific examples of the divalent linking group represented by L 115 include the above-mentioned divalent linking groups represented by L 111 to L 114 , and examples thereof include -CO-O- and -O-CO-. , -CH 2 -O-, and -O-CH 2- .
When a plurality of L 115s are present, the plurality of L 115s may be the same or different from each other.
 上記一般式(XXII)で表されるメソゲン基の基本骨格で好ましい骨格を、以下に例示する。上記メソゲン基は、これらの骨格に置換基が置換していてもよい。 The preferred skeleton of the basic skeleton of the mesogen group represented by the above general formula (XXII) is illustrated below. The above-mentioned mesogen groups may be substituted with a substituent in these skeletons.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009
 上記骨格の中でも、得られる熱伝導材料の熱伝導性がより優れる点でビフェニル骨格が好ましい。
 なお、一般式(XXI)で表される化合物は、特表平11-513019号公報(WO97/00600)に記載の方法を参照して合成できる。
 棒状化合物は、特開平11-323162号公報及び特許4118691号に記載のメソゲン基を有するモノマーであってもよい。
Among the above skeletons, the biphenyl skeleton is preferable in that the obtained heat conductive material has more excellent heat conductivity.
The compound represented by the general formula (XXI) can be synthesized by referring to the method described in JP-A No. 11-513019 (WO97 / 00600).
The rod-shaped compound may be a monomer having a mesogen group described in JP-A No. 11-323162 and Japanese Patent No. 4118691.
 また、一般式(XXI)で表される化合物において、「Q-L111-」及び「-L112-Q」の一方又は両方が、ジグリシジルアミノ基に置き換わった化合物も好ましい。 Further, in the compound represented by the general formula (XXI), a compound in which one or both of "Q1 - L111- " and " -L112 - Q2 " are replaced with a diglycidylamino group is also preferable.
 中でも、棒状化合物は、一般式(E1)で表される化合物であるのが好ましい。 Among them, the rod-shaped compound is preferably a compound represented by the general formula (E1).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010
 一般式(E1)中、LE1は、それぞれ独立に、単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。
 中でも、LE1は、2価の連結基が好ましい。
 2価の連結基は、-O-、-S-、-CO-、-NH-、-CH=CH-、-C≡C-、-CH=N-、-N=CH-、-N=N-、置換意を有していてもよいアルキレン基、又は、これらの2以上の組み合わせからなる基が好ましく、-O-アルキレン基-又は-アルキレン基-O-がより好ましい。
 なお上記アルキレン基は、直鎖状、分岐鎖状、及び、環状のいずれでもよいが、炭素数1~2の直鎖状アルキレン基が好ましい。
 複数存在するLE1は、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。
In the general formula ( E1 ), LE1 independently represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
Of these, LE1 is preferably a divalent linking group.
The divalent linking groups are -O-, -S-, -CO-, -NH-, -CH = CH-, -C≡C-, -CH = N-, -N = CH-, -N = N-, an alkylene group which may have a substitution intention, or a group consisting of two or more of these is preferable, and -O-alkylene group- or -alkylene group-O- is more preferable.
The alkylene group may be linear, branched or cyclic, but a linear alkylene group having 1 to 2 carbon atoms is preferable.
A plurality of LE1s may be the same or different from each other.
 一般式(E1)中、LE2は、それぞれ独立に、単結合、-CH=CH-、-CO-O-、-O-CO-、-C(-CH)=CH-、-CH=C(-CH)-、-CH=N-、-N=CH-、-N=N-、-C≡C-、-N=N(-O)-、-N(-O)=N-、-CH=N(-O)-、-N(-O)=CH-、-CH=CH-CO-、-CO-CH=CH-、-CH=C(-CN)-、又は、-C(-CN)=CH-を表す。
 中でも、LE2は、それぞれ独立に、単結合、-CO-O-、又は、-O-CO-が好ましい。
 LE2が複数存在する場合、複数存在するLE2は、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。
In the general formula ( E1 ), LE2 are independently single-bonded, -CH = CH-, -CO-O-, -O-CO-, -C (-CH 3 ) = CH-, -CH =. C (-CH 3 )-, -CH = N-, -N = CH-, -N = N-, -C≡C-, -N = N + (-O - )-, -N + (-O" - ) = N-, -CH = N + (-O - )-, -N + ( -O- ) = CH-, -CH = CH-CO-, -CO-CH = CH-, -CH = C It represents (-CN)-or-C (-CN) = CH-.
Among them, LE2 is preferably single-bonded, -CO-O-, or -O-CO- independently of each other.
When there are a plurality of LE2s , the plurality of LE2s may be the same or different.
 一般式(E1)中、LE3は、それぞれ独立に、単結合、又は、置換基を有していてもよい、5員環若しくは6員環の芳香環基又は5員環若しくは6員環の非芳香環基、又は、これらの環からなる多環基を表す。
 LE3で表される芳香環基及び非芳香環基の例としては、置換基を有していてもよい、1,4-シクロヘキサンジイル基、1,4-シクロヘキセンジイル基、1,4-フェニレン基、ピリミジン-2,5-ジイル基、ピリジン-2,5-ジイル基、1,3,4-チアジアゾール-2,5-ジイル基、1,3,4-オキサジアゾール-2,5-ジイル基、ナフタレン-2,6-ジイル基、ナフタレン-1,5-ジイル基、チオフェン-2,5-ジイル基、及び、ピリダジン-3,6-ジイル基が挙げられる。1,4-シクロヘキサンジイル基の場合、トランス体及びシス体の構造異性体のどちらの異性体であってもよく、任意の割合の混合物でもよい。中でも、トランス体であるのが好ましい。
 中でも、LE3は、単結合、1,4-フェニレン基、又は、1,4-シクロヘキセンジイル基が好ましい。
 LE3で表される基が有する置換基は、それぞれ独立に、アルキル基、アルコキシ基、ハロゲン原子、シアノ基、ニトロ基、又は、アセチル基が好ましく、アルキル基(好ましくは炭素数1)がより好ましい。
 なお、置換基が複数存在する場合、置換基は、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。
 LE3が複数存在する場合、複数存在するLE3は、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。
In the general formula (E1), LE3 is a 5-membered or 6-membered aromatic ring group or a 5-membered or 6-membered ring which may independently have a single bond or a substituent. Represents a non-aromatic ring group or a polycyclic group composed of these rings.
Examples of the aromatic ring group and the non-aromatic ring group represented by LE3 include 1,4-cyclohexanediyl group, 1,4-cyclohexendyl group and 1,4-phenylene which may have a substituent. Group, pyrimidin-2,5-diyl group, pyridine-2,5-diyl group, 1,3,4-thiadiazol-2,5-diyl group, 1,3,4-oxadiazole-2,5-diyl Examples thereof include a group, a naphthalene-2,6-diyl group, a naphthalene-1,5-diyl group, a thiophene-2,5-diyl group, and a pyridazine-3,6-diyl group. In the case of a 1,4-cyclohexanediyl group, it may be either a trans isomer or a cis structural isomer, or a mixture in any proportion. Above all, a transformer body is preferable.
Among them, LE3 is preferably a single bond, a 1,4-phenylene group, or a 1,4-cyclohexenediyl group.
The substituent of the group represented by LE3 is preferably an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, a halogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, or an acetyl group, and more preferably an alkyl group (preferably 1 carbon number). preferable.
When a plurality of substituents are present, the substituents may be the same or different.
When there are a plurality of LE3s , the plurality of LE3s may be the same or different.
 一般式(E1)中、peは、0以上の整数を表す。
 peが2以上の整数である場合、複数存在する(-LE3-LE2-)は、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。
 中でも、peは、0~2が好ましく、0又は1がより好ましく、0が更に好ましい。
In the general formula (E1), pe represents an integer of 0 or more.
When pe is an integer of 2 or more, a plurality of ( -LE3 - LE2- ) may be the same or different from each other.
Among them, pe is preferably 0 to 2, more preferably 0 or 1, and even more preferably 0.
 一般式(E1)中、LE4は、それぞれ独立に、置換基を表す。
 置換基は、それぞれ独立に、アルキル基、アルコキシ基、ハロゲン原子、シアノ基、ニトロ基、又は、アセチル基が好ましく、アルキル基(好ましくは炭素数1)がより好ましい。
 複数存在するLE4は、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。また、次に説明するleが2以上の整数である場合、同一の(LE4le中に複数存在するLE4も、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。
In the general formula (E1), LE4 independently represents a substituent.
As the substituent, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, a halogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, or an acetyl group are preferable, and an alkyl group (preferably 1 carbon number) is more preferable.
A plurality of LE4s may be the same or different from each other. Further, when le described below is an integer of 2 or more, a plurality of LE4s existing in the same ( LE4 ) le may be the same or different.
 一般式(E1)中、leは、それぞれ独立に、0~4の整数を表す。
 中でも、leは、それぞれ独立に、0~2が好ましい。
 複数存在するleは、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。
In the general formula (E1), le independently represents an integer of 0 to 4.
Among them, le is preferably 0 to 2 independently of each other.
A plurality of le's may be the same or different from each other.
 また、一般式(E1)で表される化合物において、2個存在する「エポキシ基-LE1-」の一方又は両方が、ジグリシジルアミノアルキレン基(好ましくはジグリシジルアミノメチレン基)に置き換わった化合物も好ましい。 Further, in the compound represented by the general formula ( E1 ), one or both of the two existing "epoxy groups-LE1-" are replaced with diglycidylaminoalkylene groups (preferably diglycidyl aminomethylene groups). Is also preferable.
 棒状化合物は、得られる熱伝導材料の熱伝導性がより優れる点でビフェニル骨格を有するのも好ましい。
 言い換えると、エポキシ化合物は、ビフェニル骨格を有するのも好ましく、この場合のエポキシ化合物は棒状化合物であるのが好ましい。
It is also preferable that the rod-shaped compound has a biphenyl skeleton in that the obtained heat conductive material has better heat conductivity.
In other words, the epoxy compound preferably has a biphenyl skeleton, and the epoxy compound in this case is preferably a rod-shaped compound.
(円盤状化合物)
 円盤状化合物であるエポキシ化合物は、少なくとも部分的に円盤状構造を有する。
 円盤状構造は、少なくとも、脂環又は芳香族環を有する。特に、円盤状構造が、芳香族環を有する場合、円盤状化合物は、分子間のπ-π相互作用によるスタッキング構造の形成により柱状構造を形成しうる。
 円盤状構造として、具体的には、Angew.Chem.Int. Ed. 2012, 51, 7990-7993又は特開平7-306317号公報に記載のトリフェニレン構造、並びに、特開2007-002220号公報及び特開2010-244038号公報に記載の3置換ベンゼン構造等が挙げられる。
(Disc-shaped compound)
The epoxy compound, which is a disc-shaped compound, has a disc-shaped structure at least partially.
The disc-like structure has at least an alicyclic or aromatic ring. In particular, when the disk-shaped structure has an aromatic ring, the disk-shaped compound can form a columnar structure by forming a stacking structure by π-π interaction between molecules.
As a disk-shaped structure, specifically, Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Examples thereof include the triphenylene structure described in 2012, 51, 7990-7793 or JP-A-7-306317, and the tri-substituted benzene structure described in JP-A-2007-002220 and JP-A-2010-2440338.
 エポキシ化合物として円盤状化合物を用いれば、高い熱伝導性を示す熱伝導材料が得られる。その理由としては、棒状化合物が直線的(一次元的)にしか熱伝導できないのに対して、円盤状化合物は法線方向に平面的(二次元的)に熱伝導できるため、熱伝導パスが増え、熱伝導率が向上する、と考えられる。 If a disk-shaped compound is used as the epoxy compound, a heat conductive material showing high heat conductivity can be obtained. The reason is that the rod-shaped compound can conduct heat only linearly (one-dimensionally), whereas the disk-shaped compound can conduct heat planarly (two-dimensionally) in the normal direction, so that the heat conduction path is It is thought that the number will increase and the thermal conductivity will improve.
 上記円盤状化合物は、エポキシ基を3つ以上有するのが好ましい。3つ以上のエポキシ基を有する円盤状化合物を含む組成物の硬化物はガラス転移温度が高く、耐熱性が高い傾向がある。
 円盤状化合物が有するエポキシ基の数は、8以下が好ましく、6以下より好ましい。
The disk-shaped compound preferably has three or more epoxy groups. A cured product of a composition containing a disk-shaped compound having three or more epoxy groups tends to have a high glass transition temperature and high heat resistance.
The number of epoxy groups contained in the disk-shaped compound is preferably 8 or less, and more preferably 6 or less.
 円盤状化合物の具体例としては、C. Destrade et al., Mol. Crysr. Liq. Cryst., vol. 71, page 111 (1981) ;日本化学会編、季刊化学総説、No.22、液晶の化学、第5章、第10章第2節(1994);B. Kohne et al., Angew. Chem. Soc. Chem. Comm., page 1794 (1985);J. Zhang et al., J. Am. Chem. Soc., vol. 116, page 2655 (1994)、及び特許第4592225号に記載されている化合物等において末端の少なくとも1つ(好ましくは3つ以上)をエポキシ基とした化合物が挙げられる。
 円盤状化合物としては、Angew.Chem.Int. Ed. 2012, 51, 7990-7993、及び特開平7-306317号公報に記載のトリフェニレン構造、並びに、特開2007-002220号公報、及び、特開2010-244038号公報に記載の3置換ベンゼン構造において末端の少なくとも1つ(好ましくは3つ以上)をエポキシ基とした化合物等が挙げられる。
Specific examples of the disk-shaped compound include C.I. Destrade et al. , Mol. Crysr. Liq. Cryst. , Vol. 71, page 111 (1981); Chemical Society of Japan, Quarterly Review of Chemistry, No. 22, Liquid crystal chemistry, Chapter 5, Chapter 10, Section 2 (1994); B. Kohne et al. , Angew. Chem. Soc. Chem. Comm. , Page 1794 (1985); J. Mol. Zhang et al. , J. Am. Chem. Soc. , Vol. In the compounds described in 116, page 2655 (1994), and Japanese Patent No. 4592225, compounds having at least one end (preferably three or more) as an epoxy group can be mentioned.
Examples of the disk-shaped compound include Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Ends in the triphenylene structure described in 2012, 51, 7990-7793, and JP-A-7-306317, and the tri-substituted benzene structure described in JP-A-2007-002220 and JP-A-2010-240383. Examples thereof include compounds in which at least one (preferably three or more) of the above is used as an epoxy group.
 円盤状化合物としては、熱伝導材料の熱伝導性がより優れる観点から、以下に示す式(D1)~(D16)のいずれかで表される化合物が好ましい。
 まず、式(D1)~(D15)について説明し、その後、式(D16)について説明する。
 なお、以下の式中、「-LQ」は「-L-Q」を表し、「QL-」は「Q-L-」を表す。
As the disk-shaped compound, a compound represented by any of the following formulas (D1) to (D16) is preferable from the viewpoint of better thermal conductivity of the heat conductive material.
First, the equations (D1) to (D15) will be described, and then the equation (D16) will be described.
In the following formula, "-LQ" represents "-L-Q" and "QL-" represents "QL-".
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014
 式(D1)~(D15)中、Lは2価の連結基を表す。
 熱伝導材料の熱伝導性がより優れる観点から、Lは、それぞれ独立に、アルキレン基、アルケニレン基、アリーレン基、-CO-、-NH-、-O-、-S-、及び、これらの組み合わせからなる群より選ばれる基であるのが好ましく、アルキレン基、アルケニレン基、アリーレン基、-CO-、-NH-、-O-、及び、-S-からなる群より選ばれる基を2個以上組み合わせた基であるのがより好ましい。
 上記アルキレン基の炭素数は、1~12が好ましい。上記アルケニレン基の炭素数は、2~12が好ましい。上記アリーレン基の炭素数は、10以下が好ましい。
 アルキレン基、アルケニレン基、及び、アリーレン基は、置換基(好ましくは、アルキル基、ハロゲン原子、シアノ、アルコキシ基、及び、アシルオキシ基等)を有していてもよい。
In the formulas (D1) to (D15), L represents a divalent linking group.
From the viewpoint of better thermal conductivity of the thermally conductive material, L is independently an alkylene group, an alkaneylene group, an arylene group, -CO-, -NH-, -O-, -S-, and a combination thereof. It is preferable that the group is selected from the group consisting of, and two or more groups are selected from the group consisting of an alkylene group, an alkenylene group, an arylene group, -CO-, -NH-, -O-, and -S-. More preferably, it is a combined group.
The alkylene group preferably has 1 to 12 carbon atoms. The number of carbon atoms of the alkenylene group is preferably 2 to 12. The arylene group preferably has 10 or less carbon atoms.
The alkylene group, alkenylene group, and arylene group may have a substituent (preferably an alkyl group, a halogen atom, a cyano, an alkoxy group, an acyloxy group, etc.).
 Lの例を以下に示す。以下の例では、左側の結合手が式(D1)~(D15)のいずれかで表される化合物の中心構造(以下、単に「中心環」ともいう)の側に結合し、右側の結合手がQに結合する。
 ALはアルキレン基又はアルケニレン基を意味し、ARはアリーレン基を意味する。
 ALで表されるアルキレン基は、直鎖状でも分岐鎖状でもよく、炭素数は例えば1~12である。ALで表されるアルケニレン基は、直鎖状でも分岐鎖状でもよく、炭素数は例えば2~12である。ARで表されるアリーレン基は、単環でも多環でもよく、環員原子数は6~12が好ましい。
An example of L is shown below. In the following example, the bond on the left side binds to the side of the central structure of the compound represented by any of the formulas (D1) to (D15) (hereinafter, also simply referred to as "central ring"), and the bond on the right side. Combines with Q.
AL means an alkylene group or an alkenylene group, and AR means an arylene group.
The alkylene group represented by AL may be linear or branched, and has, for example, 1 to 12 carbon atoms. The alkenylene group represented by AL may be linear or branched, and has, for example, 2 to 12 carbon atoms. The arylene group represented by AR may be monocyclic or polycyclic, and the number of ring member atoms is preferably 6 to 12.
L101:-AL-CO-O-AL-
L102:-AL-CO-O-AL-O-
L103:-AL-CO-O-AL-O-AL-
L104:-AL-CO-O-AL-O-CO-
L105:-CO-AR-O-AL-
L106:-CO-AR-O-AL-O-
L107:-CO-AR-O-AL-O-CO-
L108:-CO-NH-AL-
L109:-NH-AL-O-
L110:-NH-AL-O-CO-
L111:-O-AL-
L112:-O-AL-O-
L113:-O-AL-O-CO-
L101: -AL-CO-O-AL-
L102: -AL-CO-O-AL-O-
L103: -AL-CO-O-AL-O-AL-
L104: -AL-CO-O-AL-O-CO-
L105: -CO-AR-O-AL-
L106: -CO-AR-O-AL-O-
L107: -CO-AR-O-AL-O-CO-
L108: -CO-NH-AL-
L109: -NH-AL-O-
L110: -NH-AL-O-CO-
L111: -O-AL-
L112: -O-AL-O-
L113: -O-AL-O-CO-
L114:-O-AL-O-CO-NH-AL-
L115:-O-AL-S-AL-
L116:-O-CO-AL-AR-O-AL-O-CO-
L117:-O-CO-AR-O-AL-CO-
L118:-O-CO-AR-O-AL-O-CO-
L119:-O-CO-AR-O-AL-O-AL-O-CO-
L120:-O-CO-AR-O-AL-O-AL-O-AL-O-CO-
L121:-S-AL-
L122:-S-AL-O-
L123:-S-AL-O-CO-
L124:-S-AL-S-AL-
L125:-S-AR-AL-
L126:-O-CO-AL-
L127:-O-CO-AL-O-
L128:-O-CO-AR-O-AL-
L129:-O-CO-
L130:-O-CO-AR-O-AL-O-CO-AL-S-AR-
L131:-O-CO-AL-S-AR-
L132:-O-CO-AR-O-AL-O-CO-AL-S-AL-
L133:-O-CO-AL-S-AR-
L134:-O-AL-S-AR-
L135:-AL-CO-O-AL-O-CO-AL-S-AR-
L136:-AL-CO-O-AL-O-CO-AL-S-AL-
L137:-O-AL-O-AR-
L138:-O-AL-O-CO-AR-
L139:-O-AL-NH-AR-
L140:-O-CO-AL-O-AR-
L141:-O-CO-AR-O-AL-O-AR-
L142:-AL-CO-O-AR-
L143:-AL-CO-O-AL-O-AR-
L114: -O-AL-O-CO-NH-AL-
L115: -O-AL-S-AL-
L116: -O-CO-AL-AR-O-AL-O-CO-
L117: -O-CO-AR-O-AL-CO-
L118: -O-CO-AR-O-AL-O-CO-
L119: -O-CO-AR-O-AL-O-AL-O-CO-
L120: -O-CO-AR-O-AL-O-AL-O-AL-O-CO-
L121: -S-AL-
L122: -S-AL-O-
L123: -S-AL-O-CO-
L124: -S-AL-S-AL-
L125: -S-AR-AL-
L126: -O-CO-AL-
L127: -O-CO-AL-O-
L128: -O-CO-AR-O-AL-
L129: -O-CO-
L130: -O-CO-AR-O-AL-O-CO-AL-S-AR-
L131: -O-CO-AL-S-AR-
L132: -O-CO-AR-O-AL-O-CO-AL-S-AL-
L133: -O-CO-AL-S-AR-
L134: -O-AL-S-AR-
L135: -AL-CO-O-AL-O-CO-AL-S-AR-
L136: -AL-CO-O-AL-O-CO-AL-S-AL-
L137: -O-AL-O-AR-
L138: -O-AL-O-CO-AR-
L139: -O-AL-NH-AR-
L140: -O-CO-AL-O-AR-
L141: -O-CO-AR-O-AL-O-AR-
L142: -AL-CO-O-AR-
L143: -AL-CO-O-AL-O-AR-
 式(D1)~(D15)中、Qは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子又は置換基を表す。
 置換基としては、上述した置換基群Yで例示される基が挙げられる。より具体的には、置換基としては、上記反応性官能基、ハロゲン原子、イソシアネート基、シアノ基、不飽和重合性基、エポキシ基、オキセタニル基、アジリジニル基、チオイソシアネート基、アルデヒド基、及び、スルホ基が挙げられる。
 ただし、Qがエポキシ基以外の基である場合、Qはエポキシ基に対して安定であるのが好ましい。
 なお、式(D1)~(D15)中、1つ以上(好ましくは2つ以上)のQは、エポキシ基を表す。中でも、熱伝導材料の熱伝導性がより優れる観点から、すべてのQがエポキシ基を表すのが好ましい。
 なお、式(D1)~(D15)で表される化合物は、エポキシ基の安定性の点からは、-NH-を有さないのが好ましい。
In the formulas (D1) to (D15), Q independently represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
Examples of the substituent include the groups exemplified in the above-mentioned substituent group Y. More specifically, as the substituent, the above-mentioned reactive functional group, halogen atom, isocyanate group, cyano group, unsaturated polymerizable group, epoxy group, oxetanyl group, aziridinyl group, thioisocyanate group, aldehyde group, and Examples include sulfo groups.
However, when Q is a group other than the epoxy group, it is preferable that Q is stable with respect to the epoxy group.
In the formulas (D1) to (D15), one or more (preferably two or more) Qs represent an epoxy group. Above all, from the viewpoint of better thermal conductivity of the heat conductive material, it is preferable that all Qs represent epoxy groups.
The compounds represented by the formulas (D1) to (D15) preferably do not have -NH- from the viewpoint of the stability of the epoxy group.
 式(D1)~(D15)で表される化合物の中でも、熱伝導材料の熱伝導性がより優れる観点から、式(D4)で表される化合物が好ましい。言い換えると、円盤状化合物の中心環はトリフェニレン環であるのが好ましい。
 式(D4)で表される化合物としては、熱伝導材料の熱伝導性がより優れる観点から、式(XI)で表される化合物が好ましい。
Among the compounds represented by the formulas (D1) to (D15), the compound represented by the formula (D4) is preferable from the viewpoint of more excellent thermal conductivity of the heat conductive material. In other words, the central ring of the disc-shaped compound is preferably a triphenylene ring.
As the compound represented by the formula (D4), the compound represented by the formula (XI) is preferable from the viewpoint of more excellent thermal conductivity of the heat conductive material.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015
 式(XI)中、R11、R12、R13、R14、R15、及び、R16は、それぞれ独立に、*-X11-L11-P11、又は、*-X12-L12-Y12を表す。
 なお、*はトリフェニレン環との結合位置を表す。
 R11、R12、R13、R14、R15、及び、R16のうち、2個以上は、*-X11-L11-P11であり、3個以上が*-X11-L11-P11であるのが好ましい。
 中でも、熱伝導材料の熱伝導性がより優れる観点から、R11及びR12のいずれか1個以上、R13及びR14のいずれか1個以上、並びに、R15及びR16のいずれか1個以上が、*-X11-L11-P11であるのが好ましい。
 R11、R12、R13、R14、R15、及び、R16が、全て、*-X11-L11-P11であるのがより好ましい。加えて、R11、R12、R13、R14、R15、及び、R16が、全て同一であるのが更に好ましい。
In formula (XI), R 11 , R 12 , R 13 , R 14 , R 15 , and R 16 are independently * -X 11 -L 11 -P 11 or * -X 12 -L, respectively. 12 -Y Represents 12 .
Note that * represents the bonding position with the triphenylene ring.
Of R 11 , R 12 , R 13 , R 14 , R 15 , and R 16 , two or more are * -X 11 -L 11 -P 11 , and three or more are * -X 11 -L. 11 -P 11 is preferable.
Above all, from the viewpoint of better thermal conductivity of the heat conductive material, one or more of R 11 and R 12 , one or more of R 13 and R 14 , and any one of R 15 and R 16 It is preferable that the number is * -X 11 -L 11 -P 11 .
It is more preferable that R 11 , R 12 , R 13 , R 14 , R 15 , and R 16 are all * -X 11 -L 11 -P 11 . In addition, it is more preferred that R 11 , R 12 , R 13 , R 14 , R 15 and R 16 are all the same.
 X11は、それぞれ独立に、単結合、-O-、-CO-、-NH-、-O-CO-、-O-CO-O-、-O-CO-NH-、-O-CO-S-、-CO-O-、-CO-NH-、-CO-S-、-NH-CO-、-NH-CO-O-、-NH-CO-NH-、-NH-CO-S-、-S-、-S-CO-、-S-CO-O-、-S-CO-NH-、又は、-S-CO-S-を表す。
 中でも、X11は、それぞれ独立に、-O-、-O-CO-、-O-CO-O-、-O-CO-NH-、-CO-O-、-CO-NH-、-NH-CO-、又は、-NH-CO-O-が好ましく、-O-、-O-CO-、-CO-O-、-O-CO-NH-、又は、-CO-NH-がより好ましく、-O-CO-又は-CO-O-が更に好ましい。
X 11 is independently single-bonded, -O-, -CO-, -NH-, -O-CO-, -O-CO-O-, -O-CO-NH-, -O-CO-. S-, -CO-O-, -CO-NH-, -CO-S-, -NH-CO-, -NH-CO-O-, -NH-CO-NH-, -NH-CO-S- , -S-, -S-CO-, -S-CO-O-, -S-CO-NH-, or -S-CO-S-.
Among them, X 11 independently have -O-, -O-CO-, -O-CO-O-, -O-CO-NH-, -CO-O-, -CO-NH-, and -NH. -CO- or -NH-CO-O- is preferable, and -O-, -O-CO-, -CO-O-, -O-CO-NH-, or -CO-NH- is more preferable. , -O-CO- or -CO-O- is even more preferred.
 L11は、それぞれ独立に、単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。
 2価の連結基の例としては、-O-、-O-CO-、-CO-O-、-S-、-NH-、アルキレン基(炭素数は、1~10が好ましく、1~8がより好ましく、1~7が更に好ましい。)、アリーレン基(炭素数は、6~20が好ましく、6~14がより好ましく、6~10が更に好ましい。)、又は、これらの組み合わせからなる基が挙げられる。
 上記アルキレン基としては、メチレン基、エチレン基、プロピレン基、ブチレン基、ペンチレン基、ヘキシレン基、及び、ヘプチレン基が挙げられる。
 上記アリーレン基としては、1,4-フェニレン基、1,3-フェニレン基、1,4-ナフチレン基、1,5-ナフチレン基、及び、アントラセニレン基が挙げられ、1,4-フェニレン基が好ましい。
L 11 independently represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
Examples of divalent linking groups include -O-, -O-CO-, -CO-O-, -S-, -NH-, and alkylene groups (preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms, 1 to 8 carbon atoms). Is more preferable, 1 to 7 is more preferable), an arylene group (the number of carbon atoms is preferably 6 to 20, more preferably 6 to 14, and even more preferably 6 to 10), or a group consisting of a combination thereof. Can be mentioned.
Examples of the alkylene group include a methylene group, an ethylene group, a propylene group, a butylene group, a pentylene group, a hexylene group, and a heptylene group.
Examples of the arylene group include a 1,4-phenylene group, a 1,3-phenylene group, a 1,4-naphthylene group, a 1,5-naphthylene group and an anthrasenylene group, and a 1,4-phenylene group is preferable. ..
 上記アルキレン基及び上記アリーレン基はそれぞれ置換基を有していてもよい。置換基の数は、1~3が好ましく、1がより好ましい。置換基の置換位置は特に制限されない。置換基としては、ハロゲン原子又は炭素数1~3のアルキル基が好ましく、メチル基がより好ましい。
 上記アルキレン基及び上記アリーレン基は無置換であるのも好ましい。中でも、アルキレン基は無置換であるのが好ましい。
The alkylene group and the arylene group may each have a substituent. The number of substituents is preferably 1 to 3, more preferably 1. The substitution position of the substituent is not particularly limited. As the substituent, a halogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms is preferable, and a methyl group is more preferable.
It is also preferable that the alkylene group and the arylene group are unsubstituted. Of these, the alkylene group is preferably unsubstituted.
 -X11-L11-の例として、上述のLの例であるL101~L143が挙げられる。 Examples of −X 11 − L 11 − include L101 to L143, which are examples of L described above.
 P11は、エポキシ基を表す。上記エポキシ基は置換基を有していてもよく、有していなくてもよい。 P 11 represents an epoxy group. The epoxy group may or may not have a substituent.
 X12は、X11と同様であり、好適な条件も同様である。
 L12は、L11と同様であり、好適な条件も同様である。
 -X12-L12-の例として、上述のLの例であるL101~L143が挙げられる。
X 12 is the same as X 11 , and the preferred conditions are also the same.
L 12 is the same as L 11 , and the preferred conditions are also the same.
Examples of −X 12 − L 12 − include L101 to L143, which are examples of L described above.
 Y12は、水素原子、炭素数1~20の直鎖状、分岐鎖状、若しくは、環状のアルキル基、又は、炭素数1~20の直鎖状、分岐鎖状、若しくは、環状のアルキル基において1個又は2個以上のメチレン基が-O-、-S-、-NH-、-N(CH)-、-CO-、-O-CO-、又は-CO-O-で置換された基を表す。
 Y12が、炭素数1~20の直鎖状、分岐鎖状、若しくは、環状のアルキル基、又は、炭素数1~20の直鎖状、分岐鎖状、若しくは、環状のアルキル基において1個又は2個以上のメチレン基が-O-、-S-、-NH-、-N(CH)-、-CO-、-O-CO-、又は-CO-O-で置換された基の場合、Y12に含まれる水素原子の1個以上がハロゲン原子で置換されていてもよい。
Y 12 is a hydrogen atom, a linear, branched or cyclic alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or a linear, branched or cyclic alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms. In, one or more methylene groups are substituted with -O-, -S-, -NH-, -N (CH 3 )-, -CO-, -O-CO-, or -CO-O-. Represents a group.
One Y 12 is a linear, branched or cyclic alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or a linear, branched or cyclic alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms. Or a group in which two or more methylene groups are substituted with -O-, -S-, -NH-, -N (CH 3 )-, -CO-, -O-CO-, or -CO-O-. In this case, one or more hydrogen atoms contained in Y 12 may be substituted with halogen atoms.
 式(XI)で表される化合物の具体例については、特開平7-281028号公報の段落番号0028~0036、特開平7-306317号公報、特開2005-156822号公報の段落番号0016~0018、特開2006-301614号公報の段落番号0067~0072、及び、液晶便覧(平成12年丸善株式会社発刊)330頁~333頁に記載の化合物において、末端の少なくとも1つ(好ましくは3つ以上)をエポキシ基とした化合物が挙げられる。 For specific examples of the compound represented by the formula (XI), paragraph numbers 0028 to 0036 of JP-A-7-281028, paragraph numbers 0016 to 0018 of JP-A-7-306317 and JP-A-2005-156822 are provided. , Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-301614, paragraph numbers 0067 to 0072, and LCD Handbook (published by Maruzen Co., Ltd., 2000), pages 330 to 333, at least one at the end (preferably three or more). ) As an epoxy group.
 式(XI)で表される化合物は、特開平7-306317号公報、特開平7-281028号公報、特開2005-156822号公報、及び、特開2006-301614号公報に記載の方法に準じて合成できる。 The compound represented by the formula (XI) conforms to the methods described in JP-A-7-306317, JP-A-7-281028, JP-A-2005-156822, and JP-A-2006-301614. Can be synthesized.
 また、熱伝導材料の熱伝導性がより優れる観点から、円盤状化合物として、式(D16)で表される化合物も好ましい。 Further, from the viewpoint of better thermal conductivity of the heat conductive material, the compound represented by the formula (D16) is also preferable as the disk-shaped compound.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000016
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000016
 式(D16)中、A2X、A3X、及び、A4Xは、それぞれ独立に、-CH=又は-N=を表す。中でも、A2X、A3X、及び、A4Xが、いずれも-CH=であること、又は、いずれも-N=であることが好ましい。つまり、A2X、A3X、及び、A4Xを含む6員環(中心環)が、ベンゼン環であること、又は、トリアジン環であることが好ましい。
 R17X、R18X、及び、R19Xは、それぞれ独立に、*-X211X-(Z21X-X212Xn21X-L21X-Qを表す。*は、中心環との結合位置を表す。
 X211X及びX212Xは、それぞれ独立に、単結合、-O-、-CO-、-NH-、-O-CO-、-O-CO-O-、-O-CO-NH-、-O-CO-S-、-CO-O-、-CO-NH-、-CO-S-、-NH-CO-、-NH-CO-O-、-NH-CO-NH-、-NH-CO-S-、-S-、-S-CO-、-S-CO-O-、-S-CO-NH-、又は、-S-CO-S-を表す。
 Z21Xは、それぞれ独立に、5員環若しくは6員環の芳香環基、又は、5員環若しくは6員環の非芳香環基を表す。
 L21Xは、単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。
 Qは、式(D1)~(D15)におけるQと同義であり、好ましい条件も同様である。式(D16)中、複数存在するQのうち、少なくとも1つ(好ましくは全部)のQは、エポキシ基を表す。
 n21Xは、0~3の整数を表す。n21Xが2以上の場合、複数存在する(Z21X-X212X)は、同一でも異なっていてもよい。
In formula (D16), A 2X , A 3X , and A 4X each independently represent −CH = or −N =. Above all, it is preferable that A 2X , A 3X , and A 4X are all −CH = or all are −N =. That is, it is preferable that the 6-membered ring (central ring) including A 2X , A 3X , and A 4X is a benzene ring or a triazine ring.
R 17X , R 18X , and R 19X each independently represent * -X 211X- (Z 21X -X 212X ) n21X- L 21X -Q. * Represents the position of connection with the central ring.
X 211X and X 212X are independently single-bonded, -O-, -CO-, -NH-, -O-CO-, -O-CO-O-, -O-CO-NH-, -O. -CO-S-, -CO-O-, -CO-NH-, -CO-S-, -NH-CO-, -NH-CO-O-, -NH-CO-NH-, -NH-CO Represents —S—, —S—, —S—CO—, —S—CO—O—, —S—CO—NH—, or —S—CO—S—.
Z 21X independently represents a 5- or 6-membered aromatic ring group or a 5-membered or 6-membered non-aromatic ring group, respectively.
L 21X represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
Q is synonymous with Q in the formulas (D1) to (D15), and the preferred conditions are also the same. In the formula (D16), at least one (preferably all) Q among the plurality of Qs present represents an epoxy group.
n21X represents an integer of 0 to 3. When n21X is 2 or more, a plurality of (Z 21X -X 212X ) may be the same or different.
 式(D16)で表される化合物としては、式(XII)で表される化合物が好ましい。 As the compound represented by the formula (D16), the compound represented by the formula (XII) is preferable.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017
 式(XII)中、A、A、及び、Aは、それぞれ独立に、-CH=又は-N=を表す。中でも、A、A、及び、Aが、いずれも-CH=であること、又は、いずれも-N=であることが好ましい。つまり、A、A、及び、Aを含む6員環(中心環)が、ベンゼン環であること、又は、トリアジン環であることが好ましい。 In formula (XII), A 2 , A 3 , and A 4 independently represent -CH = or -N =, respectively. Above all, it is preferable that A 2 , A 3 and A 4 are all −CH = or all are −N =. That is, it is preferable that the 6-membered ring (central ring) including A 2 , A 3 and A 4 is a benzene ring or a triazine ring.
 R17、R18、及び、R19は、それぞれ独立に、*-X211-(Z21-X212n21-L21-P21、又は、*-X221-(Z22-X222n22-Y22を表す。*は中心環との結合位置を表す。
 R17、R18、及び、R19のうち2個以上は、*-X211-(Z21-X212n21-L21-P21である。熱伝導材料の熱伝導性がより優れる観点から、R17、R18、及び、R19は全てが、*-X211-(Z21-X212n21-L21-P21であるのが好ましい。
 加えて、R17、R18、及び、R19が、全て同一であるのが好ましい。
R 17 , R 18 and R 19 are independently * -X 211- (Z 21 -X 212 ) n21 -L 21 -P 21 or * -X 221- (Z 22 -X 222 ). Represents n22 - Y22 . * Represents the position of connection with the central ring.
Two or more of R 17 , R 18 , and R 19 are * -X 211- (Z 21 -X 212 ) n21 -L 21 -P 21 . From the viewpoint of better thermal conductivity of the heat conductive material, R 17 , R 18 and R 19 are all * -X 211- (Z 21 -X 212 ) n21 -L 21 -P 21 . preferable.
In addition, it is preferable that R 17 , R 18 , and R 19 are all the same.
 X211、X212、X221、及び、X222は、それぞれ独立に、単結合、-O-、-CO-、-NH-、-O-CO-、-O-CO-O-、-O-CO-NH-、-O-CO-S-、-CO-O-、-CO-NH-、-CO-S-、-NH-CO-、-NH-CO-O-、-NH-CO-NH-、-NH-CO-S-、-S-、-S-CO-、-S-CO-O-、-S-CO-NH-、又は、-S-CO-S-を表す。
 中でも、X211、X212、X221、及び、X222としては、それぞれ独立に、単結合、-NH-、-O-、-CO-O-、又は、-O-CO-が好ましい。
X 211 , X 212 , X 221 and X 222 are independently single-bonded, -O-, -CO-, -NH-, -O-CO-, -O-CO-O-, -O, respectively. -CO-NH-, -O-CO-S-, -CO-O-, -CO-NH-, -CO-S-, -NH-CO-, -NH-CO-O-, -NH-CO Represents -NH-, -NH-CO-S-, -S-, -S-CO-, -S-CO-O-, -S-CO-NH-, or -S-CO-S-.
Among them, as X 211 , X 212 , X 221 and X 222 , single bond, -NH-, -O-, -CO-O-, or -O-CO- is preferable, respectively.
 Z21及びZ22は、それぞれ独立に、5員環若しくは6員環の芳香環基、又は、5員環若しくは6員環の非芳香環基を表し、例えば、ベンゼン環基(1,4-フェニレン基及び1,3-フェニレン基等)、並びに、芳香族複素環基が挙げられる。 Z 21 and Z 22 independently represent a 5-membered or 6-membered aromatic ring group or a 5-membered or 6-membered non-aromatic ring group, for example, a benzene ring group (1,4-). Examples thereof include a phenylene group and a 1,3-phenylene group), and an aromatic heterocyclic group.
 上記芳香環基及び上記非芳香環基は、置換基を有していてもよい。置換基を有する場合、置換基の数は、1~4が好ましく、1又は2がより好ましく、1が更に好ましい。置換基の置換位置は、特に制限されない。置換基としては、ハロゲン原子又はメチル基が好ましい。上記芳香環基及び上記非芳香環基は無置換であるのも好ましい。また、置換基として、更に「-X212-L21-P21」で表される基を有していてもよい。 The aromatic ring group and the non-aromatic ring group may have a substituent. When having a substituent, the number of substituents is preferably 1 to 4, more preferably 1 or 2, and even more preferably 1. The substitution position of the substituent is not particularly limited. As the substituent, a halogen atom or a methyl group is preferable. It is also preferable that the aromatic ring group and the non-aromatic ring group are unsubstituted. Further, as the substituent, it may further have a group represented by "-X 212 -L 21 -P 21 ".
 芳香族複素環基としては、例えば、以下の芳香族複素環基が挙げられる。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000018
Examples of the aromatic heterocyclic group include the following aromatic heterocyclic groups.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000018
 式中、*はX211又はX221に結合する部位を表す。**はX212又はX222に結合する部位を表す。A41及びA42は、それぞれ独立に、メチン基又は窒素原子を表す。Xは、酸素原子、硫黄原子、又は、イミノ基を表す。
 A41及びA42は、少なくとも一方が窒素原子であるのが好ましく、両方が窒素原子であるのがより好ましい。また、Xは、酸素原子であるのが好ましい。
In the formula, * represents a site that binds to X 211 or X 221 . ** represents a site that binds to X 212 or X 222 . A 41 and A 42 each independently represent a methine group or a nitrogen atom. X4 represents an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, or an imino group.
It is preferable that at least one of A 41 and A 42 is a nitrogen atom, and it is more preferable that both are nitrogen atoms. Further, X4 is preferably an oxygen atom.
 後述するn21及びn22が2以上の場合、複数存在する(Z21-X212)及び(Z22-X222)は、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。 When n21 and n22, which will be described later, are two or more, a plurality of (Z 21 -X 212 ) and (Z 22 -X 222 ) may be the same or different from each other.
 L21は、それぞれ独立に、単結合又は2価の連結基を表し、上述した式(XI)におけるL11と同義である。L21としては、-O-、-O-CO-、-CO-O-、-S-、-NH-、アルキレン基(炭素数は、1~10が好ましく、1~8がより好ましく、1~7が更に好ましい。)、アリーレン基(炭素数は、6~20が好ましく、6~14がより好ましく、6~10が更に好ましい。)、又は、これらの組み合わせからなる基が好ましい。 L 21 independently represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, and is synonymous with L 11 in the above formula (XI). Examples of L 21 include -O-, -O-CO-, -CO-O-, -S-, -NH-, and an alkylene group (the number of carbon atoms is preferably 1 to 10 and more preferably 1 to 8). ~ 7 is more preferable), an arylene group (the number of carbon atoms is preferably 6 to 20, more preferably 6 to 14, and even more preferably 6 to 10), or a group composed of a combination thereof is preferable.
 後述するn22が1以上の場合において、-X212-L21-の例としては、上述の式(D1)~(D15)におけるLの例であるL101~L143が同様に挙げられる。ただしこの場合、L101~L143における左側の結合手が化合物の中心構造(以下、単に「中心環」ともいう)の側に結合し、右側の結合手がP21に結合する。 When n22 is 1 or more, which will be described later, examples of −X212 −L21− include L101 to L143, which are examples of L in the above formulas (D1) to (D15). However, in this case, the bond on the left side of L101 to L143 binds to the side of the central structure of the compound (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “central ring”), and the bond on the right side binds to P21.
 P21は、エポキシ基を表す。上記エポキシ基は置換基を有していてもよく、有していなくてもよい。 P21 represents an epoxy group. The epoxy group may or may not have a substituent.
 Y22は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、炭素数1~20の直鎖状、分岐鎖状、若しくは、環状のアルキル基、又は、炭素数1~20の直鎖状、分岐鎖状、若しくは、環状のアルキル基において1個又は2個以上のメチレン基が-O-、-S-、-NH-、-N(CH)-、-CO-、-O-CO-、又は、-CO-O-で置換された基を表し、一般式(XI)におけるY12と同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。 Each of Y 22 has a hydrogen atom, a linear, branched or cyclic alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or a linear, branched or cyclic group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms. In the cyclic alkyl group, one or more methylene groups are -O-, -S-, -NH-, -N (CH 3 )-, -CO-, -O-CO-, or -CO-. It represents a group substituted with O— and is synonymous with Y12 in the general formula ( XI ), and the preferred range is also the same.
 n21及びn22はそれぞれ独立に、0~3の整数を表し、熱伝導性がより優れる観点から、1~3の整数が好ましい。中でも、A、A、及び、Aが、いずれも-CH=である場合はn21及びn22がそれぞれ独立に2~3の整数であることがより好ましく、A、A、及び、Aが、いずれも-N=である場合はn21及びn22がそれぞれ独立に1であることがより好ましい。 n21 and n22 each independently represent an integer of 0 to 3, and an integer of 1 to 3 is preferable from the viewpoint of better thermal conductivity. Above all, when A 2 , A 3 and A 4 are all −CH =, it is more preferable that n 21 and n 22 are independently integers of 2 to 3, respectively, and A 2 , A 3 and A. When A 4 is all −N =, it is more preferable that n21 and n22 are 1 independently of each other.
 円盤状化合物の好ましい例としては、以下の化合物が挙げられる。 Preferred examples of the disk-shaped compound include the following compounds.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000019
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000019
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000020
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000020
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000021

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-I000022
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-I000023
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000021

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-I000022
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-I000023
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000024
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-I000025
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-I000026
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000024
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-I000025
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-I000026
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000027
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-I000028
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-I000029
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000027
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-I000028
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-I000029
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000030

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-I000031

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-I000032
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000030

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-I000031

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-I000032
 なお、下記構造式中、Rは、-X212-L21-P21を表す。 In the following structural formula, R represents -X 212 -L 21 -P 21 .
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000033
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000033
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000034
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000034
 式(XII)で表される化合物の詳細、及び具体例については、特開2010-244038号公報の段落0013~0077に記載の化合物において、末端の少なくとも1つ(好ましくは3つ以上)をエポキシ基とした化合物を参照でき、その内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 For details and specific examples of the compound represented by the formula (XII), in the compounds described in paragraphs 0013 to 0077 of JP-A-2010-244033, at least one (preferably three or more) ends are epoxy. References can be made to the compound on which it is based, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.
 式(XII)で表される化合物は、特開2010-244038号公報、特開2006-076992号公報、及び、特開2007-002220号公報に記載の方法に準じて合成できる。 The compound represented by the formula (XII) can be synthesized according to the methods described in JP-A-2010-244038, JP-A-2006-07692, and JP-A-2007-002220.
 なお、電子密度を減らしてスタッキングを強くし、カラム状集合体を形成しやすくなるという観点から、円盤状化合物は水素結合性官能基を有する化合物であるのも好ましい。水素結合性官能基としては、-O-CO-NH-、-CO-NH-、-NH-CO-、-NH-CO-O-、-NH-CO-NH-、-NH-CO-S-、又は、-S-CO-NH-等が挙げられる。 The disk-shaped compound is preferably a compound having a hydrogen-bonding functional group from the viewpoint of reducing the electron density, strengthening the stacking, and facilitating the formation of a columnar aggregate. Hydrogen-bonding functional groups include -O-CO-NH-, -CO-NH-, -NH-CO-, -NH-CO-O-, -NH-CO-NH-, and -NH-CO-S. -Or-S-CO-NH- and the like can be mentioned.
(その他のエポキシ化合物)
 上述のエポキシ化合物以外にも、エポキシ化合物は、例えば、フェノール化合物の説明中で述べた一般式(Z)、一般式(Z1)、又は、一般式(Z2)において、フェノール性水酸基をエポキシ含有基に代えた一般式で表される化合物も使用できる。
 エポキシ含有基は、エポキシ基そのものである基、又は、エポキシ基を一部分に含む一価の基である。
 上記エポキシ基を一部分に含む一価の基は、基全体の中にエポキシ基を1個以上(好ましくは1~8個)有する基である。
 上記エポキシ基を一部分に含む一価の基は、「-(2価の炭化水素基)M1-(-O-2価の炭化水素基-)M2-エポキシ基」で表される基が好ましい。上記基において、M1は、0又は1を表す。M2は、1以上(好ましくは1~10)の整数を表す。上記基における2価の炭化水素基としては、例えば、アルキレン基(好ましくは炭素数1~6)、アルケニレン基(-CH=CH-等。好ましくは炭素数2~6)、アルキニレン基(-C≡C-等。好ましくは炭素数2~6)、アリーレン基(フェニレン基等。好ましくは炭素数6~15)、及び、これらを組み合わせた基が挙げられる。上記2価の炭化水素基は置換基を有していても有していなくてもよく、上記2価の炭化水素基が置換基として更にエポキシ含有基を有してもよい。複数存在してもよい上記2価の炭化水素基は、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。
(Other epoxy compounds)
In addition to the above-mentioned epoxy compound, the epoxy compound contains, for example, a phenolic hydroxyl group as an epoxy-containing group in the general formula (Z), the general formula (Z1), or the general formula (Z2) described in the description of the phenol compound. A compound represented by the general formula can also be used instead of.
The epoxy-containing group is a group that is the epoxy group itself, or a monovalent group that contains an epoxy group as a part.
The monovalent group containing the epoxy group as a part is a group having one or more (preferably 1 to 8) epoxy groups in the whole group.
The monovalent group containing the epoxy group as a part is preferably a group represented by "-(divalent hydrocarbon group) M1- (-O-2-valent hydrocarbon group-) M2 -epoxide group". In the above group, M1 represents 0 or 1. M2 represents an integer of 1 or more (preferably 1 to 10). Examples of the divalent hydrocarbon group in the above group include an alkylene group (preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms), an alkenylene group (-CH = CH-, etc., preferably 2 to 6 carbon atoms) and an alkynylene group (-C). ≡C-etc., preferably 2 to 6 carbon atoms), an arylene group (such as a phenylene group, preferably 6 to 15 carbon atoms), and a group combining these. The divalent hydrocarbon group may or may not have a substituent, and the divalent hydrocarbon group may further have an epoxy-containing group as a substituent. The divalent hydrocarbon groups that may be present in a plurality thereof may be the same or different from each other.
 また、その他のエポキシ化合物としては、例えば、一般式(DN)で表されるエポキシ化合物も挙げられる。 Further, as the other epoxy compound, for example, an epoxy compound represented by the general formula (DN) can be mentioned.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000035
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000035
 一般式(DN)中、nDNは、0以上の整数を表し、0~5の整数が好ましく、1がより好ましい。
 RDNは、単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。2価の連結基としては、-O-、-O-CO-、-CO-O-、-S-、アルキレン基(炭素数は、1~10が好ましい。)、アリーレン基(炭素数は、6~20が好ましい。)、又は、これらの組み合わせからなる基が好ましく、アルキレン基がより好ましく、メチレン基がより好ましい。
In the general formula ( DN ), nDN represents an integer of 0 or more, and an integer of 0 to 5 is preferable, and 1 is more preferable.
RDN represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. The divalent linking group includes -O-, -O-CO-, -CO-O-, -S-, an alkylene group (preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms), and an arylene group (the carbon number is preferably 1 to 10). 6 to 20 is preferable), or a group composed of a combination thereof is preferable, an alkylene group is more preferable, and a methylene group is more preferable.
 その他のエポキシ化合物としては、一般式(E2)で表されるエポキシ化合物も挙げられる。
 (V-)4-UC(-W)    (E2)
Examples of other epoxy compounds include epoxy compounds represented by the general formula (E2).
(V-) 4- UC (-W) U (E2)
 一般式(E2)中、Cは、炭素原子を表す。 In the general formula (E2), C represents a carbon atom.
 一般式(E2)中、Uは、3又は4の整数を表す。
 一般式(E2)中において、Vの数を示す「4-U」中の「U」と、Wの数を示す「U」とは同じ値を示す。つまり、一般式(E2)は、「V-C(-W)」又は「C(-W)」である。
In the general formula (E2), U represents an integer of 3 or 4.
In the general formula (E2), "U" in "4-U" indicating the number of V and "U" indicating the number of W show the same value. That is, the general formula (E2) is "VC (-W) 3 " or "C (-W) 4 ".
 一般式(E2)中、Vは、エポキシ基を有さない置換基又は水素原子を表す。
 上記エポキシ基を有さない置換基は、エポキシ基以外の置換基であり、かつ、置換基の一部分としてもエポキシ基を含むことがない置換基である。
 上記エポキシ基を有さない置換基としては、例えば、置換基群Yから選択される基であって、エポキシ基及びエポキシ基を一部分に含む基を除いた基が挙げられる。
 上記エポキシ基を有さない置換基は、アルキル基が好ましく、直鎖状又は分岐鎖状のアルキル基がより好ましい。上記アルキル基は、炭素数1~5が好ましい。
In the general formula (E2), V represents a substituent or a hydrogen atom having no epoxy group.
The above-mentioned substituent having no epoxy group is a substituent other than the epoxy group and does not contain an epoxy group as a part of the substituent.
Examples of the substituent having no epoxy group include a group selected from the substituent group Y, excluding an epoxy group and a group containing an epoxy group as a part.
The substituent having no epoxy group is preferably an alkyl group, and more preferably a linear or branched alkyl group. The alkyl group preferably has 1 to 5 carbon atoms.
 一般式(E2)中、Wは、エポキシ含有基を表す。
 エポキシ含有基は、エポキシ基そのものである基、又は、エポキシ基を一部分に含む一価の基である。
 上記エポキシ基を一部分に含む一価の基は、基全体の中にエポキシ基を1個以上(好ましくは1~8個)有する基である。
 上記エポキシ基を一部分に含む一価の基は、「-(2価の炭化水素基)M1-(-O-2価の炭化水素基-)M2-エポキシ基」で表される基が好ましい。上記基において、M1は、0又は1を表す。M2は、1以上(好ましくは1~10)の整数を表す。上記基における2価の炭化水素基としては、例えば、アルキレン基(好ましくは炭素数1~6)、アルケニレン基(-CH=CH-等。好ましくは炭素数2~6)、アルキニレン基(-C≡C-等。好ましくは炭素数2~6)、アリーレン基(フェニレン基等。好ましくは炭素数6~15)、及び、これらを組み合わせた基が挙げられる。上記2価の炭化水素基は置換基を有していても有していなくてもよく、上記2価の炭化水素基が置換基として更にエポキシ含有基を有してもよい。複数存在してもよい上記2価の炭化水素基は、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。
 一般式(E2)中に複数存在するWは、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。
In the general formula (E2), W represents an epoxy-containing group.
The epoxy-containing group is a group that is the epoxy group itself, or a monovalent group that contains an epoxy group as a part.
The monovalent group containing the epoxy group as a part is a group having one or more (preferably 1 to 8) epoxy groups in the whole group.
The monovalent group containing the epoxy group as a part is preferably a group represented by "-(divalent hydrocarbon group) M1- (-O-2-valent hydrocarbon group-) M2 -epoxide group". In the above group, M1 represents 0 or 1. M2 represents an integer of 1 or more (preferably 1 to 10). Examples of the divalent hydrocarbon group in the above group include an alkylene group (preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms), an alkenylene group (-CH = CH-, etc., preferably 2 to 6 carbon atoms) and an alkynylene group (-C). ≡C-etc., preferably 2 to 6 carbon atoms), an arylene group (such as a phenylene group, preferably 6 to 15 carbon atoms), and a group combining these. The divalent hydrocarbon group may or may not have a substituent, and the divalent hydrocarbon group may further have an epoxy-containing group as a substituent. The divalent hydrocarbon groups that may be present in a plurality thereof may be the same or different from each other.
A plurality of Ws existing in the general formula (E2) may be the same or different from each other.
 その他のエポキシ化合物としては、エポキシ基が、縮環している化合物も挙げられる。このような化合物としては、例えば、3,4:8,9-ジエポキシビシクロ[4.3.0]ノナン等が挙げられる。 Examples of other epoxy compounds include compounds in which the epoxy group is fused. Examples of such a compound include 3,4: 8,9-diepoxybicyclo [4.3.0] nonane and the like.
 その他のエポキシ化合物としては、一般式(E3)で表されるエポキシ化合物も挙げられる。
 エポキシ基-CH-O-(アルキレン基-O)-CH-エポキシ基  (E3)
 一般式(E3)中、Xは、1以上の整数を表し、1~50の整数が好ましく、1~15の整数がより好ましく、1~3の整数が更に好ましい。
 一般式(E3)中のアルキレン基は、直鎖状でも分岐鎖状でもよい。上記アルキレン基の炭素数は1~10が好ましく、2~3がより好ましく、2が更に好ましい。上記アルキレン基が一般式(E3)中に複数存在する場合、複数存在する上記アルキレン基は、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。
Examples of other epoxy compounds include epoxy compounds represented by the general formula (E3).
Epoxy group-CH 2 -O- (alkylene group-O) X -CH 2 -epoxy group (E3)
In the general formula (E3), X represents an integer of 1 or more, preferably an integer of 1 to 50, more preferably an integer of 1 to 15, and even more preferably an integer of 1 to 3.
The alkylene group in the general formula (E3) may be linear or branched. The alkylene group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 3 carbon atoms, and even more preferably 2. When a plurality of the alkylene groups are present in the general formula (E3), the plurality of alkylene groups may be the same or different from each other.
 その他のエポキシ化合物としては、他にも、例えば、ビスフェノールA、F、S、AD等のグリシジルエーテルであるビスフェノールA型エポキシ化合物、ビスフェノールF型エポキシ化合物、ビスフェノールS型エポキシ化合物、ビスフェノールAD型エポキシ化合物等;水素添加したビスフェノールA型エポキシ化合物、水素添加したビスフェノールAD型エポキシ化合物等;フェノールノボラック型のグリシジルエーテル(フェノールノボラック型エポキシ化合物)、クレゾールノボラック型のグリシジルエーテル(クレゾールノボラック型エポキシ化合物)、ビスフェノールAノボラック型のグリシジルエーテル等;ジシクロペンタジエン型のグリシジルエーテル(ジシクロペンタジエン型エポキシ化合物);ジヒドロキシペンタジエン型のグリシジルエーテル(ジヒドロキシペンタジエン型エポキシ化合物);レゾルシノール等のジヒドロキシベンゼンのグリシジルエーテルのようなポリヒドロキシベンゼン型のグリシジルエーテル(ポリヒドロキシベンゼン型エポキシ化合物);ベンゼンポリカルボン酸型のグリシジルエステル(ベンゼンポリカルボン酸型エポキシ化合物);トリスフェノールメタン型エポキシ化合物;フェノキシ樹脂等;及び、側鎖にエポキシ基を有するアクリル樹脂、が挙げられる。上述の各化合物におけるグリシジルエーテル基及び/又はグリシジルエステル基の1個又は2個以上が、ジグリシジルアミノ基又はジグリシジルアミノアルキレン基(ジグリシジルアミノメチレン基等)に置き換わった化合物をエポキシ化合物として使用してもよい。
 上述の各化合物は、置換基を有していてもよい。例えば、上述の各化合物に含まれる芳香環基、シクロアルカン環基、及び/又は、アルキレン基等が、グリシジルエーテル基、グリシジルエステル基、ジグリシジルアミノ基、及び/又は、ジグリシジルアミノアルキレン基以外の置換基を有していてもよい。
Other epoxy compounds include, for example, bisphenol A type epoxy compounds, bisphenol F type epoxy compounds, bisphenol S type epoxy compounds, and bisphenol AD type epoxy compounds, which are glycidyl ethers such as bisphenol A, F, S, and AD. Etc .; hydrogenated bisphenol A type epoxy compound, hydrogenated bisphenol AD type epoxy compound, etc .; phenol novolac type glycidyl ether (phenol novolak type epoxy compound), cresol novolak type glycidyl ether (cresol novolak type epoxy compound), bisphenol A Novolak type glycidyl ether etc .; Dicyclopentadiene type glycidyl ether (dicyclopentadiene type epoxy compound); Dihydroxypentadiene type glycidyl ether (dihydroxypentadiene type epoxy compound); Poly such as resorcinol or other dihydroxybenzene glycidyl ether Hydroxybenzene type glycidyl ether (polyhydroxybenzene type epoxy compound); benzenepolycarboxylic acid type glycidyl ester (benzenepolycarboxylic acid type epoxy compound); trisphenol methane type epoxy compound; phenoxy resin etc.; and epoxy on the side chain Acrylic resin having a group, and the like. A compound in which one or more of the glycidyl ether group and / or the glycidyl ester group in each of the above compounds is replaced with a diglycidylamino group or a diglycidylaminoalkylene group (diglycidylaminomethylene group, etc.) is used as the epoxy compound. You may.
Each of the above compounds may have a substituent. For example, the aromatic ring group, cycloalkane ring group, and / or alkylene group contained in each of the above compounds is other than the glycidyl ether group, the glycidyl ester group, the diglycidyl amino group, and / or the diglycidyl aminoalkylene group. It may have a substituent of.
 エポキシ化合物は、ポリヒドロキシベンゼン型のグリシジルエーテル、ビスフェノールF型のグリシジルエーテル、一般式(DN)で表されるエポキシ化合物、棒状化合物(好ましくはビフェニル骨格を有する棒状化合物)、円盤状化合物(好ましくは中心環がビフェニレン環である円盤状化合物、中心環がトリアジン環である円盤状化合物、又は、中心環がベンゼン環である円盤状化合物)、フェノールノボラック型のグリシジルエーテル、フェノキシ樹脂、一般式(E2)で表されるエポキシ化合物、及び、一般式(E3)で表されるエポキシ化合物からなる群から選択される1種以上を含むことが好ましい。
 エポキシ化合物がこれらの化合物を含む場合、その含有量は、エポキシ化合物の全質量に対して、0質量%超100質量%以下であり、30~100質量%が好ましく、60~100質量%がより好ましく、90~100質量%が更に好ましい。
The epoxy compound is a polyhydroxybenzene type glycidyl ether, a bisphenol F type glycidyl ether, an epoxy compound represented by the general formula (DN), a rod-shaped compound (preferably a rod-shaped compound having a biphenyl skeleton), or a disk-shaped compound (preferably). A disc-shaped compound having a biphenylene ring as the central ring, a disc-shaped compound having a triazine ring as the central ring, or a disc-shaped compound having a benzene ring as the central ring), a phenol novolac-type glycidyl ether, a phenoxy resin, and a general formula (E2). ), And one or more selected from the group consisting of the epoxy compound represented by the general formula (E3).
When the epoxy compound contains these compounds, the content thereof is more than 0% by mass and 100% by mass or less, preferably 30 to 100% by mass, more preferably 60 to 100% by mass, based on the total mass of the epoxy compound. It is preferable, 90 to 100% by mass is more preferable.
 エポキシ化合物が、25℃における粘度が1000mPa・s未満のエポキシ化合物(「低粘度エポキシ化合物」ともいう)を含むことも好ましい。
 また、特に、組成物が後述のマレイミド化合物を含む場合において、エポキシ化合物が、上記低粘度エポキシ化合物を含むことが好ましい。
 エポキシ化合物が低粘度エポキシ化合物を含むことで、組成物から形成される半硬化膜に柔軟性が導入されて保存安定性が向上し、形成してから一定時間経過した後の上記半硬化膜のハンドリング性が良好になる。このような改善効果は、組成物が後述のマレイミド化合物を含む場合において特に顕著である。
 低粘度エポキシ化合物の25℃における粘度は、1000mPa・s未満であり、500mPa・s以下が好ましく、300mPa・s以下がより好ましい。上記粘度の下限は特に制限されないが、例えば、1mPa・s以上である。
 なお、エポキシ化合物の粘度は、RheoStress RS6000(英弘精機株式会社製)を用いて25℃で測定し、測定開始から1分経過後の値を読み取って得られる値である。せん断速度は10(1/s)とする。
It is also preferable that the epoxy compound contains an epoxy compound having a viscosity at 25 ° C. of less than 1000 mPa · s (also referred to as “low viscosity epoxy compound”).
Further, in particular, when the composition contains the maleimide compound described later, it is preferable that the epoxy compound contains the above-mentioned low-viscosity epoxy compound.
When the epoxy compound contains a low-viscosity epoxy compound, flexibility is introduced into the semi-cured film formed from the composition to improve storage stability, and the semi-cured film after a certain period of time has passed since it was formed. Good handling. Such an improving effect is particularly remarkable when the composition contains a maleimide compound described later.
The viscosity of the low-viscosity epoxy compound at 25 ° C. is less than 1000 mPa · s, preferably 500 mPa · s or less, and more preferably 300 mPa · s or less. The lower limit of the viscosity is not particularly limited, but is, for example, 1 mPa · s or more.
The viscosity of the epoxy compound is a value obtained by measuring at 25 ° C. using RheoStress RS6000 (manufactured by Eiko Seiki Co., Ltd.) and reading the value 1 minute after the start of the measurement. The shear rate is 10 (1 / s).
 エポキシ化合物が低粘度エポキシ化合物を含む場合、低粘度エポキシ化合物の含有量は、全エポキシ化合物に対して、5~100質量%が好ましく、20~100質量%がより好ましく、60~100質量%が更に好ましい。
 低粘度エポキシ化合物としては、例えば、上述のエポキシ化合物のうちの所定の粘度を有するエポキシ化合物を使用でき、より具体的には、例えば、ビスフェノールF型のグリシジルエーテル、Xが1~13の整数である一般式(E3)で表されるエポキシ化合物、及び、ジヒドロキシベンゼン型のグリシジルエーテルが挙げられる。
When the epoxy compound contains a low-viscosity epoxy compound, the content of the low-viscosity epoxy compound is preferably 5 to 100% by mass, more preferably 20 to 100% by mass, and 60 to 100% by mass with respect to the total epoxy compounds. More preferred.
As the low-viscosity epoxy compound, for example, an epoxy compound having a predetermined viscosity among the above-mentioned epoxy compounds can be used, and more specifically, for example, bisphenol F type glycidyl ether, X is an integer of 1 to 13. Examples thereof include an epoxy compound represented by a general formula (E3) and a dihydroxybenzene type glycidyl ether.
〔フェノール化合物とエポキシ化合物との関係性〕
 エポキシ化合物を含む場合の本発明の組成物において、フェノール化合物がトリアジン骨格を有するフェノール化合物を含むこと(要件1)、及び、エポキシ化合物がトリアジン骨格を有するエポキシ化合物を含むこと(要件2)、の少なくとも一方の要件を満たすことが好ましい。
 組成物は、要件1のみを満たしてもよいし、要件2のみを満たしてもよいし、要件1及び要件2の両方を満たしてもよい。
[Relationship between phenol compounds and epoxy compounds]
In the composition of the present invention when an epoxy compound is contained, the phenol compound contains a phenol compound having a triazine skeleton (requirement 1), and the epoxy compound contains an epoxy compound having a triazine skeleton (requirement 2). It is preferable to meet at least one requirement.
The composition may satisfy only Requirement 1, only Requirement 2, or both Requirement 1 and Requirement 2.
 フェノール化合物及びエポキシ化合物が「トリアジン骨格を有する」とは、化合物中に1個以上(例えば1~5個)のトリアジン環基を有することを意味する。
 トリアジン骨格を有するフェノール化合物としては、例えば、上述の、一般式(Z)で表される化合物、一般式(Z1)で表される化合物、及び、一般式(Z2)で表される化合物が挙げられる。
 トリアジン骨格を有するエポキシ化合物としては、例えば、上述の、式(D16)で表される化合物においてA2X、A3X、及び、A4Xがいずれも-N=である形態の化合物、式(XII)で表される化合物においてA、A、及び、Aがいずれも-N=である形態の化合物、一般式(Z)においてフェノール性水酸基をエポキシ含有基に代えた一般式で表される化合物、一般式(Z1)においてフェノール性水酸基をエポキシ含有基に代えた一般式で表される化合物、及び、一般式(Z2)においてフェノール性水酸基をエポキシ含有基に代えた一般式で表される化合物が挙げられる。
By "having a triazine skeleton" of a phenol compound and an epoxy compound, it means that the compound has one or more (for example, 1 to 5) triazine ring groups.
Examples of the phenol compound having a triazine skeleton include the above-mentioned compound represented by the general formula (Z), the compound represented by the general formula (Z1), and the compound represented by the general formula (Z2). Be done.
Examples of the epoxy compound having a triazine skeleton include the above-mentioned compound represented by the formula (D16) in which A 2X , A 3X , and A 4X are all −N =, formula (XII). In the compound represented by, A 2 , A 3 and A 4 are all in the form of −N =, and are represented by the general formula (Z) in which the phenolic hydroxyl group is replaced with the epoxy-containing group. The compound is represented by a general formula in which the phenolic hydroxyl group is replaced with an epoxy-containing group in the general formula (Z1), and a general formula in which the phenolic hydroxyl group is replaced with an epoxy-containing group in the general formula (Z2). Examples include compounds.
 フェノール化合物が、トリアジン骨格を有するフェノール化合物を含む場合(例えば要件1を満たす場合)、その含有量は、フェノール化合物の全質量に対して、0質量%超100質量%以下であり、30~100質量%が好ましく、60~100質量%がより好ましく、90~100質量%が更に好ましい。なお、組成物がエポキシ化合物を含み、上記エポキシ化合物が、トリアジン骨格を有するエポキシ化合物を含む場合(つまり要件2を満たす場合)、トリアジン骨格を有するフェノール化合物の含有量は、上記好適範囲の範囲外であるのも好ましい。
 組成物がエポキシ化合物を含み、上記エポキシ化合物が、トリアジン骨格を有するエポキシ化合物を含む場合(つまり要件2を満たす場合)、その含有量は、エポキシ化合物の全質量に対して、0質量%超100質量%以下であり、30~100質量%が好ましく、60~100質量%がより好ましく、90~100質量%が更に好ましい。なお、フェノール化合物が、トリアジン骨格を有するフェノール化合物を含む場合(つまり要件1を満たす場合)、トリアジン骨格を有するエポキシ化合物の含有量は、上記好適範囲の範囲外であってもよい。
When the phenol compound contains a phenol compound having a triazine skeleton (for example, when requirement 1 is satisfied), the content thereof is more than 0% by mass and 100% by mass or less with respect to the total mass of the phenol compound, and is 30 to 100. It is preferably by mass, more preferably 60 to 100% by mass, still more preferably 90 to 100% by mass. When the composition contains an epoxy compound and the epoxy compound contains an epoxy compound having a triazine skeleton (that is, when requirement 2 is satisfied), the content of the phenol compound having a triazine skeleton is out of the above preferable range. Is also preferable.
When the composition contains an epoxy compound and the above epoxy compound contains an epoxy compound having a triazine skeleton (that is, when requirement 2 is satisfied), the content thereof is more than 0% by mass and 100% based on the total mass of the epoxy compound. It is not more than mass%, preferably 30 to 100% by mass, more preferably 60 to 100% by mass, still more preferably 90 to 100% by mass. When the phenol compound contains a phenol compound having a triazine skeleton (that is, when requirement 1 is satisfied), the content of the epoxy compound having a triazine skeleton may be outside the above preferable range.
 組成物がエポキシ化合物を含む場合、フェノール化合物とエポキシ化合物との少なくとも一部がトリアジン骨格を有する化合物以外であることも好ましい。
 フェノール化合物の全部又は一部がトリアジン骨格を有する化合物以外でもよく、エポキシ化合物の全部又は一部がトリアジン骨格を有する化合物以外でもよい。
 組成物がエポキシ化合物を含む場合、架橋密度を調整し本発明の効果をより向上させる点から、トリアジン骨格を有するフェノール化合物とトリアジン骨格を有するエポキシ化合物との合計含有量は、全フェノール化合物と全エポキシ化合物との合計含有量に対して、0質量%超100質量%未満が好ましく、1~90質量%がより好ましく、5~80質量%が更に好ましい。
When the composition contains an epoxy compound, it is also preferable that at least a part of the phenol compound and the epoxy compound is other than a compound having a triazine skeleton.
All or part of the phenol compound may be other than the compound having a triazine skeleton, and all or part of the epoxy compound may be other than the compound having a triazine skeleton.
When the composition contains an epoxy compound, the total content of the phenol compound having a triazine skeleton and the epoxy compound having a triazine skeleton is the total phenol compound and the total content from the viewpoint of adjusting the cross-linking density and further improving the effect of the present invention. With respect to the total content with the epoxy compound, it is preferably more than 0% by mass and less than 100% by mass, more preferably 1 to 90% by mass, still more preferably 5 to 80% by mass.
 また、組成物中、エポキシ化合物とフェノール化合物との合計含有量は、組成物の全固形分に対して、3~90質量%が好ましく、5~50質量%がより好ましく、7~40質量%が更に好ましい。
 エポキシ化合物及び/又はフェノール化合物は、1種単独で使用してもよく2種以上使用してもよい。
The total content of the epoxy compound and the phenol compound in the composition is preferably 3 to 90% by mass, more preferably 5 to 50% by mass, and 7 to 40% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the composition. Is more preferable.
The epoxy compound and / or the phenol compound may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
 組成物において、フェノール化合物に含まれる合計の水酸基(好ましくはフェノール性水酸基)の数に対する、エポキシ化合物に含まれる合計のエポキシ基の数との比(エポキシ基の数/水酸基の数)は、通常3/97~97/3であり、30/70~70/30が好ましく、40/60~60/40がより好ましく、45/55~55/45が更に好ましい。
 つまり、組成物中の、フェノール化合物とエポキシ化合物との含有量の比は、上記「エポキシ基の数/フェノール性水酸基の数」が上記範囲内になるような比であるのが好ましい。
In the composition, the ratio of the total number of hydroxyl groups (preferably phenolic hydroxyl groups) contained in the phenol compound to the total number of epoxy groups contained in the epoxy compound (number of epoxy groups / number of hydroxyl groups) is usually used. It is 3/97 to 97/3, preferably 30/70 to 70/30, more preferably 40/60 to 60/40, and even more preferably 45/55 to 55/45.
That is, the ratio of the content of the phenol compound to the epoxy compound in the composition is preferably such that the above-mentioned "number of epoxy groups / number of phenolic hydroxyl groups" is within the above range.
 また、組成物において、エポキシ化合物のエポキシ基と、活性水素(フェノール性水酸基に由来する活性水素であってもよく、その他の活性水素含有化合物の活性水素であってもよい)との当量比(エポキシ基の数/活性水素の数)は、通常3/97~97/3であり、30/70~70/30が好ましく、40/60~60/40がより好ましく、45/55~55/45が更に好ましい。 Further, in the composition, the equivalent ratio (may be active hydrogen derived from a phenolic hydroxyl group or active hydrogen of another active hydrogen-containing compound) between the epoxy group of the epoxy compound and the active hydrogen (may be active hydrogen derived from a phenolic hydroxyl group). The number of epoxy groups / number of active hydrogens) is usually 3/97 to 97/3, preferably 30/70 to 70/30, more preferably 40/60 to 60/40, and 45/55 to 55 /. 45 is more preferred.
 また、組成物において、フェノール化合物に含まれる合計の水酸基(好ましくはフェノール性水酸基)の数に対する、エポキシ化合物に含まれる合計のエポキシ基の数との比(エポキシ基の数/水酸基の数)が、1.1/1.0~3.0/1.0であることも好ましく、1.2/1.0~2.0/1.0であることがより好ましく、1.3/1.0~1.8/1.0であることが更に好ましい。言い換えると、フェノール化合物に含まれる合計の水酸基(好ましくはフェノール性水酸基)の数に対する、エポキシ化合物に含まれる合計のエポキシ基の数の比(エポキシ基の数/水酸基の数)は、1.1~3.0であることも好ましく、1.2~2.0であることがより好ましく、1.3~1.8であることが更に好ましい。
 また、特に、組成物が後述のマレイミド化合物を含む場合において、上記比が、上記範囲内になることが好ましい。
 上記比が所定値以上であれば、組成物から形成される半硬化膜に柔軟性が導入されて保存安定性が向上し、形成してから一定時間経過した後でも上記半硬化膜のハンドリング性が良好になる。上記比が所定値以下であれば、組成物から形成される熱伝導材料の耐熱性がより優れる。このような改善効果は、組成物が後述のマレイミド化合物を含む場合において特に顕著である。
Further, in the composition, the ratio of the total number of hydroxyl groups (preferably phenolic hydroxyl groups) contained in the phenol compound to the total number of epoxy groups contained in the epoxy compound (number of epoxy groups / number of hydroxyl groups) is , 1.1 / 1.0 to 3.0 / 1.0, more preferably 1.2 / 1.0 to 2.0 / 1.0, and 1.3 / 1. It is more preferably 0 to 1.8 / 1.0. In other words, the ratio of the total number of epoxy groups contained in the epoxy compound (number of epoxy groups / number of hydroxyl groups) to the total number of hydroxyl groups (preferably phenolic hydroxyl groups) contained in the phenol compound is 1.1. It is preferably ~ 3.0, more preferably 1.2 to 2.0, and even more preferably 1.3 to 1.8.
Further, it is particularly preferable that the above ratio is within the above range when the composition contains the maleimide compound described later.
When the above ratio is equal to or higher than a predetermined value, flexibility is introduced into the semi-cured film formed from the composition to improve storage stability, and the handling property of the semi-cured film is improved even after a certain period of time has passed since the formation. Becomes good. When the above ratio is not more than a predetermined value, the heat resistance of the heat conductive material formed from the composition is more excellent. Such an improving effect is particularly remarkable when the composition contains a maleimide compound described later.
 組成物は、エポキシ化合物をほとんど含まないか、全く含まなくてもよい。この場合、組成物における、フェノール化合物に含まれる水酸基(好ましくはフェノール性水酸基)の数に対する、エポキシ化合物に含まれる合計のエポキシ基の数との比(エポキシ基の数/水酸基の数)は、例えば、0/100以上3/97未満(好ましくは0/100以上1/99以下(0以上0.031未満、好ましくは0以上0.011以下))である。 The composition may contain little or no epoxy compound. In this case, the ratio of the number of hydroxyl groups (preferably phenolic hydroxyl groups) contained in the phenol compound to the total number of epoxy groups contained in the epoxy compound (number of epoxy groups / number of hydroxyl groups) in the composition is. For example, it is 0/100 or more and less than 3/97 (preferably 0/100 or more and 1/99 or less (0 or more and less than 0.031, preferably 0 or more and 0.011 or less)).
〔特定化合物〕
 組成物は、特定化合物を含む。
 特定化合物は、1つ以上のマレイミド基を有するマレイミド化合物、及び、1つ以上のシアネート基を有するシアネート化合物の総称である。
 つまり、組成物は、マレイミド化合物、及び、シアネート化合物の一方又は両方を含む。
[Specific compound]
The composition comprises a specific compound.
The specific compound is a general term for a maleimide compound having one or more maleimide groups and a cyanate compound having one or more cyanate groups.
That is, the composition comprises one or both of the maleimide compound and the cyanate compound.
 なお、本明細書において、マレイミド基とシアネート基との両方を有する化合物については以下のように分類する。すなわち、上記化合物が有するマレイミド基とシアネート基とのうち、マレイミド基の数の方が多い場合は上記化合物をマレイミド化合物に分類し、シアネート基の数の方が多い場合は上記化合物をシアネート化合物に分類し、マレイミド基とシアネート基との数が同数の場合は上記化合物をマレイミド化合物に分類する。 In this specification, compounds having both a maleimide group and a cyanate group are classified as follows. That is, among the maleimide groups and cyanate groups of the above compound, if the number of maleimide groups is larger, the above compound is classified as a maleimide compound, and if the number of cyanate groups is larger, the above compound is classified as a cyanate compound. When the number of maleimide group and cyanate group is the same, the above compound is classified as a maleimide compound.
 特定化合物の合計含有量は、組成物の全固形分に対して、0.1~40質量%が好ましく、1~25質量%がより好ましく、3.5~15質量%が更に好ましい。
 特定化合物の合計含有量は、エポキシ化合物とフェノール化合物との合計含有量に対して、5~200質量%が好ましく、10~180質量%がより好ましく、20~160質量%が更に好ましい。なお、上記合計含有量は、組成物がエポキシ化合物を含まない場合は、フェノール化合物単独の含有量を意味する。
 組成物が、マレイミド化合物とシアネート化合物とのうち、実質的に一方のみを含むことも好ましい。この場合、例えば、マレイミド化合物とシアネート化合物とのうちの一方の含有量が、特定化合物の全質量に対して、98質量%超100質量以下であることが好ましく、99~100質量%であることがより好ましく、99.9~100質量%であることが更に好ましい。
 組成物が、マレイミド化合物とシアネート化合物との両方を含む場合、組成物中でのマレイミド化合物の含有量に対するシアネート化合物の含有量の質量比(シアネート化合物の含有質量/マレイミド化合物の含有質量)は、2/98~98/2が好ましく、70/30~70/30がより好ましく、40/60~60/40が更に好ましい。
The total content of the specific compound is preferably 0.1 to 40% by mass, more preferably 1 to 25% by mass, still more preferably 3.5 to 15% by mass, based on the total solid content of the composition.
The total content of the specific compound is preferably 5 to 200% by mass, more preferably 10 to 180% by mass, still more preferably 20 to 160% by mass, based on the total content of the epoxy compound and the phenol compound. When the composition does not contain the epoxy compound, the total content means the content of the phenol compound alone.
It is also preferred that the composition comprises substantially only one of the maleimide compound and the cyanate compound. In this case, for example, the content of one of the maleimide compound and the cyanate compound is preferably more than 98% by mass and 100% by mass or less, preferably 99 to 100% by mass, based on the total mass of the specific compound. Is more preferable, and 99.9 to 100% by mass is further preferable.
When the composition contains both a maleimide compound and a cyanate compound, the mass ratio of the cyanate compound content to the maleimide compound content in the composition (the content mass of the cyanate compound / the content mass of the maleimide compound) is 2/98 to 98/2 is preferable, 70/30 to 70/30 is more preferable, and 40/60 to 60/40 is even more preferable.
<マレイミド化合物>
 組成物は、特定化合物のうち、少なくともマレイミド化合物を含むことも好ましい。
 マレイミド化合物は、1つ以上のマレイミド基を有する化合物である。
<Maleimide compound>
The composition preferably contains at least a maleimide compound among the specific compounds.
A maleimide compound is a compound having one or more maleimide groups.
 マレイミド化合物が有するマレイミド基の数は、1以上であり、1~100が好ましく、2~10がより好ましく、2が更に好ましい。
 マレイミド化合物は、高分子化合物でも低分子化合物でもよい。
 例えば、マレイミド化合物の分子量は、100~3000が好ましく、200~2000がより好ましく、300~1000が更に好ましい。
The number of maleimide groups contained in the maleimide compound is 1 or more, preferably 1 to 100, more preferably 2 to 10, and even more preferably 2.
The maleimide compound may be a high molecular weight compound or a low molecular weight compound.
For example, the molecular weight of the maleimide compound is preferably 100 to 3000, more preferably 200 to 2000, and even more preferably 300 to 1000.
 マレイミド化合物が有するマレイミド基は、下記一般式(M)で表される基であることが好ましい。 The maleimide group contained in the maleimide compound is preferably a group represented by the following general formula (M).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000036
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000036
 一般式(M)中、*は、結合位置を表す。
 X及びYは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子又は置換基を表す。
 X及びYは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子が好ましい。
In the general formula (M), * represents a bonding position.
X and Y each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
Hydrogen atoms are preferable for X and Y independently of each other.
 マレイミド化合物は、芳香環基(ベンゼン環基等)を1個以上(好ましくは1~10個)有する化合物であることも好ましい。
 なかでも、マレイミド化合物は、下記一般式(1)で表される化合物であることが好ましい。
The maleimide compound is also preferably a compound having one or more (preferably 1 to 10) aromatic ring groups (benzene ring groups and the like).
Among them, the maleimide compound is preferably a compound represented by the following general formula (1).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000037
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000037
 一般式(1)中、mは0又は1を表す。mは1が好ましい。
 nは0又は1を表す。nは1が好ましい。
In the general formula (1), m represents 0 or 1. m is preferably 1.
n represents 0 or 1. n is preferably 1.
 一般式(1)中、R及びRは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子又は置換基を表す。
 上記置換基としては、アルキル基が好ましい。上記アルキル基は、直鎖状でも分岐鎖状でもよく、炭素数は1~10が好ましい。
 置換基である場合のR及び/又はRは、例えば、ベンゼン環基上において、マレイミド基と隣接した位置に存在することも好ましい。
 R及びRが両方とも置換基の場合、R及びRはそれぞれ異なる置換基であることも好ましく、例えば、Rがメチル基でRがエチル基であることも好ましい。
In the general formula (1), R 1 and R 2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
As the substituent, an alkyl group is preferable. The alkyl group may be linear or branched, and the number of carbon atoms is preferably 1 to 10.
It is also preferable that R 1 and / or R 2 in the case of a substituent is present at a position adjacent to the maleimide group on the benzene ring group, for example.
When both R 1 and R 2 are substituents, it is also preferable that R 1 and R 2 are different substituents, for example, R 1 is a methyl group and R 2 is an ethyl group.
 一般式(1)中、Lは2価の連結基を表す。
 上記2価の連結基としては、例えば、エーテル基(-O-)、カルボニル基(-CO-)、エステル基(-COO-)、チオエーテル基(-S-)、-SO-、-NR-(Rは、水素原子、又は、アルキル基)、2価の脂肪族炭化水素基(例えば、アルキレン基、シクロアルキレン基、アルケニレン基(-CH=CH-等)、アルキニレン基(-C≡C-等))、2価の芳香環基(アリーレン基、及び、ヘテロアリーレン基)、並びに 、これらを組み合わせた基が挙げられる。
 一般式(1)中、Lの炭素数は、1以上が好ましく、1~100がより好ましく、3~15が更に好ましい。
In the general formula (1), L 1 represents a divalent linking group.
Examples of the divalent linking group include an ether group (-O-), a carbonyl group (-CO-), an ester group (-COO-), a thioether group (-S-), -SO 2- , and -NR. -(R is a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group), a divalent aliphatic hydrocarbon group (for example, an alkylene group, a cycloalkylene group, an alkenylene group (-CH = CH-, etc.), an alkynylene group (-C≡C). -Etc.)), a divalent aromatic ring group (allylen group and a heteroarylene group), and a group combining these groups can be mentioned.
In the general formula (1), the number of carbon atoms of L1 is preferably 1 or more, more preferably 1 to 100, and even more preferably 3 to 15.
 中でも、Lは、「*-(L-Ar)-*」で表される基が好ましい。
 *は、マレイミド基と直接結合する側の結合位置を表し、*は、反対側の結合位置を表す。
 kは、1以上の整数を表し、1~10が好ましく、1がより好ましい。
 Lは、単結合、-C(R)(R)-、-O-、又は、-CO-を表し、-C(R)(R)-が好ましい。
 R及びRは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子又は置換基を表し、アルキル基(直鎖状でも分岐鎖状でもよく、炭素数は例えば1~10)が好ましい。
 Arは、アリーレン基を表す。上記アリーレン基の環員原子の数は6~15が好ましく、6がより好ましい。上記アリーレン基が置換基を有する場合、その数は、1~4が好ましく、1又は2がより好ましい。上記アリーレン基が有してもよい置換基としてはアルキル基(直鎖状でも分岐鎖状でもよく、炭素数は例えば1~10)が好ましい。Arがなり得る構造としては、一般式(1)中に明示される、R及びRと結合するベンゼン環基がなり得る構造も挙げられる。
 L及びArが複数存在する場合、複数存在するL同士、及び、複数存在するAr同士は、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。
Among them, L 1 is preferably a group represented by "* p- (L 2 -Ar) k- * q ".
* Q represents the bond position on the side that directly bonds to the maleimide group, and * p represents the bond position on the opposite side.
k represents an integer of 1 or more, preferably 1 to 10, and more preferably 1.
L 2 represents a single bond, -C (R 3 ) (R 4 )-, -O-, or -CO-, with -C (R 3 ) (R 4 )-preferably.
R 3 and R 4 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent, and an alkyl group (which may be linear or branched and has, for example, 1 to 10 carbon atoms) is preferable.
Ar represents an arylene group. The number of ring-membered atoms of the arylene group is preferably 6 to 15, and more preferably 6. When the arylene group has a substituent, the number thereof is preferably 1 to 4, more preferably 1 or 2. As the substituent that the arylene group may have, an alkyl group (which may be linear or branched and has, for example, 1 to 10 carbon atoms) is preferable. Examples of the structure in which Ar can be formed include a structure in which a benzene ring group bonded to R 1 and R 2 can be formed, which is specified in the general formula (1).
When a plurality of L 2 and Ar exist, the plurality of L 2 existing and the plurality of Ar existing may be the same or different from each other.
 nが1の場合の一般式(1)中、R及びRと結合するベンゼン環基上において、マレイミド基と、「-(L-マレイミド基」で表される基との2つの基は、互いに、オルト位に配置されてもよく、メタ位に配置されてもよく、パラ位に配置されてもよい。なかでも、上記2つの基は、メタ位又はパラ位に配置されていることが好ましい。 In the general formula (1) when n is 1, a maleimide group and a group represented by "-(L 1 ) m -maleimide group" are 2 on the benzene ring group bonded to R 1 and R 2 . The two groups may be arranged in the ortho position, the meta position, or the para position with each other. Among them, it is preferable that the above two groups are arranged at the meta position or the para position.
 中でも、一般式(1)で表される化合物は、mが1を表し、nが1を表し、かつ、Lで表される2価の連結基の炭素数が3~15であることが好ましい。 Among them, in the compound represented by the general formula (1), m represents 1, n represents 1, and the divalent linking group represented by L 1 has 3 to 15 carbon atoms. preferable.
 マレイミド化合物は、1種のみを使用していてもよいし、2種以上を使用してもよい。
 マレイミド化合物の含有量は、組成物の全固形分に対して、0.1~40質量%が好ましく、1~15質量%がより好ましく、組成物から形成される半硬化膜のハンドリング性がより優れる点からは、3.5~8質量%が更に好ましい。
 また、得られる熱伝導剤材料の熱伝導性、及び/又は、絶縁性がより優れる点からは、マレイミド化合物の含有量は、組成物の全固形分に対して、6質量%以上(例えば6~12質量%)であることも好ましい。
 組成物がエポキシ化合物を含む場合、マレイミド化合物の含有量は、エポキシ化合物とフェノール化合物との合計含有量に対して、例えば1~200質量%であり、5~100質量%が好ましく、10~70質量%がより好ましく、20~60質量%が更に好ましい。
 マレイミド化合物の含有量は、フェノール化合物の含有量に対して、例えば1~500質量%であり、20~300質量%が好ましく、50~200質量%がより好ましく、70~130質量%が更に好ましい。
Only one kind of maleimide compound may be used, or two or more kinds may be used.
The content of the maleimide compound is preferably 0.1 to 40% by mass, more preferably 1 to 15% by mass, and the handleability of the semi-cured film formed from the composition is more preferable with respect to the total solid content of the composition. From an excellent point of view, 3.5 to 8% by mass is more preferable.
Further, from the viewpoint of more excellent thermal conductivity and / or insulating property of the obtained thermal conductive agent material, the content of the maleimide compound is 6% by mass or more (for example, 6) with respect to the total solid content of the composition. It is also preferable that it is ~ 12% by mass).
When the composition contains an epoxy compound, the content of the maleimide compound is, for example, 1 to 200% by mass, preferably 5 to 100% by mass, and 10 to 70% by mass, based on the total content of the epoxy compound and the phenol compound. The mass% is more preferable, and 20 to 60% by mass is further preferable.
The content of the maleimide compound is, for example, 1 to 500% by mass, preferably 20 to 300% by mass, more preferably 50 to 200% by mass, still more preferably 70 to 130% by mass, based on the content of the phenol compound. ..
<シアネート化合物>
 組成物は、特定化合物のうち、少なくともシアネート化合物を含むことも好ましい。
 シアネート化合物は、1以上のシアネート基(-OCN)を有する化合物である。
<Cyanate compound>
The composition preferably contains at least a cyanate compound among the specific compounds.
A cyanate compound is a compound having one or more cyanate groups (-OCN).
 シアネート化合物が有するシアネート基の数は、1以上であり、1~100が好ましく、2~50がより好ましい。
 シアネート化合物は、高分子化合物でも低分子化合物でもよい。
 例えば、シアネート化合物の分子量は、100~3000が好ましく、200~2000がより好ましく、300~1000が更に好ましい。
The number of cyanate groups contained in the cyanate compound is 1 or more, preferably 1 to 100, and more preferably 2 to 50.
The cyanate compound may be a high molecular weight compound or a low molecular weight compound.
For example, the molecular weight of the cyanate compound is preferably 100 to 3000, more preferably 200 to 2000, and even more preferably 300 to 1000.
 シアネート化合物は、芳香環基(ベンゼン環基等)を1個以上(好ましくは1~10個)有する化合物であることも好ましい。
 なかでも、シアネート化合物は、下記一般式(2)で表される化合物であることが好ましい。
The cyanate compound is also preferably a compound having one or more (preferably 1 to 10) aromatic ring groups (benzene ring groups and the like).
Among them, the cyanate compound is preferably a compound represented by the following general formula (2).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000038
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000038
 一般式(2)中、ncは0以上の整数を表す。
 ncは、0~100の整数が好ましい。
In the general formula (2), nc represents an integer of 0 or more.
The nc is preferably an integer of 0 to 100.
 一般式(2)中、Lは、単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。
 上記2価の連結基としては、例えば、エーテル基(-O-)、カルボニル基(-CO-)、エステル基(-COO-)、チオエーテル基(-S-)、-SO-、-NR-(Rは、水素原子、又は、アルキル基)、2価の脂肪族炭化水素基(例えば、アルキレン基、シクロアルキレン基、アルケニレン基(-CH=CH-等)、アルキニレン基(-C≡C-等))、2価の芳香環基(アリーレン基、及び、ヘテロアリーレン基)、並びに、これらを組み合わせた基が挙げられる。
 中でも、上記2価の連結基は、アルキレン基、シクロアルキレン基、又は、チオエーテル基、が好ましい。
 上記アルキレン基は、直鎖状でも分岐鎖状でもよく、炭素数は1~8が好ましい。中でも、上記アルキレン基は、-C(R)(R)-が好ましい。R及びRは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、又は、アルキル基を表す。上記アルキル基は直鎖状でも分岐鎖状でもよく、炭素数は1~3が好ましい。上記アルキル基が有してもよい置換基としては、ハロゲン原子が好ましく、フッ素原子がより好ましい。上記アルキル基は、パーフルオロアルキル基であることも好ましい。
 上記シクロアルキレン基は、単環でも多環でもよく、炭素数は3~20が好ましい。上記シクロアルキレン基としては、テトラヒドロジシクロペンタジエン環基が好ましい。
 一般式(2)中、Lが複数存在する場合、複数存在するLはそれぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。
In the general formula (2), L c represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
Examples of the divalent linking group include an ether group (-O-), a carbonyl group (-CO-), an ester group (-COO-), a thioether group (-S-), -SO 2- , and -NR. -(R is a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group), a divalent aliphatic hydrocarbon group (for example, an alkylene group, a cycloalkylene group, an alkenylene group (-CH = CH-, etc.), an alkynylene group (-C≡C). -Etc.)), a divalent aromatic ring group (allylen group and a heteroarylene group), and a group combining these groups can be mentioned.
Among them, the divalent linking group is preferably an alkylene group, a cycloalkylene group, or a thioether group.
The alkylene group may be linear or branched, and the number of carbon atoms is preferably 1 to 8. Among them, the alkylene group is preferably —C ( RA ) ( RB ) —. RA and RB each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, or an alkyl group. The alkyl group may be linear or branched, and the number of carbon atoms is preferably 1 to 3. As the substituent that the alkyl group may have, a halogen atom is preferable, and a fluorine atom is more preferable. The alkyl group is also preferably a perfluoroalkyl group.
The cycloalkylene group may be monocyclic or polycyclic, and preferably has 3 to 20 carbon atoms. As the cycloalkylene group, a tetrahydrodicyclopentadiene ring group is preferable.
In the general formula (2), when a plurality of L cs are present, the plurality of L cs may be the same or different.
 一般式(2)中、Arは、芳香環基を表す。
 上記芳香環基は、単環でも多環でもよく、環員原子数は、5~20が好ましい。
 上記芳香環基は、芳香族炭化水素環基でもよく、芳香族複素環基でもよく、芳香族炭化水素環基が好ましい。
 中でも、上記芳香環基はベンゼン環基が好ましい。
 上記芳香環基は、一般式(2)中に明示されるシアネート基(-OCN)以外にも置換基を1個以上(例えば1~4個)有していてもよい。上記置換基としては、アルキル基(直鎖状でも分岐鎖状でもよく、炭素数は1~3が好ましい)が好ましい。
 また、一般式(2)中に明示されるシアネート基(-OCN)以外の置換基として、更にシアネート基を有していてもよい。
 一般式(2)中、Arが複数存在する場合、複数存在するArはそれぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。
In the general formula (2), Arc represents an aromatic ring group.
The aromatic ring group may be monocyclic or polycyclic, and the number of ring member atoms is preferably 5 to 20.
The aromatic ring group may be an aromatic hydrocarbon ring group or an aromatic heterocyclic group, and an aromatic hydrocarbon ring group is preferable.
Of these, the aromatic ring group is preferably a benzene ring group.
The aromatic ring group may have one or more substituents (for example, 1 to 4) in addition to the cyanate group (—OCN) specified in the general formula (2). As the substituent, an alkyl group (which may be linear or branched, preferably having 1 to 3 carbon atoms) is preferable.
Further, a cyanate group may be further provided as a substituent other than the cyanate group (—OCN) specified in the general formula (2).
In the general formula (2), when a plurality of Arcs are present, the plurality of Arcs may be the same or different.
 シアネート化合物は予備重合品を使用してもよく、例えば、上述の一般式(2)で表される化合物の予備重合品を使用してもよい。
 ここでいう予備重合品とは、シアネート化合物同士(好ましくは上述の一般式(2)で表される化合物同士)で一定程度重合反応させてから反応を停止させたプレポリマー状態のシアネート化合物である。
As the cyanate compound, a prepolymerized product may be used, and for example, a prepolymerized product of the compound represented by the above-mentioned general formula (2) may be used.
The prepolymerized product referred to here is a cyanate compound in a prepolymer state in which cyanate compounds (preferably compounds represented by the above general formula (2)) are polymerized to a certain extent and then the reaction is stopped. ..
 シアネート化合物としては、例えば、以下に例示する化合物、及び、以下に例示する化合物から選択される1以上の化合物の予備重合品が使用できる。
 下記の例示中、nは1以上の整数を表す。
As the cyanate compound, for example, a compound exemplified below and a prepolymer product of one or more compounds selected from the compounds exemplified below can be used.
In the following examples, n represents an integer of 1 or more.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000039
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000039
 シアネート化合物としては、市販品を使用してもよい。
 市販品としては、例えば、CYTESTER TA、TA-100、TA-1500、P-201(いずれも三菱ガス化学社製)、並びに、AROCY XU371(Huntsman社製)が挙げられる。
As the cyanate compound, a commercially available product may be used.
Examples of commercially available products include CYTESTER TA, TA-100, TA-1500, P-201 (all manufactured by Mitsubishi Gas Chemical Company), and AROCY XU371 (manufactured by Huntsman).
 シアネート化合物は、1種のみを使用していてもよいし、2種以上を使用してもよい。
 シアネート化合物の含有量は、組成物の全固形分に対して、0.1~40質量%が好ましく、1~15質量%がより好ましく、3.5~10質量%が更に好ましい。
 組成物がエポキシ化合物を含む場合、シアネート化合物の含有量は、エポキシ化合物とフェノール化合物との合計含有量に対して、例えば1~300質量%であり、5~250質量%が好ましく、10~200質量%がより好ましく、20~150質量%が更に好ましい。
 シアネート化合物の含有量は、フェノール化合物の含有量に対して、例えば1~600質量%であり、20~500質量%が好ましく、50~400質量%がより好ましく、70~300質量%が更に好ましい。
Only one type of cyanate compound may be used, or two or more types may be used.
The content of the cyanate compound is preferably 0.1 to 40% by mass, more preferably 1 to 15% by mass, still more preferably 3.5 to 10% by mass, based on the total solid content of the composition.
When the composition contains an epoxy compound, the content of the cyanate compound is, for example, 1 to 300% by mass, preferably 5 to 250% by mass, and 10 to 200% by mass, based on the total content of the epoxy compound and the phenol compound. The mass% is more preferable, and 20 to 150% by mass is further preferable.
The content of the cyanate compound is, for example, 1 to 600% by mass, preferably 20 to 500% by mass, more preferably 50 to 400% by mass, still more preferably 70 to 300% by mass, based on the content of the phenol compound. ..
〔無機物〕
 組成物は、無機物を含む。
 無機物は、1種のみを使用していてもよいし、2種以上を使用してもよい。
 無機物としては、従来から熱伝導材料の無機フィラーに用いられているいずれの無機物を用いてもよい。
 また、上記無機物は、少なくとも無機窒化物(好ましくは窒化ホウ素)を含む。
 上記無機物は、無機窒化物に加え、更に無機酸化物(好ましくは酸化アルミニウム)を含んでもよい。
[Inorganic substances]
The composition comprises an inorganic substance.
As the inorganic substance, only one kind may be used, or two or more kinds may be used.
As the inorganic substance, any inorganic substance conventionally used for the inorganic filler of the heat conductive material may be used.
Further, the above-mentioned inorganic substance contains at least an inorganic nitride (preferably boron nitride).
The inorganic substance may further contain an inorganic oxide (preferably aluminum oxide) in addition to the inorganic nitride.
 無機物の形状は特に制限されず、粒子状であってもよく、フィルム状であってもよく、又は板状であってもよい。粒子状無機物の形状は、米粒状、球形状、立方体状、紡錘形状、鱗片状、凝集状、及び、不定形状が挙げられる。 The shape of the inorganic substance is not particularly limited, and may be in the form of particles, a film, or a plate. Examples of the shape of the particulate inorganic substance include rice granules, spherical shape, cube shape, spindle shape, scale shape, agglomerate shape, and indefinite shape.
 無機物の大きさは特に制限されないが、無機物の分散性がより優れる点で、無機物の平均粒径は500μm以下が好ましく、300μm以下がより好ましく、200μm以下が更に好ましい。下限は特に制限されないが、取り扱い性の点で、10nm以上が好ましく、100nm以上がより好ましい。
 無機物の平均粒径としては、市販品を用いる場合、カタログ値を採用する。カタログ値が無い場合、上記平均粒径の測定方法としては、電子顕微鏡を用いて、100個の無機物を無作為に選択して、それぞれの無機物の粒径(長径)を測定し、それらを算術平均して求める。
The size of the inorganic substance is not particularly limited, but the average particle size of the inorganic substance is preferably 500 μm or less, more preferably 300 μm or less, still more preferably 200 μm or less, in that the dispersibility of the inorganic substance is more excellent. The lower limit is not particularly limited, but in terms of handleability, 10 nm or more is preferable, and 100 nm or more is more preferable.
As the average particle size of the inorganic substance, the catalog value is adopted when a commercially available product is used. If there is no catalog value, as the method for measuring the average particle size, 100 inorganic substances are randomly selected, the particle size (major axis) of each inorganic substance is measured, and the arithmetic is performed. Calculate on average.
 熱伝導材料の熱伝導性がより優れる点で、組成物は、平均粒径が20μm以上(好ましくは、30μm以上)の無機物(好ましくは、無機窒化物又は無機酸化物、より好ましくは無機窒化物、更に好ましくは窒化ホウ素、特に好ましくは凝集状窒化ホウ素)を少なくとも含むのが好ましい。 In that the heat conductive material is more excellent in heat conductivity, the composition is an inorganic substance (preferably an inorganic nitride or an inorganic oxide, more preferably an inorganic nitride) having an average particle size of 20 μm or more (preferably 30 μm or more). , More preferably, boron nitride, particularly preferably aggregated boron nitride).
 無機物の一形態である無機窒化物としては、例えば、窒化ホウ素(BN)、窒化炭素(C)、窒化ケイ素(Si)、窒化ガリウム(GaN)、窒化インジウム(InN)、窒化アルミニウム(AlN)、窒化クロム(CrN)、窒化銅(CuN)、窒化鉄(FeN)、窒化鉄(FeN)、窒化ランタン(LaN)、窒化リチウム(LiN)、窒化マグネシウム(Mg)、窒化モリブデン(MoN)、窒化ニオブ(NbN)、窒化タンタル(TaN)、窒化チタン(TiN)、窒化タングステン(WN)、窒化タングステン(WN)、窒化イットリウム(YN)、及び、窒化ジルコニウム(ZrN)等が挙げられる。
 上記の無機窒化物は、1種のみを使用していてもよいし、2種以上を使用していてもよい。
 無機窒化物は、アルミニウム原子、ホウ素原子、又は、珪素原子を含むのが好ましく、窒化アルミニウム、窒化ホウ素、又は、窒化珪素を含むのがより好ましく、窒化アルミニウム又は窒化ホウ素を含むのが更に好ましく、窒化ホウ素を含むのが特に好ましい。窒化ホウ素は、平均粒径が20μm以上である凝集状窒化ホウ素を少なくとも含むのが最も好ましい。
 無機物中における無機窒化物(好ましくは窒化ホウ素及び/又は窒化アルミニウム、より好ましくは平均粒径が20μm以上である凝集状窒化ホウ素)の含有量は、無機物の全質量に対して10~100質量%が好ましく、40~100質量%がより好ましく、60~100質量%が更に好ましい。
Examples of the inorganic nitride, which is a form of an inorganic substance, include boron nitride (BN), carbon nitride (C 3 N 4 ), silicon nitride (Si 3 N 4 ), gallium nitride (GaN), and indium nitride (InN). Aluminum Nitride (AlN), Chromium Nitride (Cr 2 N), Copper Nitride (Cu 3 N), Iron Nitride (Fe 4 N), Iron Nitride (Fe 3 N), Lantern Nitride (La N), Lithium Nitride (Li 3 N) ), Magnesium Nitride (Mg 3 N 2 ), Molybdenum Nitride (Mo 2 N), Nitride (NbN), Tantal Nitride (TaN), Titanium Nitride (TiN), Tungsten Nitride (W 2 N), Tungsten Nitride (WN 2 ) ), Ittrium nitride (YN), zirconium nitride (ZrN) and the like.
As the above-mentioned inorganic nitride, only one kind may be used, or two or more kinds may be used.
The inorganic nitride preferably contains an aluminum atom, a boron atom, or a silicon atom, more preferably aluminum nitride, boron nitride, or silicon nitride, and even more preferably aluminum nitride or boron nitride. It is particularly preferable to contain boron nitride. Most preferably, the boron nitride contains at least aggregated boron nitride having an average particle size of 20 μm or more.
The content of the inorganic nitride (preferably boron nitride and / or aluminum nitride, more preferably aggregated boron nitride having an average particle size of 20 μm or more) in the inorganic substance is 10 to 100% by mass with respect to the total mass of the inorganic substance. Is preferable, 40 to 100% by mass is more preferable, and 60 to 100% by mass is further preferable.
 無機物の一形態である無機酸化物としては、例えば、酸化ジルコニウム(ZrO)、酸化チタン(TiO)、酸化ケイ素(SiO)、酸化アルミニウム(Al)、酸化鉄(Fe、FeO、Fe)、酸化銅(CuO、CuO)、酸化亜鉛(ZnO)、酸化イットリウム(Y)、酸化ニオブ(Nb)、酸化モリブデン(MoO)、酸化インジウム(In、InO)、酸化スズ(SnO)、酸化タンタル(Ta)、酸化タングステン(WO、W)、酸化鉛(PbO、PbO)、酸化ビスマス(Bi)、酸化セリウム(CeO、Ce)、酸化アンチモン(Sb、Sb)、酸化ゲルマニウム(GeO、GeO)、酸化ランタン(La)、及び、酸化ルテニウム(RuO)等が挙げられる。
 無機酸化物は、後述の無機系イオン捕捉剤とは異なることも好ましい。
 無機酸化物は、1種のみを使用していてもよいし、2種以上を使用していてもよい。
 無機酸化物は、酸化チタン、酸化アルミニウム(アルミナ)、又は酸化亜鉛が好ましく、酸化アルミニウムがより好ましい。
 無機酸化物は、非酸化物として用意された金属が、環境下等で酸化して生じている酸化物であってもよい。
Examples of the inorganic oxide, which is a form of an inorganic substance, include zirconium oxide (ZrO 2 ), titanium oxide (TIO 2 ), silicon oxide (SiO 2 ), aluminum oxide (Al 2 O 3 ), and iron oxide (Fe 2 O). 3 , FeO, Fe 3 O 4 ), copper oxide (CuO, Cu 2 O), zinc oxide (ZnO), yttrium oxide (Y 2 O 3 ), niobium oxide (Nb 2 O 5 ), molybdenum oxide (MoO 3 ) , Indium oxide (In 2 O 3 , In 2 O), Tin oxide (SnO 2 ), Tantal oxide (Ta 2 O 5 ), Tungsten oxide (WO 3 , W 2 O 5 ), Lead oxide (PbO, PbO 2 ) , Bismus oxide (Bi 2 O 3 ), cerium oxide (CeO 2 , Ce 2 O 3 ), antimony oxide (Sb 2 O 3 , Sb 2 O 5 ), germanium oxide (GeO 2 , GeO), lanthanum oxide (La 2 ). O 3 ), ruthenium oxide (RuO 2 ) and the like can be mentioned.
It is also preferable that the inorganic oxide is different from the inorganic ion scavenger described later.
Only one kind of inorganic oxide may be used, or two or more kinds may be used.
The inorganic oxide is preferably titanium oxide, aluminum oxide (alumina), or zinc oxide, and more preferably aluminum oxide.
The inorganic oxide may be an oxide produced by oxidizing a metal prepared as a non-oxide in an environment or the like.
 無機物は、イオン捕捉剤に該当する無機物(無機系イオン捕捉剤)を含んでもよい。
 無機系イオン捕捉剤としては、例えば、イオン交換により陽イオンを捕捉する陽イオン吸着剤、イオン交換により陰イオンを捕捉する陰イオン吸着剤、及び、イオン交換により陽イオンと陰イオンの両方を捕捉する両イオン捕捉剤などの無機イオン吸着剤が挙げられる。
The inorganic substance may contain an inorganic substance (inorganic ion scavenger) corresponding to the ion scavenger.
Examples of the inorganic ion trapping agent include a cation adsorbent that captures cations by ion exchange, an anion adsorbent that captures anions by ion exchange, and an anion adsorbent that captures both cations and anions by ion exchange. Examples thereof include inorganic ion adsorbents such as both ion trapping agents.
 無機系イオン捕捉剤としては、例えば、アンチモン、ビスマス、ジルコニウム、チタン、スズ、及び、マグネシウムからなる群から選択される1種以上(好ましくは2種以上)を含む無機物(好ましくは複合無機物)が挙げられる。上記1種以上(好ましくは2種以上)を含む無機物(好ましくは複合無機物)としては、例えば、酸化物(好ましくは複合酸化物)、酸化水和物(好ましくは複合酸化水和物)、及び、水酸化物(好ましくは複合水酸化物)が挙げられる。
 他にも、無機系イオン捕捉剤としては、アンチモン、ビスマス、ジルコニウム、チタン、スズ、及び、マグネシウムからなる群から選択される1種以上と、アルミニウムとの、複合無機物(複合酸化物、複合酸化水和物、及び、複合水酸化物等)も挙げられる。
 複合酸化物としては、例えば、酸化アルミニウム/酸化マグネシウム固溶体が挙げられる。
Examples of the inorganic ion scavenger include an inorganic substance (preferably a composite inorganic substance) containing one or more (preferably two or more) selected from the group consisting of antimony, bismuth, zirconium, titanium, tin, and magnesium. Can be mentioned. Examples of the inorganic substance (preferably a composite inorganic substance) containing one or more of the above (preferably two or more) include an oxide (preferably a composite oxide), an oxidative hydrate (preferably a composite oxidative hydrate), and an oxide. , Hydroxides (preferably composite hydroxides).
In addition, as the inorganic ion trapping agent, a composite inorganic substance (composite oxide, composite oxidation) of one or more selected from the group consisting of antimony, bismuth, zirconium, titanium, tin, and magnesium and aluminum is used. Hydrate, composite hydroxide, etc.) can also be mentioned.
Examples of the composite oxide include aluminum oxide / magnesium oxide solid solution.
 複合物である無機系イオン捕捉剤は、アンチモン、ビスマス、ジルコニウム、マグネシウム、及び、アルミニウムからなる群から選択される2種以上の、酸化物(複合酸化物)、酸化水和物(複合酸化水和物)、又は、水酸化物(複合水酸化物)が好ましい。
 中でも、無機系イオン捕捉剤は、マグネシウム、アルミニウム、及び、ジルコニウムの3成分系複合物(複合酸化物、複合酸化水和物、若しくは、複合水酸化物等)、ビスマス及びジルコニウムの2成分系複合物(複合酸化物、複合酸化水和物、若しくは、複合水酸化物等)、ビスマス及びアンチモンの2成分系複合物(複合酸化物、複合酸化水和物、若しくは、複合水酸化物等)、又は、マグネシウム及びアルミニウムを含む複合物(複合酸化物、複合酸化水和物、若しくは、複合水酸化物等)が好ましく、ビスマス及びジルコニウムの2成分系複合物、又は、マグネシウム及びアルミニウムの2成分系複合物がより好ましい。
 無機系イオン捕捉剤が2種以上の金属原子を含む場合、無機系イオン捕捉剤は、無機系イオン捕捉剤の全金属原子に対する含有量が1~99モル%の範囲となる金属原子を2種以上(例えば2~4種)含むことが好ましく、無機系イオン捕捉剤の全金属原子に対する含有量が5~95モル%の範囲となる金属原子を2種以上(例えば2~4種)含むことがより好ましい。
The inorganic ion trapping agent which is a composite is two or more kinds of oxides (composite oxides) and oxidative hydrates (composite oxide waters) selected from the group consisting of antimony, bismuth, zirconium, magnesium, and aluminum. Japanese products) or hydroxides (composite hydroxides) are preferable.
Among them, the inorganic ion trapping agent is a two-component composite of magnesium, aluminum, and zirconium (composite oxide, composite oxidative hydrate, composite hydroxide, etc.), bismuth, and zirconium. Substances (composite oxides, composite oxidative hydrates, composite hydroxides, etc.), two-component composites of bismuth and antimony (composite oxides, composite oxidative hydrates, composite hydroxides, etc.), Alternatively, a composite containing magnesium and aluminum (composite oxide, composite oxidative hydrate, composite hydroxide, etc.) is preferable, and a two-component composite of bismuth and zirconium or a two-component composite of magnesium and aluminum. Complexes are more preferred.
When the inorganic ion trapping agent contains two or more kinds of metal atoms, the inorganic ion trapping agent contains two kinds of metal atoms in which the content of the inorganic ion trapping agent with respect to all metal atoms is in the range of 1 to 99 mol%. It is preferable to include the above (for example, 2 to 4 types), and 2 or more types (for example, 2 to 4 types) of metal atoms having an content of the inorganic ion trapping agent with respect to all metal atoms in the range of 5 to 95 mol% are contained. Is more preferable.
 無機系イオン捕捉剤の含有量は、全無機物に対して、0.01~40質量%が好ましく、0.1~20質量%がより好ましく、0.2~10質量%が更に好ましい。 The content of the inorganic ion scavenger is preferably 0.01 to 40% by mass, more preferably 0.1 to 20% by mass, still more preferably 0.2 to 10% by mass, based on the total inorganic substances.
 組成物中の無機物は、実質的に無機窒化物と無機系イオン吸着剤とのみからなることも好ましく、例えば、無機窒化物と無機系イオン吸着剤との合計含有量が、全無機物に対して、98~100質量%であることがより好ましく、99.95~100質量%であることが更に好ましく、99.995~100質量%であることが特に好ましい。 It is also preferable that the inorganic substance in the composition is substantially composed of only the inorganic nitride and the inorganic ion adsorbent. For example, the total content of the inorganic nitride and the inorganic ion adsorbent is higher than that of the total inorganic substance. , 98 to 100% by mass, more preferably 99.95 to 100% by mass, and particularly preferably 99.995 to 100% by mass.
 組成物が含む無機物(好ましくは無機窒化物又は無機酸化物、より好ましくは無機窒化物、更に好ましくは窒化ホウ素及び/又は窒化アルミニウム)は、実質的に平均粒径が20μm以上(好ましくは、30μm以上)の無機物のみであるのも好ましい。無機物が、実質的に平均粒径が20μm以上の無機物のみであるとは、無機物の全質量に対して、平均粒径が20μm以上の無機物の含有量が99質量%超であることを言う。 The inorganic material contained in the composition (preferably an inorganic nitride or an inorganic oxide, more preferably an inorganic nitride, further preferably boron nitride and / or aluminum nitride) has a substantially average particle size of 20 μm or more (preferably 30 μm). It is also preferable that only the inorganic substances of the above) are used. The fact that the inorganic substances are substantially only inorganic substances having an average particle size of 20 μm or more means that the content of the inorganic substances having an average particle size of 20 μm or more is more than 99% by mass with respect to the total mass of the inorganic substances.
 また、無機物は、平均粒径が異なる無機物をそれぞれ有するのも好ましく、例えば、平均粒径が20μm以上の無機物である無機物Xと、平均粒径が20μm未満の無機物である無機物Yとの両方を含むのも好ましい。
 上記無機物Xの平均粒径は、20~300μmが好ましく、30~200μmがより好ましい。上記無機物Yの平均粒径は、1nm以上20μm未満が好ましく、10nm以上15μm以下がより好ましい。
 無機物Xは、無機窒化物又は無機酸化物が好ましく、無機窒化物がより好ましく、窒化ホウ素が更に好ましい。無機物Xは、凝集状であることも好ましい。
 無機物Yは、無機窒化物又は無機酸化物が好ましく、窒化ホウ素又は酸化アルミニウムがより好ましい。無機物Yは、凝集状以外であることも好ましい。
 無機物X及び無機物Yは、それぞれ、1種単独で使用してもよく、2種以上を使用してもよい。
 無機物中、無機物Xの含有量と無機物Yの含有量との質量比(無機物Xの含有量/無機物Yの含有量)は、50/50~99/1が好ましく、60/40~95/5がより好ましく、60/40~90/10が更に好ましい。
Further, the inorganic substance preferably has an inorganic substance having a different average particle size, for example, both an inorganic substance X having an average particle size of 20 μm or more and an inorganic substance Y having an average particle size of less than 20 μm. It is also preferable to include it.
The average particle size of the inorganic substance X is preferably 20 to 300 μm, more preferably 30 to 200 μm. The average particle size of the inorganic substance Y is preferably 1 nm or more and less than 20 μm, and more preferably 10 nm or more and 15 μm or less.
The inorganic substance X is preferably an inorganic nitride or an inorganic oxide, more preferably an inorganic nitride, and even more preferably boron nitride. It is also preferable that the inorganic substance X is in the form of agglomerates.
The inorganic substance Y is preferably an inorganic nitride or an inorganic oxide, more preferably boron nitride or aluminum oxide. It is also preferable that the inorganic substance Y is not in the form of agglomerates.
As the inorganic substance X and the inorganic substance Y, one kind may be used alone, or two or more kinds may be used.
The mass ratio of the content of the inorganic substance X to the content of the inorganic substance Y (content of the inorganic substance X / content of the inorganic substance Y) is preferably 50/50 to 99/1, and 60/40 to 95/5. Is more preferable, and 60/40 to 90/10 is even more preferable.
 無機物(特に窒化ホウ素)は、表面処理されていてもよい。なお表面処理とは、後述する表面修飾剤を用いた表面修飾とは異なる処理を意図する。
 このような処理を行うことで、無機物の表面に官能基が導入され、無機物がフェノール化合物、エポキシ化合物、及び/又は、後述の表面修飾剤等と相互作用しやすくなり、形成される熱伝導材料の熱伝導性及びピール強度等がより改善すると考えられている。
 表面処理としては、例えば、プラズマ処理(真空プラズマ処理、大気圧プラズマ処理、及び、アクアプラズマ処理等)、紫外線照射処理、コロナ処理、電子線照射処理、オゾン処理、焼成処理、火炎処理、及び、酸化剤処理等が挙げられる。上記酸化剤処理としては、酸性条件で行ってもよいし塩基性条件(pH12以上等)で行ってもよい。
Inorganic substances (particularly boron nitride) may be surface-treated. The surface treatment is intended to be a treatment different from the surface modification using a surface modifier described later.
By performing such a treatment, a functional group is introduced on the surface of the inorganic substance, and the inorganic substance easily interacts with a phenol compound, an epoxy compound, and / or a surface modifier described later, and is formed as a heat conductive material. It is considered that the thermal conductivity and peel strength of the above are further improved.
The surface treatment includes, for example, plasma treatment (vacuum plasma treatment, atmospheric pressure plasma treatment, aqua plasma treatment, etc.), ultraviolet irradiation treatment, corona treatment, electron beam irradiation treatment, ozone treatment, firing treatment, flame treatment, and Oxidizing agent treatment and the like can be mentioned. The oxidizing agent treatment may be carried out under acidic conditions or basic conditions (pH 12 or higher, etc.).
 組成物中における無機物の含有量は、組成物の全固形分に対して、20質量%以上が好ましく、50質量%以上がより好ましく、60質量%以上が更に好ましく、70質量%以上が特に好ましい。上限は100質量%未満であり、95質量%以下が好ましく、83質量%以下がより好ましい。 The content of the inorganic substance in the composition is preferably 20% by mass or more, more preferably 50% by mass or more, further preferably 60% by mass or more, and particularly preferably 70% by mass or more, based on the total solid content of the composition. .. The upper limit is less than 100% by mass, preferably 95% by mass or less, and more preferably 83% by mass or less.
〔表面修飾剤、表面修飾無機物〕
 本発明の組成物は、上述の成分とは異なる成分として、更に表面修飾剤を含んでいてもよい。
 表面修飾剤は、上述の無機物を表面修飾する成分である。
 本明細書において、「表面修飾」とは無機物の表面の少なくとも一部に有機物が吸着している状態を意味する。吸着の形態は特に限定されず、結合している状態であればよい。すなわち、表面修飾は、有機物の一部が脱離して得られる有機基が無機物表面に結合している状態も含む。結合は、共有結合、配位結合、イオン結合、水素結合、ファンデルワールス結合、及び、金属結合等、いずれの結合であってもよい。表面修飾は、表面の少なくとも一部に単分子膜を形成するようになされていてもよい。単分子膜は、有機分子の化学吸着によって形成される単層膜であり、Self-AssembledMonoLayer(SAM)として知られている。なお、本明細書において、表面修飾は、無機物の表面の一部のみであっても、全体であってもよい。
[Surface modifiers, surface modifiers]
The composition of the present invention may further contain a surface modifier as a component different from the above-mentioned components.
The surface modifier is a component that surface-modifies the above-mentioned inorganic substances.
As used herein, "surface modification" means a state in which an organic substance is adsorbed on at least a part of the surface of the inorganic substance. The form of adsorption is not particularly limited, and may be in a bonded state. That is, the surface modification also includes a state in which an organic group obtained by desorption of a part of an organic substance is bonded to the surface of the inorganic substance. The bond may be any bond such as a covalent bond, a coordinate bond, an ionic bond, a hydrogen bond, a van der Waals bond, and a metal bond. The surface modification may be made to form a monomolecular film on at least a part of the surface. The monolayer is a monolayer formed by chemisorption of organic molecules and is known as Self-Assembled MonoLayer (SAM). In addition, in this specification, the surface modification may be only a part of the surface of an inorganic substance, or may be the whole.
 本明細書において、「表面修飾無機物」は、表面修飾剤により表面修飾されている無機物である。すなわち、表面修飾無機物は、無機物と上記無機物の表面上に吸着した表面修飾剤とを含む材料である。
 つまり、本発明の組成物において、無機物は、無機物の表面上に吸着した表面修飾剤とともに、表面修飾無機物を構成していてもよい。
 また、本発明において、組成物が表面修飾無機物を含むことによって、組成物が無機物及び表面修飾剤を含むことになっていてもよい。
 組成物中の無機物は、その一部又は全部が表面修飾剤とともに表面修飾無機物を構成していてよい。例えば、組成物中で、一部の無機物の表面修飾無機物を構成し、同時に、表面修飾無機物の構成に関与しない無機物が存在していてもよい。
 組成物中の表面修飾剤は、その一部又は全部が無機物とともに表面修飾無機物を構成していてよい。例えば、組成物中で、一部の表面修飾剤が表面修飾無機物を構成し、同時に、表面修飾無機物の構成に関与しない表面修飾剤が存在していてもよい。
 中でも、組成物は、表面修飾無機物を構成する無機物が無機窒化物(好ましくは窒化ホウ素、より好ましくは平均粒径が20μm以上である凝集状窒化ホウ素)である、表面修飾無機窒化物(好ましくは表面修飾窒化ホウ素)を含むことが好ましい。組成物中の無機窒化物(好ましくは窒化ホウ素)は、その一部又は全部が、表面修飾剤とともに表面修飾無機窒化物(好ましくは表面修飾窒化ホウ素)を構成していてよい。
 また、組成物は表面修飾無機物を構成する無機物が無機酸化物(好ましくは酸化アルミニウム)である、表面修飾無機酸化物(好ましくは表面修飾アルミニウム)を含んでもよい。組成物中の無機酸化物(好ましくは酸化アルミニウム)は、その一部又は全部が、表面修飾剤とともに表面修飾無機酸化物(好ましくは表面修飾酸化アルミニウム)を構成していてよい。
 表面修飾無機物は、例えば、無機物と表面修飾剤とを接触させて形成できる。例えば、無機物と、表面修飾剤と、本発明の組成物を構成する他の成分とを混合し、本発明の組成物を製造する過程で組成物中に表面修飾無機物を形成してもよい。
 また、例えば、溶媒中で、無機物と表面修飾剤とを混合して、表面修飾無機物を含む混合液を調製し、上記混合液から、ろ別等の手段で、表面修飾無機物を分離し、分離された表面修飾無機物を得てもよい。分離された表面修飾無機物を用いて、本発明の組成物を調製してもよい。
As used herein, the "surface-modified inorganic substance" is an inorganic substance that has been surface-modified with a surface-modifying agent. That is, the surface-modifying inorganic substance is a material containing the inorganic substance and the surface modifying agent adsorbed on the surface of the inorganic substance.
That is, in the composition of the present invention, the inorganic substance may constitute a surface-modifying inorganic substance together with the surface modifying agent adsorbed on the surface of the inorganic substance.
Further, in the present invention, the composition may contain an inorganic substance and a surface modifying agent by containing the surface-modifying inorganic substance.
The inorganic substance in the composition may be partially or wholly composed of the surface-modifying inorganic substance together with the surface-modifying agent. For example, in the composition, there may be an inorganic substance that constitutes a surface-modified inorganic substance of some inorganic substances and at the same time does not participate in the composition of the surface-modified inorganic substance.
A part or all of the surface modifier in the composition may constitute a surface-modifying inorganic substance together with the inorganic substance. For example, in the composition, some surface modifiers may constitute the surface-modifying inorganic substance, and at the same time, a surface modifier which is not involved in the composition of the surface-modifying inorganic substance may be present.
Among them, the composition is a surface-modified inorganic nitride (preferably boron nitride, more preferably agglomerated boron nitride having an average particle size of 20 μm or more) as the inorganic substance constituting the surface-modified inorganic substance. Surface-modified boron nitride) is preferably contained. A part or all of the inorganic nitride (preferably boron nitride) in the composition may constitute a surface-modified inorganic nitride (preferably surface-modified boron nitride) together with the surface modifier.
Further, the composition may contain a surface-modified inorganic oxide (preferably surface-modified aluminum) in which the inorganic substance constituting the surface-modified inorganic substance is an inorganic oxide (preferably aluminum oxide). A part or all of the inorganic oxide (preferably aluminum oxide) in the composition may constitute a surface-modified inorganic oxide (preferably surface-modified aluminum oxide) together with the surface modifier.
The surface-modifying inorganic substance can be formed, for example, by contacting the inorganic substance with the surface modifying agent. For example, an inorganic substance, a surface modifier, and other components constituting the composition of the present invention may be mixed to form a surface-modifying inorganic substance in the composition in the process of producing the composition of the present invention.
Further, for example, the inorganic substance and the surface modifying agent are mixed in a solvent to prepare a mixed solution containing the surface modifying inorganic substance, and the surface modifying inorganic substance is separated from the above mixed solution by means such as filtration and separation. The surface-modified inorganic substance may be obtained. The composition of the present invention may be prepared using the separated surface-modified inorganic substance.
 表面修飾剤としては、長鎖アルキル脂肪酸等のカルボン酸、有機ホスホン酸、有機リン酸エステル、有機シラン分子(シランカップリング剤)等従来公知の表面修飾剤を使用できる。その他、例えば、特開2009-502529号公報、特開2001-192500号公報、特許4694929号に記載の表面修飾剤を利用してもよい。 As the surface modifier, a conventionally known surface modifier such as a carboxylic acid such as a long-chain alkyl fatty acid, an organic phosphonic acid, an organic phosphoric acid ester, and an organic silane molecule (silane coupling agent) can be used. In addition, for example, the surface modifiers described in JP-A-2009-502529, JP-A-2001-192500, and Japanese Patent No. 4694929 may be used.
 上記シランカップリング剤は、例えば、Si原子に直接結合した加水分解性基を有する化合物である。
 上記加水分解性基としては、アルコキシ基(好ましくは炭素数1~10)、及び、塩素原子等のハロゲン原子が挙げられる。
 シランカップリング剤が有する、Si原子に直接結合した加水分解性基の数は、1以上が好ましく、2以上がより好ましく、3以上が更により好ましい。上記数に上限はなく、例えば、10000以下である。
 シランカップリング剤は、反応性基を有することも好ましい。
 上記反応性基の具体例としては、エポキシ基、オキセタニル基、ビニル基、(メタ)クリル基、スチリル基、アミノ基、イソシアネート基、メルカプト基、及び、酸無水物基が挙げられる。
 シランカップリング剤が有する、反応性基の数は、1以上が好ましく、2以上がより好ましく、3以上が更により好ましい。上記数に上限はなく、例えば、10000以下である。
 シランカップリング剤としては、例えば、3-アミノプロピルトリエトキシシラン、3-(2-アミノエチル)アミノプロピルトリエトキシシラン、3-アミノプロピルトリメトキシシラン、3-(2-アミノエチル)アミノプロピルトリメトキシシラン、N-フェニル-3-アミノプロピルトリメトキシシラン、3-メルカプトトリエトキシシラン、及び、3-ウレイドプロピルトリエトキシシランが挙げられる。
The silane coupling agent is, for example, a compound having a hydrolyzable group directly bonded to a Si atom.
Examples of the hydrolyzable group include an alkoxy group (preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms) and a halogen atom such as a chlorine atom.
The number of hydrolyzable groups directly bonded to the Si atom of the silane coupling agent is preferably 1 or more, more preferably 2 or more, still more preferably 3 or more. There is no upper limit to the above number, for example, 10,000 or less.
It is also preferable that the silane coupling agent has a reactive group.
Specific examples of the reactive group include an epoxy group, an oxetanyl group, a vinyl group, a (meth) krill group, a styryl group, an amino group, an isocyanate group, a mercapto group, and an acid anhydride group.
The number of reactive groups contained in the silane coupling agent is preferably 1 or more, more preferably 2 or more, and even more preferably 3 or more. There is no upper limit to the above number, for example, 10,000 or less.
Examples of the silane coupling agent include 3-aminopropyltriethoxysilane, 3- (2-aminoethyl) aminopropyltriethoxysilane, 3-aminopropyltrimethoxysilane, and 3- (2-aminoethyl) aminopropyltri. Examples thereof include methoxysilane, N-phenyl-3-aminopropyltrimethoxysilane, 3-mercaptotriethoxysilane, and 3-ureidopropyltriethoxysilane.
 本発明の組成物が表面修飾剤を含む場合、事前に表面修飾無機物を作製して、これを組成物の原料の一部として使用してもよい。すなわち、事前に作製された表面修飾無機物を組成物のその他の各種成分と混合することで、事前に作製された表面修飾無機物に含まれた形態として、表面修飾剤及び無機物の全部又は一部を組成物中に導入してもよい。
 また、表面修飾無機物に含まれた形態で導入される表面修飾剤及び無機物以外の、表面修飾無機物を形成していない状態の表面修飾剤及び/又は無機物を、組成物のその他の成分と混合し、組成物中に表面修飾剤及び/又は無機物の全部又は一部を導入してもよい。この場合、混合の過程で、表面修飾剤が無機物の表面に吸着し、組成物中で、表面修飾無機物を形成することも好ましい。また、この場合、表面修飾剤の一部は、表面修飾無機物の形成に寄与してしない状態で組成物中に存在していてもよい。
When the composition of the present invention contains a surface-modifying agent, a surface-modifying inorganic substance may be prepared in advance and used as a part of the raw material of the composition. That is, by mixing the surface-modified inorganic substance prepared in advance with various other components of the composition, all or part of the surface modifier and the inorganic substance can be obtained as a form contained in the surface-modified inorganic substance prepared in advance. It may be introduced into the composition.
Further, other than the surface modifier and the inorganic substance introduced in the form contained in the surface-modified inorganic substance, the surface modifier and / or the inorganic substance in a state where the surface-modified inorganic substance is not formed is mixed with other components of the composition. , All or part of the surface modifier and / or the inorganic material may be introduced into the composition. In this case, it is also preferable that the surface modifier is adsorbed on the surface of the inorganic substance in the mixing process to form the surface-modified inorganic substance in the composition. Further, in this case, a part of the surface modifying agent may be present in the composition in a state of not contributing to the formation of the surface modifying inorganic substance.
 表面修飾剤は、1種単独で使用してもよく2種以上使用してもよい。
 組成物が表面修飾剤を含む場合、表面修飾剤の含有量は、組成物の全固形分に対して、0.005~5質量%が好ましく、0.05~3質量%がより好ましい。
 組成物が表面修飾剤を含む場合、表面修飾剤の含有量は、全無機物に対して、0.01~10質量%が好ましく、0.10~5質量%がより好ましい。
 表面修飾無機物中における、表面修飾剤と無機物との質量比(無機物表面上に吸着している表面修飾剤の質量/無機物の質量)は、0.00001~0.5が好ましく、0.0001~0.1がより好ましい。
 組成物が表面修飾無機物を含む場合、表面修飾無機物の含有量は、組成物の全固形分に対して、20質量%以上が好ましく、50質量%以上がより好ましく、60質量%以上が更に好ましく、75質量%以上が特に好ましい。上限は100質量%未満であり、95質量%以下が好ましく、83質量%以下がより好ましい。
 組成物が表面修飾窒化物(好ましくは表面修飾窒化ホウ素)を含む場合、表面修飾窒化物(好ましくは表面修飾窒化ホウ素)の含有量は、全表面修飾無機物に対して、10~100質量%が好ましく、40~100質量%がより好ましく、60~100質量%が更に好ましい。
The surface modifier may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
When the composition contains a surface modifier, the content of the surface modifier is preferably 0.005 to 5% by mass, more preferably 0.05 to 3% by mass, based on the total solid content of the composition.
When the composition contains a surface modifier, the content of the surface modifier is preferably 0.01 to 10% by mass, more preferably 0.10 to 5% by mass, based on the total inorganic substances.
The mass ratio of the surface modifier to the inorganic substance (mass of the surface modifier adsorbed on the surface of the inorganic substance / mass of the inorganic substance) in the surface-modified inorganic substance is preferably 0.00001 to 0.5, preferably 0.0001 to 0.0001. 0.1 is more preferable.
When the composition contains a surface-modified inorganic substance, the content of the surface-modified inorganic substance is preferably 20% by mass or more, more preferably 50% by mass or more, still more preferably 60% by mass or more, based on the total solid content of the composition. , 75% by mass or more is particularly preferable. The upper limit is less than 100% by mass, preferably 95% by mass or less, and more preferably 83% by mass or less.
When the composition contains a surface-modified nitride (preferably surface-modified boron nitride), the content of the surface-modified nitride (preferably surface-modified boron nitride) is 10 to 100% by mass with respect to the total surface-modified inorganic substance. Preferably, 40 to 100% by mass is more preferable, and 60 to 100% by mass is further preferable.
〔硬化促進剤〕
 組成物は、更に、硬化促進剤を含むことも好ましい。
 硬化促進剤は、一般式(P1)で表される化合物及び一般式(P2)で表される化合物からなる群から選択される少なくとも1種を含むことが好ましく、一般式(P3)で表される化合物を含むことがより好ましい。
 硬化促進剤に含まれる化合物が、光学異性体が存在する場合、いずれの光学異性体を用いてもよい。また、1種の光学異性体を単独で用いても、複数の光学異性体を混合して用いてもよい。1種の光学異性体を主に用いる場合、その光学純度(ee)は90以上が好ましく、95以上がより好ましい。なお、下記に示す一般式(P1)~(P3)においても同様に、光学異性体が存在する場合、いずれの光学異性体が含まれてもよい。
[Curing accelerator]
The composition also preferably contains a curing accelerator.
The curing accelerator preferably contains at least one selected from the group consisting of the compound represented by the general formula (P1) and the compound represented by the general formula (P2), and is represented by the general formula (P3). It is more preferable to contain the above compounds.
When the compound contained in the curing accelerator has an optical isomer, any optical isomer may be used. Further, one kind of optical isomer may be used alone, or a plurality of optical isomers may be mixed and used. When one kind of optical isomer is mainly used, its optical purity (ee) is preferably 90 or more, more preferably 95 or more. Similarly, in the general formulas (P1) to (P3) shown below, when an optical isomer is present, any optical isomer may be contained.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000040
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000040
 一般式(P1)中、Lは、単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。
 上記2価の連結基としては、例えば、エーテル基(-O-)、カルボニル基(-CO-)、エステル基(-COO-)、チオエーテル基(-S-)、-SO-、-NR-(Rは、水素原子、又は、アルキル基)、2価の脂肪族炭化水素基(例えば、アルキレン基、シクロアルキレン基、アルケニレン基(-CH=CH-等)、アルキニレン基(-C≡C-等))、2価の芳香環基(アリーレン基、及び、ヘテロアリーレン基)、並びに、これらを組み合わせた基が挙げられる。上記2価の連結基は、更に置換基を有していてもよい。上記置換基としては、上記置換基群Yで例示される置換基が挙げられる。
 上記アリーレン基は、単環でも多環でもよく、炭素数は6~25が好ましい。
 上記アリーレン基としては、フェニレン基、ナフチレン基、アントラセニレン基又はビナフチレン基が好ましく、ビナフチレン基がより好ましい。
 Lとしては、2価の脂肪族炭化水素基又は2価の芳香環基が好ましく、アルキレン基又はアリーレン基がより好ましい。
In the general formula (P1), L p represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
Examples of the divalent linking group include an ether group (-O-), a carbonyl group (-CO-), an ester group (-COO-), a thioether group (-S-), -SO 2- , and -NR. -(R is a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group), a divalent aliphatic hydrocarbon group (for example, an alkylene group, a cycloalkylene group, an alkenylene group (-CH = CH-, etc.), an alkynylene group (-C≡C). -Etc.)), a divalent aromatic ring group (allylen group and a heteroarylene group), and a group combining these groups can be mentioned. The divalent linking group may further have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include the substituents exemplified in the above-mentioned Substituent Group Y.
The arylene group may be monocyclic or polycyclic, and preferably has 6 to 25 carbon atoms.
As the arylene group, a phenylene group, a naphthylene group, an anthrasenylene group or a binaphthylene group is preferable, and a binaphthylene group is more preferable.
As L p , a divalent aliphatic hydrocarbon group or a divalent aromatic ring group is preferable, and an alkylene group or an arylene group is more preferable.
 Rp11~Rp14は、それぞれ独立に、置換基を有していてもよいフェニル基を表す。
 上記置換基としては、上記置換基群Yで例示される置換基が挙げられ、アルキル基が好ましく、炭素数1~3の直鎖状又は分岐鎖状のアルキル基がより好ましい。
R p11 to R p14 each independently represent a phenyl group which may have a substituent.
Examples of the substituent include the substituents exemplified in the above-mentioned substituent group Y, preferably an alkyl group, and more preferably a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
 nは、0又は1を表す。nとしては、1が好ましい。 n p represents 0 or 1. As n p , 1 is preferable.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000041
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000041
 一般式(P2)中、Rp21~Rp24は、それぞれ独立に、置換基を有していてもよいフェニル基を表す。
 上記置換基としては、上記置換基群Yで例示される置換基が挙げられ、アルキル基が好ましく、炭素数1~3の直鎖状又は分岐鎖状のアルキル基がより好ましい。
In the general formula (P2), R p21 to R p24 each independently represent a phenyl group which may have a substituent.
Examples of the substituent include the substituents exemplified in the above-mentioned substituent group Y, preferably an alkyl group, and more preferably a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
 Xは、アニオンを表す。
 上記アニオンとしては、水酸化物イオン、フッ化物イオン、塩化物イオン、臭化物イオン、ヨウ化物イオン、ヘキサフルオロリン酸イオン、テトラフルオロホウ酸イオン、テトラフェニルホウ酸イオン、ジシアナミドイオン、アルキルリン酸イオン(例えば、ジエチルリン酸イオン等)、硫酸水素イオン、リン酸二水素イオン、リン酸水素イオン、スルファミン酸イオン、過塩素酸塩イオン、ベンゾトリアゾリドアニオン、テトラトリルボラートアニオン(例えば、テトラ-p-トリルボラートアニオン等)が挙げられる。
 上記アニオンとしては、テトラトリルボラートアニオンが好ましい。
X - represents an anion.
Examples of the anion include hydroxide ion, fluoride ion, chloride ion, bromide ion, iodide ion, hexafluorophosphate ion, tetrafluoroborate ion, tetraphenylborate ion, dicyanamide ion, and alkylphosphate. Ions (eg, diethyl phosphate ion, etc.), hydrogen sulfate ion, dihydrogen phosphate ion, hydrogen phosphate ion, sulfamate ion, perchlorate ion, benzotriazolide anion, tetratolylborate anion (eg, eg) Tetra-p-tolylborate anion, etc.) can be mentioned.
As the anion, a tetratrilborate anion is preferable.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000042
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000042
 一般式(P3)中、Rp31~Rp34は、それぞれ独立に、置換基を有していてもよいフェニル基を表す。
 上記置換基としては、上記置換基群Yで例示される置換基が挙げられ、アルキル基が好ましく、炭素数1~3の直鎖状又は分岐鎖状のアルキル基がより好ましい。
In the general formula (P3), R p31 to R p34 each independently represent a phenyl group which may have a substituent.
Examples of the substituent include the substituents exemplified in the above-mentioned substituent group Y, preferably an alkyl group, and more preferably a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
 硬化促進剤としては、例えば、トリスオルトトリルホスフィン、トリフェニルホスフィン、トリスパラトリルホスフィン、トリ-t-ブチルホスフィン、トリ-i-ブチルホスフィン、トリシクロヘキシルホスフィン、トリ-2-フリルホスフィン、ジシクロヘキシルフェニルホスフィン、ジt-ブチルフェニルホスフィン、1,2-ビス(ジフェニルホスフィノ)エタン、シス-1,2-ビス(ジフェニルホスフィノ)エチレン、1,3-ビス(ジフェニルホスフィノ)プロパン、1,4-ビス(ジフェニルホスフィノ)ブタン、1,5-ビス(ジフェニルホスフィノ)ペンタン、4-(ジフェニルホスフィノ)スチレン、2-(ジフェニルホスフィノ)安息香酸、4-(ジフェニルホスフィノ)安息香酸、、1,2-ビス(ジフェニルホスフィノ)ベンゼン、ビス[2-(ジフェニルホスフィノ)フェニル]エーテル、1,1’-ビス(ジフェニルホスフィノ)フェロセン(dppf)、BINAP(2,2’-ビス(ジフェニルホスフィノ)-1,1’-ビナフチル)、TolBINAP(2,2’-ビス[(4-メチルフェニル)ホスフィノ]-1,1’-ビナフチル)、XylBINAP(2,2’-ビス[(3,5-ジメチルフェニル)ホスフィノ]-1,1’-ビナフチル)、tBuBINAP(2,2’-ビス(ジ-p-t-ブチルフェニルホスフィノ)-1,1’-ビナフチル)、2,2’-ビス[(4-t-ブチルフェニル)ホスフィノ]-1,1’-ビナフチル、2,2’-ビス[(4-イソプロピルフェニル)ホスフィノ]-1,1’-ビナフチル、2,2’-ビス[(ナフタレン-1-イル)ホスフィノ]-1,1’-ビナフチル、2,2’-ビス[(ナフタレン-2-イル)ホスフィノ]-1,1’-ビナフチル、BICHEMP(2,2’-ビス(ジシクロヘキシルホスフィノ)-6,6’-ジメチル-1,1’-ビフェニル)、BPPFA(1-[1,2-ビス-(ジフェニルホスフィノ)フェロセニル]エチルアミン)、CHIRAPHOS(2,3-ビス(ジフェニルホスフィノ)ブタン)、CYCPHOS(1-シクロヘキシル-1,2-ビス(ジフェニルホスフィノ)エタン)、DEGPHOS(1-置換-3,4-ビス(ジフェニルホスフィノ)ピロリジン)、DIOP(2,3-イソプロピリデン-2,3-ジヒドロキシ-1,4-ビス(ジフェニルホスフィノ)ブタン)、SKEWPHOS(2,4-ビス(ジフェニルホスフィノ)ペンタン)、DuPHOS(置換-1,2-ビス(ホスホラノ)ベンゼン)、DIPAMP(1,2-ビス[(o-メトキシフェニル)フェニルホスフィノ]エタン)、NORPHOS(5,6-ビス(ジフェニルホスフィノ)-2-ノルボルネン)、PROPHOS(1,2-ビス(ジフェニルホスフィノ)プロパン)、PHANEPHOS(4,12-ビス(ジフェニルホスフィノ)-[2,2’]-パラシクロファン)、置換-2,2’-ビス(ジフェニルホスフィノ)-1,1’-ビピリジン、SEGPHOS((4,4’-ビス-1,3-ベンゾジオキソール)-5,5’-ジイル-ビス(ジフェニルホスフィノ))、及び、BIFAP(2,2’-ビス(ジフェニルホスファニル)-1,1’-ビジベンゾフラニル)等のリン原子を含む化合物が挙げられる。 Examples of the curing accelerator include trisorthotrilphosfin, triphenylphosphine, trispalatrilphosfin, tri-t-butylphosphin, tri-i-butylphosphin, tricyclohexylphosfin, tri-2-furylphosfin, and dicyclohexylphenylphosphine. , Dit-butylphenylphosphine, 1,2-bis (diphenylphosphino) ethane, cis-1,2-bis (diphenylphosphino) ethylene, 1,3-bis (diphenylphosphino) propane, 1,4- Bis (diphenylphosphino) butane, 1,5-bis (diphenylphosfino) pentan, 4- (diphenylphosfino) styrene, 2- (diphenylphosfino) benzoic acid, 4- (diphenylphosfino) benzoic acid ,, 1,2-bis (diphenylphosphino) benzene, bis [2- (diphenylphosphino) phenyl] ether, 1,1'-bis (diphenylphosphino) ferrocene (dppf), BINAP (2,2'-bis (2,2'-bis) Diphenylphosphino) -1,1'-binaphthyl), TolBINAP (2,2'-bis [(4-methylphenyl) phosphino] -1,1'-binaphthyl), XylBINAP (2,2'-bis [(3) , 5-Dimethylphenyl) phosphino] -1,1'-binaphthyl), tBuBINAP (2,2'-bis (di-pt-butylphenylphosphino) -1,1'-binaphthyl), 2,2' -Bis [(4-t-butylphenyl) phosphino] -1,1'-binaphthyl, 2,2'-bis [(4-isopropylphenyl) phosphino] -1,1'-binaphthyl, 2,2'-bis [(Naphthalen-1-yl) phosphino] -1,1'-binaphthyl, 2,2'-bis [(naphthalen-2-yl) phosphino] -1,1'-binaphthyl, BICHEMP (2,2'-bis) (Dicyclohexylphosphino) -6,6'-dimethyl-1,1'-biphenyl), BPPFA (1- [1,2-bis- (diphenylphosphino) ferrosenyl] ethylamine), CHIRAPHOS (2,3-bis (2,3-bis) Diphenylphosphino) butane), CYCPHOS (1-cyclohexyl-1,2-bis (diphenylphosphino) ethan), DEFPHOS (1-substituted-3,4-bis (diphenylphosphino) pyrrolidine), DIOP (2,3) -Isopropylidene-2,3-dihydroxy-1,4-bis (diphenylphosphino) butane) , SKEWPHOS (2,4-bis (diphenylphosphino) pentane), DuPHOS (substituted-1,2-bis (phosphorano) benzene), DIPAMP (1,2-bis [(o-methoxyphenyl) phenylphosphino] ethane) ), NORPHOS (5,6-bis (diphenylphosphino) -2-norbornene), PROPHOS (1,2-bis (diphenylphosphino) propane), PHANEPHOS (4,12-bis (diphenylphosphino)-[2 , 2'] -paracyclophane), substitution-2,2'-bis (diphenylphosphino) -1,1'-bipyridine, SEGPHOS ((4,4'-bis-1,3-benzodioxol)) -5,5'-Diyl-bis (diphenylphosphino)) and BIFAP (2,2'-bis (diphenylphosphanyl) -1,1'-bidibenzofuranyl) and other compounds containing phosphorus atoms Can be mentioned.
 硬化促進剤としては、例えば、テトラフェニルホスホニウムテトラフェニルボレート(TPP-K)、テトラフェニルホスホニウムテトラ-p-トリルボラート(TPP-MK)、テトラ-n-ブチルホスホニウムラウレート(TBP-LA)、ビス(テトラ-n-ブチルホスホニウム)ピロメリテート、及び、テトラフェニルホスホニウムのビス(ナフタレン-2,3-ジオキシ)フェニルシリケート付加物のような四級ホスホニウム系化合物(ホスホニウム塩)等のオニウム塩系硬化促進剤も挙げられる。 Examples of the curing accelerator include tetraphenylphosphonium tetraphenylborate (TPP-K), tetraphenylphosphonium tetra-p-tolylborate (TPP-MK), tetra-n-butylphosphonium laurate (TBP-LA), and bis ( Also onium salt-based curing accelerators such as tetra-n-butylphosphonium) pyromeritate and quaternary phosphonium compounds (phosphonium salts) such as bis (naphthalen-2,3-dioxy) phenylsilicate adducts of tetraphenylphosphonium. Can be mentioned.
 また、三フッ化ホウ素アミン錯体、及び、特開2012-067225号公報の段落0052に記載の化合物も挙げられる。
 その他にも、2-メチルイミダゾール(商品名;2MZ)、2-ウンデシルイミダゾール(商品名;C11-Z)、2-ヘプタデシルイミダゾール(商品名;C17Z)、1,2-ジメチルイミダゾール(商品名;1.2DMZ)、2-エチル-4-メチルイミダゾール(商品名;2E4MZ)、2-フェニルイミダゾール(商品名;2PZ)、2-フェニル-4-メチルイミダゾール(商品名;2P4MZ)、1-ベンジル-2-メチルイミダゾール(商品名;1B2MZ)、1-ベンジル-2-フェニルイミダゾール(商品名;1B2PZ)、1-シアノエチル-2-メチルイミダゾール(商品名;2MZ-CN)、1-シアノエチル-2-ウンデシルイミダゾール(商品名;C11Z-CN)、1-シアノエチル-2-フェニルイミダゾリウムトリメリテイト(商品名;2PZCNS-PW)、2,4-ジアミノ-6-[2’-メチルイミダゾリル-(1’)]-エチル-s-トリアジン(商品名;2MZ-A)、2,4-ジアミノ-6-[2’-ウンデシルイミダゾリル-(1’)]-エチル-s-トリアジン(商品名;C11Z-A)、2,4-ジアミノ-6-[2’-エチル-4’-メチルイミダゾリル-(1’)]-エチル-s-トリアジン(商品名;2E4MZ-A)、2,4-ジアミノ-6-[2’-メチルイミダゾリル-(1’)]-エチル-s-トリアジンイソシアヌル酸付加物(商品名;2MA-OK)、2-フェニル-4,5-ジヒドロキシメチルイミダゾール(商品名;2PHZ-PW)、2-フェニル-4-メチル-5-ヒドロキシメチルイミダゾール(商品名;2P4MHZ-PW)、1-シアノエチル-2-フェニルイミダゾール(商品名;2PZ-CN)、2,4-ジアミノ-6-[2’-メチルイミダゾリル-(1’)]-エチル-s-トリアジン(商品名;2MZA-PW)、及び、2,4-ジアミノ-6-[2’-メチルイミダゾリル-(1’)]-エチル-s-トリアジンイソシアヌル酸付加物(商品名;2MAOK-PW)等のイミダゾール系硬化促進剤等が挙げられる(いずれも四国化成工業(株)製)。更に、トリアリールホスフィン系の硬化促進剤として特開2004-043405号公報の段落0052に記載の化合物も挙げられる。トリアリールホスフィンにトリフェニルボランが付加したリン系硬化促進剤として、特開2014-005382号公報の段落0024に記載の化合物も挙げられる。
Further, a boron trifluoride amine complex and a compound described in paragraph 0052 of JP2012-06722A can also be mentioned.
In addition, 2-methylimidazole (trade name; 2MZ), 2-undecylimidazole (trade name; C11-Z), 2-heptadecylimidazole (trade name; C17Z), 1,2-dimethylimidazole (trade name). 1.2DMZ), 2-ethyl-4-methylimidazole (trade name; 2E4MZ), 2-phenylimidazole (trade name; 2PZ), 2-phenyl-4-methylimidazole (trade name; 2P4MZ), 1-benzyl -2-Methylimidazole (trade name; 1B2MZ), 1-benzyl-2-phenylimidazole (trade name; 1B2PZ), 1-cyanoethyl-2-methylimidazole (trade name; 2MZ-CN), 1-cyanoethyl-2- Undecylimidazole (trade name; C11Z-CN), 1-cyanoethyl-2-phenylimidazolium trimellitate (trade name: 2PZCNS-PW), 2,4-diamino-6- [2'-methylimidazolyl- (1'')]-Ethyl-s-triazine (trade name; 2MZ-A), 2,4-diamino-6- [2'-undecylimidazolyl- (1')]-ethyl-s-triazine (trade name; C11Z) -A), 2,4-diamino-6- [2'-ethyl-4'-methylimidazolyl- (1')]-ethyl-s-triazine (trade name; 2E4MZ-A), 2,4-diamino- 6- [2'-methylimidazolyl- (1')]-ethyl-s-triazine isocyanuric acid adduct (trade name; 2MA-OK), 2-phenyl-4,5-dihydroxymethylimidazole (trade name; 2PHZ-) PW), 2-phenyl-4-methyl-5-hydroxymethylimidazole (trade name; 2P4MHZ-PW), 1-cyanoethyl-2-phenylimidazole (trade name; 2PZ-CN), 2,4-diamino-6- [2'-Methylimidazolyl- (1')]-ethyl-s-triazine (trade name; 2MZA-PW) and 2,4-diamino-6- [2'-methylimidazolyl- (1')]- Examples thereof include imidazole-based curing accelerators such as ethyl-s-triazine isocyanuric acid adduct (trade name; 2MAOK-PW) (all manufactured by Shikoku Kasei Kogyo Co., Ltd.). Further, as a triarylphosphine-based curing accelerator, the compound described in paragraph 0052 of JP-A-2004-043405 can also be mentioned. Examples of the phosphorus-based curing accelerator to which triphenylborane is added to triarylphosphine include the compounds described in paragraph 0024 of JP-A-2014-005382.
 硬化促進剤の分子量は、200以上の場合が多く、250以上が好ましく、400以上がより好ましく、430以上が更に好ましく、600以上が特に好ましい。上限としては、1万以下が好ましく、1000以下がより好ましく、800以下が更に好ましい。
 硬化促進剤の分子量が250以上である場合、高温で加熱処理(例えば、実施例の欄におけるハンダ耐熱性IIの評価)を施した際に、硬化促進剤自体、及び/又は、硬化促進剤の熱分解物が揮散することをより抑制でき、ハンダ耐熱性がより優れる。また、硬化促進剤の分子量が1万以下である場合、硬化促進剤として機能しやすい。
The molecular weight of the curing accelerator is often 200 or more, preferably 250 or more, more preferably 400 or more, further preferably 430 or more, and particularly preferably 600 or more. The upper limit is preferably 10,000 or less, more preferably 1000 or less, and even more preferably 800 or less.
When the molecular weight of the curing accelerator is 250 or more, when heat treatment (for example, evaluation of solder heat resistance II in the column of Examples) is performed at a high temperature, the curing accelerator itself and / or the curing accelerator The volatilization of pyrolyzed products can be further suppressed, and the solder heat resistance is more excellent. Further, when the molecular weight of the curing accelerator is 10,000 or less, it easily functions as a curing accelerator.
 中でも、硬化促進剤は、本発明の効果がより優れる点から、リン原子を含む化合物を含むことが好ましく、ホスホニウム塩を含むことも好ましい。硬化促進剤は、リン原子を含む化合物又はホスホニウム塩そのものであってもよい。硬化促進剤としてホスホニウム塩を使用すると、組成物から形成された半硬化膜の保存安定性も良好になる。
 リン原子を含む化合物又はホスホニウム塩の含有量は、硬化促進剤の全質量に対して、10~100質量%が好ましく、50~100質量%がより好ましく、80~100質量%が更に好ましい。
Among them, the curing accelerator preferably contains a compound containing a phosphorus atom, and preferably contains a phosphonium salt, because the effect of the present invention is more excellent. The curing accelerator may be a compound containing a phosphorus atom or a phosphonium salt itself. When a phosphonium salt is used as a curing accelerator, the storage stability of the semi-cured film formed from the composition is also improved.
The content of the compound containing a phosphorus atom or the phosphonium salt is preferably 10 to 100% by mass, more preferably 50 to 100% by mass, still more preferably 80 to 100% by mass, based on the total mass of the curing accelerator.
 硬化促進剤は、1種単独で使用してもよく2種以上使用してもよい。
 硬化促進剤の含有量は、組成物の全固形分に対して、0.002質量%以上が好ましく、0.02質量%以上がより好ましく、0.07質量%以上が更に好ましい。硬化促進剤の含有量は、組成物の全固形分に対して、5質量%以下が好ましく、2質量%以下がより好ましく、1質量%以下が更に好ましい。
 硬化促進剤の含有量は、全エポキシ化合物に対して、0.01質量%以上が好ましく、0.10質量%以上がより好ましく、0.55質量%以上が更に好ましい。硬化促進剤の含有量は、全エポキシ化合物に対して、40質量%以下が好ましく、12質量%以下がより好ましく、10質量%以下が更に好ましく、5質量%以下が特に好ましい。
The curing accelerator may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
The content of the curing accelerator is preferably 0.002% by mass or more, more preferably 0.02% by mass or more, still more preferably 0.07% by mass or more, based on the total solid content of the composition. The content of the curing accelerator is preferably 5% by mass or less, more preferably 2% by mass or less, still more preferably 1% by mass or less, based on the total solid content of the composition.
The content of the curing accelerator is preferably 0.01% by mass or more, more preferably 0.10% by mass or more, still more preferably 0.55% by mass or more, based on the total epoxy compound. The content of the curing accelerator is preferably 40% by mass or less, more preferably 12% by mass or less, further preferably 10% by mass or less, and particularly preferably 5% by mass or less, based on the total epoxy compound.
〔イオン捕捉剤〕
 本発明の組成物は、イオン捕捉剤を含んでいてもよい。
 イオン捕捉剤は、組成物中又は組成物を用いて形成される熱伝導材料中においてイオン性の不純物を吸着する。これにより、組成物中又熱伝導材料が吸湿した場合でも、熱伝導材料の絶縁性をより良好に維持できる。
 イオン捕捉剤としては、例えば、上述したような無機系イオン捕捉剤、及び、有機系イオン捕捉剤が挙げられる。
 有機系イオン捕捉剤としては、例えば、トリアジンチオール化合物;トリアジンアミン化合物;ベンゾイミダゾール化合物;ベンゾトリアゾール化合物;アミノトリアゾール化合物;並びに、ビスフェノール系還元剤が挙げられる。
 なお、上述の無機物の全部又は一部が、イオン捕捉剤としての機能を兼ねていてもよい。
[Ion scavenger]
The composition of the present invention may contain an ion scavenger.
The ionic scavenger adsorbs ionic impurities in the composition or in the heat conductive material formed with the composition. Thereby, even when the heat conductive material absorbs moisture in the composition, the insulating property of the heat conductive material can be better maintained.
Examples of the ion scavenger include an inorganic ion scavenger as described above and an organic ion scavenger.
Examples of the organic ion scavenger include triazinethiol compounds; triazineamine compounds; benzoimidazole compounds; benzotriazole compounds; aminotriazole compounds; and bisphenol-based reducing agents.
In addition, all or a part of the above-mentioned inorganic substances may also function as an ion scavenger.
 トリアジンチオール化合物としては、例えば、2-ジブチルアミノ-4,6-ジメルカプト-s-トリアジンが挙げられる。
 ベンゾイミダゾール化合物としては、例えば、ベンゾイミダゾールが挙げられる。
 ベンゾトリアゾール化合物としては、例えば、1H-ベンゾトリアゾール、カルボキシベンゾトリアゾール、2-(2’-ヒドロキシ-5’-tert-オクチルフェニル)ベンゾトリアゾール、2-(2’-ヒドロキシ-5’-メチルフェニル)ベンゾトリアゾール、及び、2,2’-メチレンビス[6-(2H-ベンゾトリアゾール-2-イル)-4-tert-オクチルフェノール]が挙げられる。
 アミノトリアゾール化合物としては、例えば、3-アミノ-1,2,4-トリアゾール、及び、3,5-ジアミノ-1,2,4-トリアゾールが挙げられる。
 ビスフェノール系還元剤としては、例えば、2,2’-メチレンビス-(4-エチル-6-t-ブチルフェノール)、及び、4,4’-ブチリデンビス-(6-t-ブチル-3-メチルフェノール)が挙げられる。
Examples of the triazine thiol compound include 2-dibutylamino-4,6-dimercapto-s-triazine.
Examples of the benzimidazole compound include benzimidazole.
Examples of the benzotriazole compound include 1H-benzotriazole, carboxybenzotriazole, 2- (2'-hydroxy-5'-tert-octylphenyl) benzotriazole, 2- (2'-hydroxy-5'-methylphenyl). Benzotriazole and 2,2'-methylenebis [6- (2H-benzotriazole-2-yl) -4-tert-octylphenol] can be mentioned.
Examples of the aminotriazole compound include 3-amino-1,2,4-triazole and 3,5-diamino-1,2,4-triazole.
Examples of the bisphenol-based reducing agent include 2,2'-methylenebis- (4-ethyl-6-t-butylphenol) and 4,4'-butylidenebis- (6-t-butyl-3-methylphenol). Can be mentioned.
 イオン捕捉剤は市販品を用いてもよく、例えば、DHF-4A、DHT-4A、DHT-4A-2、DHT-4C、キョーワード500、KW-2000、及び、KW-2100(商品名、協和化学社製);IXE-100、IXE-500、IXE-600、IXE-700F、IXE-800、IXE-6107、IXEPLAS-A1、IXEPLAS-A2、及び、IXEPLAS-B1(商品名、東亞合成社製);ジスネットDB(商品名、三協製薬社製);VD-3、及び、VD-5(商品名、四国化成社製);並びに、ヨシノックスBB(商品名、吉富製薬社製)が挙げられる。 Commercially available products may be used as the ion scavenger, for example, DHF-4A, DHT-4A, DHT-4A-2, DHT-4C, Kyoward 500, KW-2000, and KW-2100 (trade name, Kyowa). IXE-100, IXE-500, IXE-600, IXE-700F, IXE-800, IXE-6107, IXEPLAS-A1, IXEPLAS-A2, and IXEPLAS-B1 (trade name, manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.) ); Gisnet DB (trade name, manufactured by Sankyo Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd.); VD-3 and VD-5 (trade name, manufactured by Shikoku Kasei Co., Ltd.); and Yoshinox BB (trade name, manufactured by Yoshitomi Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd.). ..
 組成物がイオン捕捉剤を含む場合、イオン捕捉剤(無機系イオン捕捉剤、及び/又は、有機系イオン捕捉剤)の含有量は、組成物の全固形分に対して、0.01~10質量%が好ましく、0.1~20質量%がより好ましく、0.2~10質量%が更に好ましい。
 なお、イオン捕捉剤が無機系イオン捕捉剤を含む場合、イオン捕捉剤の一部又は全部が同時に無機物に該当していてもよい。
 イオン捕捉剤は、1種単独で使用してもよく2種以上使用してもよい。
When the composition contains an ion scavenger, the content of the ion scavenger (inorganic ion scavenger and / or organic ion scavenger) is 0.01 to 10 with respect to the total solid content of the composition. The mass% is preferable, 0.1 to 20% by mass is more preferable, and 0.2 to 10% by mass is further preferable.
When the ion scavenger contains an inorganic ion scavenger, a part or all of the ion scavenger may be an inorganic substance at the same time.
The ion scavenger may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
〔溶媒〕
 組成物は、更に、溶媒を含んでいてもよい。
 溶媒の種類は特に制限されず、有機溶媒であるのが好ましい。有機溶媒としては、例えば、シクロペンタノン、シクロヘキサノン、酢酸エチル、メチルエチルケトン、ジクロロメタン、及び、テトラヒドロフラン等が挙げられる。
 組成物が溶媒を含む場合、溶媒の含有量は、組成物の固形分濃度を、20~90質量%とする量が好ましく、30~85質量%とする量がより好ましく、50~80質量%とする量が更に好ましい。
 溶媒の含有量は、組成物の全質量に対して、10~80質量%が好ましく、15~70質量%がより好ましく、20~50質量%が更に好ましい。
〔solvent〕
The composition may further contain a solvent.
The type of solvent is not particularly limited, and it is preferably an organic solvent. Examples of the organic solvent include cyclopentanone, cyclohexanone, ethyl acetate, methyl ethyl ketone, dichloromethane, tetrahydrofuran and the like.
When the composition contains a solvent, the content of the solvent is preferably 20 to 90% by mass, more preferably 30 to 85% by mass, and 50 to 80% by mass. Is more preferable.
The content of the solvent is preferably 10 to 80% by mass, more preferably 15 to 70% by mass, still more preferably 20 to 50% by mass, based on the total mass of the composition.
〔組成物の製造方法〕
 組成物の製造方法は特に制限されず、公知の方法を採用でき、例えば、上述した各種成分を混合して製造できる。混合する際には、各種成分を一括で混合しても、順次混合してもよい。
 成分を混合する方法に特に制限はなく、公知の方法を使用できる。混合に使用する混合装置は、液中分散機が好ましく、例えば、自転公転ミキサー、高速回転せん断型撹拌機等の撹拌機、コロイドミル、ロールミル、高圧噴射式分散機、超音波分散機、ビーズミル、及び、ホモジナイザーが挙げられる。混合装置は1種単独で使用してもよく、2種以上使用してもよい。混合の前後に、及び/又は、同時に、脱気処理を行ってもよい。
[Method for producing composition]
The method for producing the composition is not particularly limited, and a known method can be adopted. For example, the above-mentioned various components can be mixed and produced. When mixing, various components may be mixed all at once or sequentially.
The method of mixing the components is not particularly limited, and a known method can be used. The mixing device used for mixing is preferably a liquid disperser, for example, a stirrer such as a rotating revolution mixer, a high-speed rotary shear type stirrer, a colloid mill, a roll mill, a high-pressure injection disperser, an ultrasonic disperser, a bead mill, etc. And a homogenizer can be mentioned. The mixing device may be used alone or in combination of two or more. Degassing may be performed before, after, and / or at the same time as mixing.
〔組成物の硬化方法〕
 本発明の組成物は熱伝導材料形成用組成物であるのが好ましい。
 本発明の組成物を硬化処理して熱伝導材料が得られる。
 組成物の硬化方法は、特に制限されないが、熱硬化反応が好ましい。
 熱硬化反応の際の加熱温度は特に制限されない。例えば、50~250℃の範囲で適宜選択すればよい。また、熱硬化反応を行う際には、温度の異なる加熱処理を複数回にわたって実施してもよい。
 硬化処理は、フィルム状又はシート状とした組成物について行うのが好ましい。具体的には、例えば、組成物を塗布成膜し硬化反応を行えばよい。
 硬化処理を行う際は、基材上に組成物を塗布して塗膜を形成してから硬化させるのが好ましい。この際、基材上に形成した塗膜に、更に異なる基材を接触させてから硬化処理を行ってもよい。硬化後に得られた硬化物(熱伝導材料)は、基材の一方又は両方と分離してもよいし分離しなくてもよい。
 また、硬化処理を行う際に、別々の基材上に組成物を塗布して、それぞれ塗膜を形成し、得られた塗膜同士を接触させた状態で硬化処理を行ってもよい。硬化後に得られた硬化物(熱伝導材料)は、基材の一方又は両方と分離してもよいし分離しなくてもよい。
[Curing method of composition]
The composition of the present invention is preferably a composition for forming a heat conductive material.
The composition of the present invention is cured to obtain a heat conductive material.
The curing method of the composition is not particularly limited, but a thermosetting reaction is preferable.
The heating temperature during the thermosetting reaction is not particularly limited. For example, it may be appropriately selected in the range of 50 to 250 ° C. Further, when the thermosetting reaction is carried out, heat treatments having different temperatures may be carried out a plurality of times.
The curing treatment is preferably performed on a film-like or sheet-like composition. Specifically, for example, the composition may be applied to form a film and a curing reaction may be carried out.
When performing the curing treatment, it is preferable to apply the composition on the substrate to form a coating film and then cure. At this time, a different base material may be brought into contact with the coating film formed on the base material, and then the curing treatment may be performed. The cured product (heat conductive material) obtained after curing may or may not be separated from one or both of the substrates.
Further, when performing the curing treatment, the composition may be applied on different substrates to form coating films, and the curing treatment may be performed in a state where the obtained coating films are in contact with each other. The cured product (heat conductive material) obtained after curing may or may not be separated from one or both of the substrates.
 硬化処理は、組成物を半硬化状態にした時点で終了してもよい。また、組成物を半硬化状態にした後、更に硬化処理を実施して、硬化を完全にしてもよい。
 組成物を半硬化状態にするための硬化処理(「半硬化処理」ともいう)と、硬化を完全にするための硬化処理(「本硬化処理」ともいう)とを、別々の工程に分けて行ってもよい。
The curing treatment may be completed when the composition is in a semi-cured state. Further, after the composition is made into a semi-cured state, further curing treatment may be carried out to complete the curing.
The curing treatment for making the composition semi-cured (also referred to as "semi-cured treatment") and the curing treatment for completing the curing (also referred to as "main curing treatment") are divided into separate steps. You may go.
 例えば、半硬化処理では、基材上に組成物を塗布して塗膜を形成した後、そのまま無加圧で基材上の塗膜を加熱等して半硬化状態の熱伝導材料(「半硬化膜」又は「半硬化シート」ともいう)としてもよいし、プレス加工を併用しながら基材上の塗膜を加熱等して半硬化膜としてもよい。プレス加工をする場合、プレス加工は、上記加熱等の、前後に実施されてもよいし、最中に実施されてもよい。半硬化処理においてプレス加工を実施すると、得られる半硬化膜の膜厚の調整、及び/又は、半硬化膜中のボイド量の低減をしやすい場合がある。
 半硬化処理において、別々の基材上に形成した塗膜同士を積層させた状態で半硬化処理を行ってもよいし、塗膜同士を積層させずに半硬化処理を行ってもよい。半硬化処理は、組成物から形成された塗膜と、更に、上記塗膜以外の材料とを接触させた状態で実施してもよい。
For example, in the semi-curing treatment, a composition is applied onto a substrate to form a coating film, and then the coating film on the substrate is heated without pressure to form a semi-cured heat conductive material (“semi-cured”). It may be a "cured film" or a "semi-cured sheet"), or the coating film on the substrate may be heated or the like to form a semi-cured film while being pressed together. In the case of press working, the press working may be carried out before or after the above heating or the like, or may be carried out during the press working. When press working is performed in the semi-cured film, it may be easy to adjust the film thickness of the obtained semi-cured film and / or reduce the amount of voids in the semi-cured film.
In the semi-curing treatment, the semi-curing treatment may be performed in a state where the coating films formed on different substrates are laminated, or the semi-curing treatment may be performed without laminating the coating films. The semi-curing treatment may be carried out in a state where the coating film formed from the composition is further in contact with a material other than the coating film.
 得られた、半硬化膜を、そのまま熱伝導材料として使用してもよいし、半硬化膜に更に本硬化処理を施してから完全に硬化した熱伝導材料として使用してもよい。
 本硬化処理においては、半硬化膜を、そのまま無加圧で加熱等してもよいし、プレス加工を行ってから、又は、行いながら加熱等してもよい。この際、本硬化処理において、別々の半硬化膜同士を積層させた状態で本硬化処理を行ってもよいし、半硬化膜同士を積層させずに本硬化処理を行ってもよい。
 また、本硬化処理は、半硬化膜を、使用されるデバイス等に接触するように配置した状態で実施してもよい。本硬化処理によって、デバイスと本発明の熱伝導材料とが接着するのも好ましい。
The obtained semi-cured film may be used as it is as a heat conductive material, or may be used as a completely cured heat conductive material after the semi-cured film is further subjected to the main curing treatment.
In the main curing treatment, the semi-cured film may be heated as it is without pressure, or may be heated after being pressed or while being pressed. At this time, in the main curing treatment, the main curing treatment may be performed in a state where the separate semi-cured films are laminated, or the main curing treatment may be performed without laminating the semi-cured films.
Further, the main curing treatment may be carried out in a state where the semi-cured film is arranged so as to be in contact with the device or the like to be used. It is also preferable that the device and the heat conductive material of the present invention are adhered to each other by this curing treatment.
 半硬化処理及び/又は本硬化処理等における硬化処理の際に実施してもよいプレス加工に使用するプレスに制限はなく、例えば、平板プレスを使用してもよいしロールプレスを使用してもよい。
 ロールプレスを使用する場合は、例えば、基材上に塗膜を形成して得た塗膜付き基材を、2本のロールが対向する1対のロールに挟持し、上記1対のロールを回転させて上記塗膜付き基材を通過させながら、上記塗膜付き基材の膜厚方向に圧力を付加するのが好ましい。上記塗膜付き基材は、塗膜の片面にのみ基材が存在していてもよいし、塗膜の両面に基材が存在していてもよい。上記塗膜付き基材は、ロールプレスに1回だけ通過させてもよいし複数回通過させてもよい。
 半硬化処理及び/又は本硬化処理等における硬化処理の際に、平板プレスによる処理とロールプレスによる処理とは一方のみを実施してもよいし両方を実施してもよい。
There are no restrictions on the press used for the press working that may be performed during the semi-curing treatment and / or the curing treatment in the main curing treatment, and for example, a flat plate press may be used or a roll press may be used. good.
When a roll press is used, for example, a substrate with a coating film obtained by forming a coating film on the substrate is sandwiched between a pair of rolls in which two rolls face each other, and the above pair of rolls is used. It is preferable to apply pressure in the film thickness direction of the coated substrate while rotating the substrate to pass the coated substrate. In the above-mentioned base material with a coating film, the base material may be present on only one side of the coating film, or the base material may be present on both sides of the coating film. The substrate with a coating film may be passed through the roll press only once or may be passed a plurality of times.
In the semi-curing treatment and / or the curing treatment in the main curing treatment or the like, only one of the treatment by the flat plate press and the treatment by the roll press may be carried out, or both may be carried out.
 硬化反応を含む熱伝導材料の作製については、「高熱伝導性コンポジット材料」(シーエムシー出版、竹澤由高著)も参照できる。 For the production of heat conductive materials including curing reaction, refer to "High heat conductive composite material" (CMC Publishing, by Yutaka Takezawa).
 熱伝導材料の形状に特に制限はなく、用途に応じて様々な形状に成形できる。成形された熱伝導材料の典型的な形状としては、例えば、シート状が挙げられる。
 つまり、本発明の組成物を用いて得られる熱伝導材料は、熱伝導シートであるのも好ましい。
 また、本発明の組成物を用いて得られる熱伝導材料の熱伝導性は異方的ではなく等方的であるのが好ましい。
The shape of the heat conductive material is not particularly limited, and can be molded into various shapes depending on the application. A typical shape of the molded heat conductive material is, for example, a sheet shape.
That is, the heat conductive material obtained by using the composition of the present invention is preferably a heat conductive sheet.
Further, the thermal conductivity of the heat conductive material obtained by using the composition of the present invention is preferably isotropic rather than anisotropic.
 熱伝導材料(好ましくは熱伝導シート)は吸湿性が抑制されていることも好ましい。
 具体的には、熱伝導材料(好ましくは熱伝導シート)は、下記式で求められる質量変化率が、1.0%未満となることが好ましく、0.7%未満となることがより好ましく、0.5%未満となることが更に好ましい。上記質量変化率の下限は、通常0質量%以上である。
 W1:120℃の環境下で2時間乾燥させた後の乾燥状態の熱伝導材料(好ましくは熱伝導シート)の質量
 W2:前記乾燥状態の熱伝導材料(好ましくは熱伝導シート)を85℃、85RH%の環境下に24時間おいた後の、吸湿状態の熱伝導材料(好ましくは熱伝導シート)の質量
 なお、W1を求める際の120℃の環境下での乾燥は、十分に除湿された環境下で行うこととする。
It is also preferable that the heat conductive material (preferably a heat conductive sheet) has suppressed hygroscopicity.
Specifically, the heat conductive material (preferably a heat conductive sheet) preferably has a mass change rate of less than 1.0%, more preferably less than 0.7%, as determined by the following formula. It is more preferably less than 0.5%. The lower limit of the mass change rate is usually 0% by mass or more.
W1: Mass of the heat-conducting material (preferably a heat-conducting sheet) in a dry state after being dried in an environment of 120 ° C. for 2 hours W2: The heat-conducting material (preferably a heat-conducting sheet) in a dry state is 85 ° C. The mass of the heat-conducting material (preferably a heat-conducting sheet) in a moisture-absorbing state after being left in an environment of 85 RH% for 24 hours. Drying in an environment of 120 ° C. when determining W1 was sufficiently dehumidified. It will be done in the environment.
 熱伝導材料は、絶縁性(電気絶縁性)であるのが好ましい。言い換えると、本発明の組成物は、熱伝導性絶縁組成物であるのが好ましい。
 例えば、熱伝導材料の23℃相対湿度65%における体積抵抗率は、1010Ω・cm以上が好ましく、1012Ω・cm以上がより好ましく、1014Ω・cm以上が更に好ましい。上限は特に制限されないが、通常1018Ω・cm以下である。
The heat conductive material is preferably insulating (electrically insulating). In other words, the composition of the present invention is preferably a thermally conductive insulating composition.
For example, the volume resistivity of the heat conductive material at 23 ° C. and 65% relative humidity is preferably 10 10 Ω · cm or more, more preferably 10 12 Ω · cm or more, and even more preferably 10 14 Ω · cm or more. The upper limit is not particularly limited, but is usually 10 18 Ω · cm or less.
〔熱伝導材料の用途〕
 本発明の組成物を用いて得られる熱伝導材料は放熱シート等の放熱材として使用でき、各種デバイスの放熱用途に使用できる。より具体的には、デバイス上に本発明の熱伝導材料を含む熱伝導層を配置して熱伝導層付きデバイスを作製して、デバイスからの発熱を効率的に熱伝導層で放熱できる。上記熱伝導層は、後述する熱伝導性多層シート含む熱伝導層であってもよい。
 本発明の組成物を用いて得られる熱伝導材料は十分な熱伝導性を有するとともに、高い耐熱性を有しているため、パーソナルコンピュータ、一般家電、及び、自動車等の様々な電気機器に用いられているパワー半導体デバイスの放熱用途に適している。
 更に、本発明の組成物を用いて得られる熱伝導材料は、半硬化状態であっても十分な熱伝導性を有するため、各種装置の部材の隙間等の、光硬化のための光を到達させるのが困難な部位に配置する放熱材としても使用できる。また、接着性にも優れるため、熱伝導性を有する接着剤としての使用も可能である。
[Use of heat conductive materials]
The heat conductive material obtained by using the composition of the present invention can be used as a heat radiating material such as a heat radiating sheet, and can be used for heat radiating applications of various devices. More specifically, a device with a heat conductive layer can be produced by arranging a heat conductive layer containing the heat conductive material of the present invention on the device, and heat generated from the device can be efficiently dissipated by the heat conductive layer. The heat conductive layer may be a heat conductive layer including a heat conductive multilayer sheet described later.
Since the heat conductive material obtained by using the composition of the present invention has sufficient heat conductivity and high heat resistance, it is used for various electric devices such as personal computers, general household appliances, and automobiles. Suitable for heat dissipation of power semiconductor devices.
Further, since the heat conductive material obtained by using the composition of the present invention has sufficient heat conductivity even in a semi-cured state, it reaches light for photocuring such as gaps between members of various devices. It can also be used as a heat radiating material to be placed in areas where it is difficult to make it. In addition, since it has excellent adhesiveness, it can also be used as an adhesive having thermal conductivity.
 本発明の組成物を用いて得られる熱伝導材料は、本組成物から形成される部材以外の、他の部材と組み合わせて使用されてもよい。
 例えば、熱伝導材料(熱伝導シート等)は、本組成物から形成された層の他の、支持体(被着材)と組み合わせられていてもよい。
 支持体(被着材)としては、例えば、プラスチック材料、金属材料、又は、ガラスが挙げられる。プラスチック材料としては、例えば、ポリエチレンテレフタレート(PET)等のポリエステル、ポリカーボネート、アクリル樹脂、エポキシ樹脂、ポリウレタン、ポリアミド、ポリオレフィン、セルロース誘導体、及び、シリコーンが挙げられる。金属材料としては、例えば、銅及びアルミが挙げられる。
 支持体(被着材)は、シート状であることも好ましい。
 シート状の熱伝導材料(熱伝導シート)の膜厚は、100~300μmが好ましく、150~250μmがより好ましい。
The heat conductive material obtained by using the composition of the present invention may be used in combination with other members other than the members formed from the present composition.
For example, the heat conductive material (heat conductive sheet or the like) may be combined with a support (adhesion material) other than the layer formed from the present composition.
Examples of the support (adhesive material) include a plastic material, a metal material, and glass. Examples of the plastic material include polyester such as polyethylene terephthalate (PET), polycarbonate, acrylic resin, epoxy resin, polyurethane, polyamide, polyolefin, cellulose derivative, and silicone. Examples of the metal material include copper and aluminum.
The support (adhesive material) is also preferably in the form of a sheet.
The film thickness of the sheet-shaped heat conductive material (heat conductive sheet) is preferably 100 to 300 μm, more preferably 150 to 250 μm.
 また、熱伝導材料(好ましくは熱伝導シート)に対して、接着剤層及び/又は粘着剤層を組み合わせてもよい。
 このような接着剤層及び/又は粘着剤層を介して、熱伝導材料をデバイスのような熱を移動させるべき対象物と接合することで、熱伝導材料と対象物との、より強固な接合を実現できる。本発明の組成物から形成される熱伝導材料は、接着剤層及び粘着剤層との密着性も良好で、熱伝導材料と接着剤層又は粘着剤層との界面における剥離も抑制できる。
 例えば、熱伝導性多層シートとして、熱伝導シートと、上記熱伝導シートの片面又は両面に設けられた、接着剤層又は粘着剤層と、を有する、熱伝導性多層シートを作製してもよい。
 なお、上記熱伝導シートの片面又は両面には、それぞれ接着剤層及び粘着剤層の一方が設けられていてもよく、両方が設けられていてもよい。上記熱伝導シートの一面に接着剤層が設けられていて、他の面に粘着剤層が設けられていてもよい。また、上記熱伝導シートの片面又は両面には、接着剤層及び/又は粘着剤層が部分的に設けられていてもよく、全面的に設けられていてもよい。
 なお、上述の通り、本発明において熱伝導シート等の熱伝導材料は半硬化状態(半硬化膜)であってもよく、熱伝導性多層シートにおける熱伝導シートが半硬化状態であってもよい。熱伝導性多層シートにおける接着剤層は硬化していてもよく半硬化状態であってもよく未硬化状態であってもよい。
Further, an adhesive layer and / or an adhesive layer may be combined with the heat conductive material (preferably a heat conductive sheet).
By bonding the heat conductive material to an object such as a device to which heat should be transferred through such an adhesive layer and / or an adhesive layer, a stronger bond between the heat conductive material and the object is performed. Can be realized. The heat conductive material formed from the composition of the present invention has good adhesion to the adhesive layer and the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer, and can suppress peeling at the interface between the heat conductive material and the adhesive layer or the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer.
For example, as the heat conductive multilayer sheet, a heat conductive multilayer sheet having a heat conductive sheet and an adhesive layer or an adhesive layer provided on one side or both sides of the heat conductive sheet may be produced. ..
In addition, one of the adhesive layer and the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer may be provided on one side or both sides of the heat conductive sheet, respectively, or both may be provided. An adhesive layer may be provided on one surface of the heat conductive sheet, and an adhesive layer may be provided on the other surface. Further, the adhesive layer and / or the adhesive layer may be partially provided on one side or both sides of the heat conductive sheet, or may be provided on the entire surface.
As described above, in the present invention, the heat conductive material such as the heat conductive sheet may be in a semi-cured state (semi-cured film), and the heat conductive sheet in the heat conductive multilayer sheet may be in a semi-cured state. .. The adhesive layer in the heat conductive multilayer sheet may be in a cured state, a semi-cured state, or an uncured state.
 以下に実施例に基づいて本発明を更に詳細に説明する。以下の実施例に示す材料、使用量、割合、処理内容、及び、処理手順等は、本発明の趣旨を逸脱しない限り適宜変更できる。したがって、本発明の範囲は以下に示す実施例により限定的に解釈されるべきではない。 The present invention will be described in more detail below based on examples. The materials, amounts, ratios, treatment contents, treatment procedures, etc. shown in the following examples can be appropriately changed as long as they do not deviate from the gist of the present invention. Therefore, the scope of the invention should not be construed as limiting by the examples shown below.
<<試験X>>
 以下に示す通り条件及び手順等に基づき、まず、試験X(実施例1~75、比較例1~2)を実施した。
<< Test X >>
First, Test X (Examples 1 to 75, Comparative Examples 1 and 2) was carried out based on the conditions and procedures as shown below.
[組成物の調製及び評価]
〔各種成分〕
 以下に、実施例及び比較例で使用した各種成分を示す。
 なお、以下には、後述する試験Yで使用されるための成分も示す。
[Preparation and evaluation of composition]
[Various ingredients]
The various components used in Examples and Comparative Examples are shown below.
In addition, the components to be used in the test Y described later are also shown below.
<フェノール化合物>
 以下に、実施例及び比較例で使用したフェノール化合物を示す。
<Phenol compound>
The phenolic compounds used in Examples and Comparative Examples are shown below.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000043
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000043
・A-3:MEH-7500(明和化成製、トリアジン骨格を有さないフェノール化合物) -A-3: MEH-7500 (Phenolic compound manufactured by Meiwa Kasei, which does not have a triazine skeleton)
<エポキシ化合物>
 以下に、実施例及び比較例で使用したエポキシ化合物を示す。
 B-8の重量平均分子量は3000であり、B-9のnの値の平均値は10である。
<Epoxy compound>
The epoxy compounds used in Examples and Comparative Examples are shown below.
The weight average molecular weight of B-8 is 3000, and the average value of n values of B-9 is 10.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000044
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000044
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000045
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000045
<マレイミド化合物>
 以下に、実施例及び比較例で使用したマレイミド化合物を示す。
<Maleimide compound>
The maleimide compounds used in Examples and Comparative Examples are shown below.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000046
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000046
<シアネート化合物>
 以下に、実施例及び比較例で使用したシアネート化合物を示す。
・G-1:TA(三菱ガス化学社製、2,2’-ジ(4-シアナトフェニル)プロパン)
・G-2:TA-100(三菱ガス化学社製、2,2’-ジ(4-シアナトフェニル)プロパンの予備重合品)
・G-3: AROCY XU371(HUNSMAN社製、フェノールノボラックシアネート)
・G-4:P-201(三菱ガス化学社製)
<Cyanate compound>
The cyanate compounds used in Examples and Comparative Examples are shown below.
-G-1: TA (manufactured by Mitsubishi Gas Chemical Company, 2,2'-di (4-cyanatophenyl) propane)
G-2: TA-100 (pre-polymerized product of 2,2'-di (4-cyanatophenyl) propane manufactured by Mitsubishi Gas Chemical Company, Inc.)
-G-3: AROCY XU371 (manufactured by HUNSMAN, phenol novolac cyanate)
・ G-4: P-201 (manufactured by Mitsubishi Gas Chemical Company)
<無機窒化物、無機酸化物、又は、その表面修飾物>
 以下に、実施例及び比較例で使用した無機窒化物、無機酸化物、又は、その表面修飾物(表面修飾無機窒化物若しくは表面修飾無機酸化物)を示す。なお、いずれの表面修飾物(表面修飾無機窒化物若しくは表面修飾無機酸化物)においても、その表面修飾物の全質量に対する表面修飾剤の含有量は、0質量%超1質量%未満であった。
・HP-40:凝集状窒化ホウ素、平均粒径:40μm、水島合金鉄社製
・AA-3:酸化アルミニウム、平均粒径:3μm、住友化学社製
・PTX-60:凝集状窒化ホウ素、平均粒径:60μm、モメンティブ社製
・SP-3:鱗片状窒化ホウ素、平均粒径:4μm、デンカ社製
・BN1:下記に示す製造方法1で製造された表面修飾窒化ホウ素
・BN2:下記に示す製造方法2で製造された表面修飾窒化ホウ素
・BN3:下記に示す製造方法3で製造された表面修飾窒化ホウ素
・BN4:下記に示す製造方法4で製造された表面修飾窒化ホウ素
・BN5:下記に示す製造方法5で製造された表面修飾窒化ホウ素
・BN6:下記に示す製造方法6で製造された表面修飾窒化ホウ素
・BN7:下記に示す製造方法7で製造された表面修飾窒化ホウ素
・BN8:下記に示す製造方法8で製造された表面修飾窒化ホウ素
・BN9:下記に示す製造方法9で製造された表面修飾窒化ホウ素
・BN10:下記に示す製造方法10で製造された表面修飾窒化ホウ素
<Inorganic nitride, inorganic oxide, or its surface modifier>
The following shows the inorganic nitrides, inorganic oxides, or surface-modified products thereof (surface-modified inorganic nitrides or surface-modified inorganic oxides) used in Examples and Comparative Examples. In any of the surface-modified products (surface-modified inorganic nitride or surface-modified inorganic oxide), the content of the surface-modifying agent with respect to the total mass of the surface-modified product was more than 0% by mass and less than 1% by mass. ..
-HP-40: Aggregate boron nitride, average particle size: 40 μm, manufactured by Mizushima Alloy Iron Co., Ltd.-AA-3: Aluminum oxide, average particle size: 3 μm, manufactured by Sumitomo Chemical Co., Ltd.-PTX-60: Aggregate boron nitride, average Particle size: 60 μm, Momentive, SP-3: scaly boron nitride, average particle size: 4 μm, Denka, BN1: Surface-modified boron nitride produced by the production method 1 shown below, BN2: shown below. Surface-modified Boron Nitride / BN3 manufactured by Production Method 2: Surface-Modified Boron Nitride / BN4 manufactured by Production Method 3 shown below: Surface-Modified Boron Nitride / BN5 manufactured by Production Method 4 shown below: Surface-modified Boron Nitride / BN6 manufactured by the manufacturing method 5 shown below: Surface-modified boron nitride manufactured by the manufacturing method 6 shown below / BN7: Surface-modified boron nitride manufactured by the manufacturing method 7 shown below / BN8: The following Surface-modified boron nitride produced by the production method 8 shown in BN9: Surface-modified boron nitride produced by the production method 9 shown below BN10: Surface-modified boron nitride produced by the production method 10 shown below.
(製造方法1(BN1の製造))
 NaOH水(NaOH:40g/水:400ml)に窒化ホウ素(上述のPTX-60)(50g)を添加して攪拌した。上記NaOH水に、更に、過硫酸ナトリウム水(過硫酸ナトリウム:9.6g/水:100ml)を添加した後、上記NaOH水を50℃に昇温し、更に3時間攪拌した(変性工程)。攪拌には新東科学株式会社製スリーワンモーターを用い、150rpmで行った。
 上記NaOH水を室温まで冷却した後、上記NaOH水中の窒化ホウ素をろ取し、ろ取された窒化ホウ素を、水(500ml)、及び、アセトニトリル(250ml)で洗浄することで変性窒化ホウ素1を得た。
 得られた変性窒化ホウ素1をアセトニトリル(100ml)中で攪拌し、上記アセトニトリル中に更に、シランカップリング剤(信越化学社製:X12-984S)の加水分解調整液(1.25g)を添加した。上記アセトニトリルを室温で3時間攪拌して、吸着処理を行った(吸着工程)。
 上記アセトニトリル中の変性窒化ホウ素1をろ取した後、ろ取された変性窒化ホウ素1をアセトニトリル(100ml)で洗浄し、40℃のオーブンで乾燥させることで、表面修飾窒化ホウ素1(「BN1」ともいう)を得た。
 なお、シランカップリング剤の加水分解調整液は、シランカップリング剤(1g)と、エタノール(500μl)、2-プロパノール(500μl)、水(720μl)、酢酸(100μl)を混合し、1時間攪拌することで調整した。以降の製造方法においても、シランカップリング剤の加水分解調整液の配合は、特段の断りがない限り、同様である。
 また、「X12-984S」は、エポキシ基及びエトキシシリル基を有する、ポリマータイプのシランカップリング剤である。
 なお、製造方法1において、NaOH水(NaOH:40g/水:400ml)、窒化ホウ素50g、及び、過硫酸ナトリウム水(過硫酸ナトリウム:9.6g/水:100ml)が混合された液(水溶液)のpHは14だった。
(Manufacturing method 1 (Manufacturing of BN1))
Boron nitride (PTX-60) (50 g) was added to NaOH water (NaOH: 40 g / water: 400 ml) and stirred. After further adding sodium persulfate water (sodium persulfate: 9.6 g / water: 100 ml) to the NaOH water, the temperature of the NaOH water was raised to 50 ° C., and the mixture was further stirred for 3 hours (modification step). A three-one motor manufactured by Shinto Kagaku Co., Ltd. was used for stirring, and the stirring was performed at 150 rpm.
After cooling the NaOH water to room temperature, the boron nitride in the NaOH water is collected by filtration, and the collected boron nitride is washed with water (500 ml) and acetonitrile (250 ml) to obtain modified boron nitride 1. Obtained.
The obtained modified boron nitride 1 was stirred in acetonitrile (100 ml), and a hydrolysis adjusting solution (1.25 g) of a silane coupling agent (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd .: X12-984S) was further added to the acetonitrile. .. The acetonitrile was stirred at room temperature for 3 hours to perform an adsorption treatment (adsorption step).
After the modified boron nitride 1 in acetonitrile is collected by filtration, the removed modified boron nitride 1 is washed with acetonitrile (100 ml) and dried in an oven at 40 ° C. to obtain surface-modified boron nitride 1 (“BN1”). Also called).
The hydrolysis adjustment solution for the silane coupling agent is a mixture of silane coupling agent (1 g), ethanol (500 μl), 2-propanol (500 μl), water (720 μl), and acetic acid (100 μl), and the mixture is stirred for 1 hour. Adjusted by doing. In the subsequent production methods, the formulation of the hydrolysis adjusting solution of the silane coupling agent is the same unless otherwise specified.
Further, "X12-984S" is a polymer type silane coupling agent having an epoxy group and an ethoxysilyl group.
In the production method 1, a liquid (aqueous solution) in which NaOH water (NaOH: 40 g / water: 400 ml), boron nitride 50 g, and sodium persulfate water (sodium persulfate: 9.6 g / water: 100 ml) are mixed. The pH of was 14.
(製造方法2(BN2の製造))
 水(400ml)に窒化ホウ素(上述のPTX-60)(50g)を添加して攪拌して混合液を得た。上記混合液に更に30質量%過酸化水素水(30ml)を添加した後、上記混合液を50℃に昇温し、更に3時間攪拌した。攪拌には新東科学株式会社製スリーワンモーターを用い、150rpmで行った。
 上記混合液を室温まで冷却した後、上記混合液中の窒化ホウ素をろ取し、ろ取された窒化ホウ素を、水(500ml)、及び、アセトニトリル(250ml)で洗浄し、変性窒化ホウ素を得た。
 得られた変性窒化ホウ素をアセトニトリル(100ml)中で攪拌し、上記アセトニトリル中に更に、シランカップリング剤(KBM-403)の加水分解調整液(1.25g)を添加した。上記アセトニトリルを室温で3時間攪拌して、吸着処理を行った。
 上記アセトニトリル中の変性窒化ホウ素をろ取した後、ろ取された変性窒化ホウ素を、アセトニトリル(100ml)で洗浄し、40℃のオーブンで乾燥させることで、表面修飾窒化ホウ素2(「BN2」ともいう)を得た。
 なお、「KBM-403」は3-グリシドキシプロピルトリメトキシシランである。
 なお、製造方法2において、水(400ml)、窒化ホウ素50g、及び、30質量%過酸化水素水(30ml)が混合された液(水溶液)のpHは5だった。
(Manufacturing method 2 (Manufacturing of BN2))
Boron nitride (PTX-60 described above) (50 g) was added to water (400 ml) and stirred to obtain a mixed solution. After further adding 30% by mass hydrogen peroxide solution (30 ml) to the mixed solution, the temperature of the mixed solution was raised to 50 ° C., and the mixture was further stirred for 3 hours. A three-one motor manufactured by Shinto Kagaku Co., Ltd. was used for stirring, and the stirring was performed at 150 rpm.
After cooling the mixed solution to room temperature, the boron nitride in the mixed solution is collected by filtration, and the collected boron nitride is washed with water (500 ml) and acetonitrile (250 ml) to obtain modified boron nitride. rice field.
The obtained modified boron nitride was stirred in acetonitrile (100 ml), and a hydrolysis adjusting solution (1.25 g) of a silane coupling agent (KBM-403) was further added to the acetonitrile. The acetonitrile was stirred at room temperature for 3 hours for adsorption treatment.
After the modified boron nitride in acetonitrile is collected by filtration, the removed modified boron nitride is washed with acetonitrile (100 ml) and dried in an oven at 40 ° C. to obtain surface-modified boron nitride 2 (also referred to as "BN2"). I got).
In addition, "KBM-403" is 3-glycidoxypropyltrimethoxysilane.
In the production method 2, the pH of the liquid (aqueous solution) in which water (400 ml), 50 g of boron nitride, and 30 mass% hydrogen peroxide solution (30 ml) was mixed was 5.
(製造方法3(BN3の製造))
 製造方法1のNaOH水を(NaOH:0.02g/水:400ml)に変更した以外は製造方法1と同様の製法で表面修飾窒化ホウ素3(「BN3」ともいう)を得た。
 なお、製造方法3において、NaOH水(NaOH:0.02g/水:400ml)、窒化ホウ素50g、及び、過硫酸ナトリウム水(過硫酸ナトリウム:9.6g/水:100ml)が混合された液(水溶液)のpHは11だった。
(Manufacturing method 3 (Manufacturing of BN3))
Surface-modified boron nitride 3 (also referred to as "BN3") was obtained by the same production method as in Production Method 1 except that the NaOH water in Production Method 1 was changed to (NaOH: 0.02 g / water: 400 ml).
In the production method 3, a liquid (NaOH: 0.02 g / water: 400 ml) mixed with NaOH water (NaOH: 0.02 g / water: 400 ml), 50 g of boron nitride, and sodium persulfate water (sodium persulfate: 9.6 g / water: 100 ml) ( The pH of the aqueous solution) was 11.
(製造方法4(BN4の製造))
 酸化雰囲気中で、窒化ホウ素(上述のPTX-60)(50g)を1000℃で1時間加熱して変性窒化ホウ素を得た。
 得られた変性窒化ホウ素をアセトニトリル(100ml)中で攪拌し、上記アセトニトリル中に更に、シランカップリング剤(KBM-403)の加水分解調整液(1.25g)を添加した。上記アセトニトリルを室温で3時間攪拌して、吸着処理を行った。
 上記アセトニトリル中の変性窒化ホウ素をろ取した後、ろ取された変性窒化ホウ素を、アセトニトリル(100ml)で洗浄し、40℃のオーブンで乾燥させることで、表面修飾窒化ホウ素4(「BN4」ともいう)を得た。
(Manufacturing method 4 (Manufacturing of BN4))
Boron nitride (PTX-60 described above) (50 g) was heated at 1000 ° C. for 1 hour in an oxidizing atmosphere to obtain modified boron nitride.
The obtained modified boron nitride was stirred in acetonitrile (100 ml), and a hydrolysis adjusting solution (1.25 g) of a silane coupling agent (KBM-403) was further added to the acetonitrile. The acetonitrile was stirred at room temperature for 3 hours for adsorption treatment.
After the modified boron nitride in acetonitrile is collected by filtration, the removed modified boron nitride is washed with acetonitrile (100 ml) and dried in an oven at 40 ° C. to obtain surface-modified boron nitride 4 (also referred to as "BN4"). I got).
(製造方法5(BN5の製造))
 窒化ホウ素(上述のPTX-60)(50g)をアセトニトリル(100ml)中で攪拌し、上記アセトニトリル中に更に、シランカップリング剤(KBM-403)の加水分解調整液(1.25g)を添加した。上記アセトニトリルを室温で3時間攪拌して、吸着処理を行った。
 上記アセトニトリル中の窒化ホウ素をろ取した後、ろ取された窒化ホウ素を、アセトニトリル(100ml)で洗浄し、40℃のオーブンで乾燥させることで、表面修飾窒化ホウ素5(「BN5」ともいう)を得た。
(Manufacturing method 5 (Manufacturing of BN5))
Boron nitride (PTX-60, described above) (50 g) was stirred in acetonitrile (100 ml), and a hydrolysis adjusting solution (1.25 g) of a silane coupling agent (KBM-403) was further added to the acetonitrile. .. The acetonitrile was stirred at room temperature for 3 hours for adsorption treatment.
After the boron nitride in acetonitrile is collected by filtration, the collected boron nitride is washed with acetonitrile (100 ml) and dried in an oven at 40 ° C. to obtain surface-modified boron nitride 5 (also referred to as “BN5”). Got
(製造方法6(BN6の製造))
 窒化ホウ素(上述のHP-40)(15g)に対し、プラズクリーナーPDC210(ヤマト科学社製)を用いて、真空プラズマ処理(ガス種:O、圧力:30Pa、出力:500W)を行った。真空プラズマ処理を5分行うごとに、処理対象の窒化ホウ素を撹拌し、合計処理時間が30分になるまで真空プラズマ処理を行い、変性窒化ホウ素粒子を得た。
 得られた変性窒化ホウ素をアセトニトリル(30ml)中で攪拌し、上記アセトニトリル中に更に、シランカップリング剤(信越化学工業社製:X12-984S)の加水分解調整液(0.42g)を添加した。上記アセトニトリルを室温で3時間攪拌して、吸着処理を行った。
 上記アセトニトリル中の変性窒化ホウ素をろ取した後、ろ取された変性窒化ホウ素をアセトニトリル(30ml)で洗浄し、40℃のオーブンで乾燥させることで、表面修飾窒化ホウ素6(「BN6」ともいう)を得た。
 また、「X12-984S」は、エポキシ基及びエトキシシリル基を有する、ポリマータイプのシランカップリング剤である。
(Manufacturing method 6 (Manufacturing of BN6))
Boron nitride (HP-40 above) (15 g) was subjected to vacuum plasma treatment (gas type: O 2 , pressure: 30 Pa, output: 500 W) using Plascleaner PDC210 (manufactured by Yamato Scientific Co., Ltd.). Boron nitride to be treated was stirred every 5 minutes of vacuum plasma treatment, and vacuum plasma treatment was performed until the total treatment time reached 30 minutes to obtain modified boron nitride particles.
The obtained modified boron nitride was stirred in acetonitrile (30 ml), and a hydrolysis adjusting solution (0.42 g) of a silane coupling agent (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd .: X12-984S) was further added to the acetonitrile. .. The acetonitrile was stirred at room temperature for 3 hours for adsorption treatment.
After the modified boron nitride in acetonitrile is collected by filtration, the removed modified boron nitride is washed with acetonitrile (30 ml) and dried in an oven at 40 ° C. to obtain surface-modified boron nitride 6 (also referred to as "BN6"). ) Was obtained.
Further, "X12-984S" is a polymer type silane coupling agent having an epoxy group and an ethoxysilyl group.
(製造方法7(BN7の製造))
 NaOH水溶液(NaOH:40g/水:400ml)に、窒化ホウ素(上述のHP-40、50g)を添加して攪拌した。上記NaOH水溶液に、更に、過硫酸ナトリウム水(過硫酸ナトリウム:9.6g/水:100ml)を添加した後、上記NaOH水溶液を50℃に昇温し、更に3時間攪拌した。攪拌には、スリーワンモーター(新東科学社製)を用いて回転数150rpmで行った。上記NaOH水溶液を室温まで冷却した後、上記NaOH水溶液中の窒化ホウ素をろ取し、ろ取された窒化ホウ素を、水(500ml)、及び、アセトニトリル(250ml)で洗浄することで変性窒化ホウ素を得た。
 得られた変性窒化ホウ素をアセトニトリル(100ml)中で攪拌し、上記アセトニトリル中に更に、シランカップリング剤(信越化学工業社製:X12-984S)の加水分解調整液(1.25g)を添加した。上記アセトニトリルを室温で3時間攪拌して、吸着処理を行った。上記アセトニトリル中の変性窒化ホウ素をろ取した後、ろ取された変性窒化ホウをアセトニトリル(100ml)で洗浄し、40℃のオーブンで乾燥させることで、表面修飾窒化ホウ素7(「BN7」ともいう)を得た。
(Manufacturing method 7 (Manufacturing of BN7))
Boron nitride (HP-40, 50 g described above) was added to an aqueous NaOH solution (NaOH: 40 g / water: 400 ml) and stirred. After further adding sodium persulfate water (sodium persulfate: 9.6 g / water: 100 ml) to the above NaOH aqueous solution, the temperature of the NaOH aqueous solution was raised to 50 ° C., and the mixture was further stirred for 3 hours. Stirring was performed using a three-one motor (manufactured by Shinto Kagaku Co., Ltd.) at a rotation speed of 150 rpm. After cooling the aqueous NaOH solution to room temperature, the boron nitride in the aqueous NaOH solution is collected by filtration, and the collected boron nitride is washed with water (500 ml) and acetonitrile (250 ml) to obtain modified boron nitride. Obtained.
The obtained modified boron nitride was stirred in acetonitrile (100 ml), and a hydrolysis adjusting solution (1.25 g) of a silane coupling agent (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd .: X12-984S) was further added to the acetonitrile. .. The acetonitrile was stirred at room temperature for 3 hours for adsorption treatment. After the modified boron nitride in acetonitrile is collected by filtration, the removed modified boron nitride is washed with acetonitrile (100 ml) and dried in an oven at 40 ° C. to obtain surface-modified boron nitride 7 (also referred to as "BN7"). ) Was obtained.
(製造方法8(BN8の製造))
 水(400ml)に窒化ホウ素(上述のHP-40、50g)を添加して攪拌して混合液を得た。上記混合液に更に次亜塩素酸ナトリウム水(次亜塩素酸ナトリウム5水和物:48g/水:100ml)を添加した後、上記混合液を50℃に昇温し、更に3時間攪拌した。攪拌には新東科学株式会社製スリーワンモーターを用い、150rpmで行った。
 上記混合液を室温まで冷却した後、上記混合液中の窒化ホウ素をろ取し、ろ取された窒化ホウ素を、水(500ml)、及び、アセトニトリル(250ml)で洗浄し、変性窒化ホウ素を得た。
 得られた変性窒化ホウ素をアセトニトリル(100ml)中で攪拌し、上記アセトニトリル中に更に、シランカップリング剤(信越化学工業社製:X12-984S)の加水分解調整液(1.25g)を添加した。上記アセトニトリルを室温で3時間攪拌して、吸着処理を行った。上記アセトニトリル中の変性窒化ホウ素をろ取した後、ろ取された変性窒化ホウ素を、アセトニトリル(100ml)で洗浄し、40℃のオーブンで乾燥させることで、表面修飾窒化ホウ素8(「BN8」ともいう)を得た。
(Manufacturing method 8 (Manufacturing of BN8))
Boron nitride (HP-40, 50 g described above) was added to water (400 ml) and stirred to obtain a mixed solution. Sodium hypochlorite water (sodium hypochlorite pentahydrate: 48 g / water: 100 ml) was further added to the mixed solution, the temperature of the mixed solution was raised to 50 ° C., and the mixture was further stirred for 3 hours. A three-one motor manufactured by Shinto Kagaku Co., Ltd. was used for stirring, and the stirring was performed at 150 rpm.
After cooling the mixed solution to room temperature, the boron nitride in the mixed solution is collected by filtration, and the collected boron nitride is washed with water (500 ml) and acetonitrile (250 ml) to obtain modified boron nitride. rice field.
The obtained modified boron nitride was stirred in acetonitrile (100 ml), and a hydrolysis adjusting solution (1.25 g) of a silane coupling agent (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd .: X12-984S) was further added to the acetonitrile. .. The acetonitrile was stirred at room temperature for 3 hours for adsorption treatment. After the modified boron nitride in acetonitrile is collected by filtration, the removed modified boron nitride is washed with acetonitrile (100 ml) and dried in an oven at 40 ° C. to obtain surface-modified boron nitride 8 (also referred to as "BN8"). I got).
(製造方法9(BN9の製造))
 窒化ホウ素(上述のHP-40、50g)を1000℃で1時間加熱して変性窒化ホウ素を得た。得られた変性窒化ホウ素を水(500ml)でリスラリー洗浄、ろ過した後、アセトニトリル(100ml)中で攪拌し、上記アセトニトリル中に更に、シランカップリング剤(信越化学工業社製:KBM-403)の加水分解調整液(1.25g)を添加した。上記アセトニトリルを室温で3時間攪拌して、吸着処理を行った。上記アセトニトリル中の変性窒化ホウ素をろ取した後、ろ取された変性窒化ホウ素を、アセトニトリル(100ml)で洗浄し、40℃のオーブンで乾燥させることで、表面修飾窒化ホウ素9(「BN9」ともいう)を得た。
 なお、「KBM-403」は、3-グリシドキシプロピルトリメトキシシランである。
(Manufacturing method 9 (Manufacturing of BN9))
Boron nitride (HP-40, 50 g described above) was heated at 1000 ° C. for 1 hour to obtain modified boron nitride. The obtained modified boron nitride was washed with water (500 ml), filtered, and then stirred in acetonitrile (100 ml). Further, a silane coupling agent (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd .: KBM-403) was added to the acetonitrile. A hydrolysis control solution (1.25 g) was added. The acetonitrile was stirred at room temperature for 3 hours for adsorption treatment. After the modified boron nitride in acetonitrile is collected by filtration, the removed modified boron nitride is washed with acetonitrile (100 ml) and dried in an oven at 40 ° C. to obtain surface-modified boron nitride 9 (also referred to as "BN9"). I got).
In addition, "KBM-403" is 3-glycidoxypropyltrimethoxysilane.
(製造方法10(BN10の製造))
 窒化ホウ素(上述のHP-40、50g)を900℃で4時間加熱して変性窒化ホウ素を得た。得られた変性窒化ホウ素を水(500ml)でリスラリー洗浄、ろ過した後、アセトニトリル(100ml)中で攪拌し、上記アセトニトリル中に更に、シランカップリング剤(信越化学工業社製:KBM-403)の加水分解調整液(1.25g)を添加した。上記アセトニトリルを室温で3時間攪拌して、吸着処理を行った。上記アセトニトリル中の変性窒化ホウ素をろ取した後、ろ取された変性窒化ホウ素を、アセトニトリル(100ml)で洗浄し、40℃のオーブンで乾燥させることで、表面修飾窒化ホウ素10(「BN10」ともいう)を得た。
(Manufacturing method 10 (Manufacturing of BN10))
Boron nitride (HP-40, 50 g described above) was heated at 900 ° C. for 4 hours to obtain modified boron nitride. The obtained modified boron nitride was washed with water (500 ml), filtered, and then stirred in acetonitrile (100 ml). Further, a silane coupling agent (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd .: KBM-403) was added to the acetonitrile. A hydrolysis control solution (1.25 g) was added. The acetonitrile was stirred at room temperature for 3 hours for adsorption treatment. After the modified boron nitride in acetonitrile is collected by filtration, the removed modified boron nitride is washed with acetonitrile (100 ml) and dried in an oven at 40 ° C. to obtain surface-modified boron nitride 10 (also referred to as "BN10"). I got).
<硬化促進剤>
 以下に、実施例及び比較例で使用した硬化促進剤を示す。
 なお、各化合物名の後においてかっこ書きで示す値は、各化合物の分子量を示す。
・C-1:トリスオルトトリルホスフィン(304.37)
・C-2:トリフェニルホスフィン(262.29)
・C-3:2PHZ-PW(2-フェニル-4,5-ジヒドロキシメチルイミダゾール)(204.23)
・C-4:TPP-MK(テトラフェニルホスホニウムテトラ-p-トリルボラート)(658.62)
・C-5:(S)-(-)-BINAP((S)-(-)-2,2’-ビス(ジフェニルホスフィノ)-1,1’-ビナフチル)(622.69)
・C-6:(S)-(-)-TolBINAP((S)-(-)-2,2’-ビス(ジ-p-トリルホスフィノ)-1,1’-ビナフチル)(678.80)
・C-7:(S)-(-)-XylBINAP((S)-(-)-2,2’-ビス[ジ(3,5-キシリル)ホスフィノ]-1,1’-ビナフチル)(734.90)
・C-8:(R)-(+)-BINAP((R)-(+)-2,2’-ビス(ジフェニルホスフィノ)-1,1’-ビナフチル)(622.69)
・C-9:(R)-(+)-TolBINAP((R)-(+)-2,2’-ビス(ジ-p-トリルホスフィノ)-1,1’-ビナフチル)(678.80)
・C-10:(R)-(+)-XylBINAP((R)-(+)-2,2’-ビス[ジ(3,5-キシリル)ホスフィノ]-1,1’-ビナフチル)(734.90)
・C-11:(±)-BINAP((±)-2,2’-ビス(ジフェニルホスフィノ)-1,1’-ビナフチル)(622.69)
<Curing accelerator>
The curing accelerators used in Examples and Comparative Examples are shown below.
The values shown in parentheses after each compound name indicate the molecular weight of each compound.
C-1: Tris orthotrilphosphine (304.37)
C-2: Triphenylphosphine (262.29)
C-3: 2PHZ-PW (2-phenyl-4,5-dihydroxymethylimidazole) (204.23)
C-4: TPP-MK (Tetraphenylphosphonium Tetra-p-Trillbolate) (658.62)
C-5: (S)-(-)-BINAP ((S)-(-)-2,2'-bis (diphenylphosphino) -1,1'-binaphthyl) (622.69)
C-6: (S)-(-)-TolbINAP ((S)-(-)-2,2'-bis (di-p-tolylphosphino) -1,1'-binaphthyl) (678.80)
C-7: (S)-(-)-XylBINAP ((S)-(-)-2,2'-bis [di (3,5-kisilyl) phosphino] -1,1'-binaphthyl) (734) .90)
C-8: (R)-(+)-BINAP ((R)-(+) -2,2'-bis (diphenylphosphino) -1,1'-binaphthyl) (622.69)
C-9: (R)-(+)-TolbINAP ((R)-(+) -2,2'-bis (di-p-tolylphosphino) -1,1'-binaphthyl) (678.80)
C-10: (R)-(+)-XylBINAP ((R)-(+) -2,2'-bis [di (3,5-kisilyl) phosphino] -1,1'-binaphthyl) (734) .90)
C-11: (±) -BINAP ((±) -2,2'-bis (diphenylphosphino) -1,1'-binaphthyl) (622.69)
<イオン捕捉剤>
 以下に、実施例及び比較例で使用したイオン捕捉剤を示す。
・F-1:KW-2000、酸化アルミニウム/酸化マグネシウム固溶体(Mg0.7Al0.31.15)、協和化学工業社製
・F-2:KW-2100、酸化アルミニウム/酸化マグネシウム固溶体、協和化学工業社製
・F-3:KW-2200、酸化アルミニウム/酸化マグネシウム固溶体、協和化学工業社製
・F-4:IXE-600、Bi,Sb系、東亞合成社製
・F-5:IXE-700F、Mg,Al系、東亞合成社製
・F-6:IXE-6107、Zr,Bi系、東亞合成社製
<Ion scavenger>
The ion scavengers used in Examples and Comparative Examples are shown below.
・ F-1: KW-2000, aluminum oxide / magnesium oxide solid solution (Mg 0.7 Al 0.3 O 1.15 ), manufactured by Kyowa Chemical Industry Co., Ltd. ・ F-2: KW-2100, aluminum oxide / magnesium oxide solid solution , Kyowa Kagaku Kogyo Co., Ltd. ・ F-3: KW-2200, Aluminum oxide / magnesium oxide solid solution, Kyowa Kagaku Kogyo Co., Ltd. ・ F-4: IXE-600, Bi, Sb system, Toa Synthetic Co., Ltd. ・ F-5: IXE-700F, Mg, Al series, manufactured by Toa Synthetic Co., Ltd. ・ F-6: IXE-6107, Zr, Bi series, manufactured by Toa Synthetic Co., Ltd.
<溶媒>
 溶媒として、シクロペンタノンを使用した。
<Solvent>
Cyclopentanone was used as the solvent.
〔組成物の調製〕
 溶媒、フェノール化合物、所望に応じて使用するエポキシ化合物、所望に応じて使用するイオン捕捉剤、特定化合物(マレイミド化合物及び/又はシアネート化合物)、並びに、硬化促進剤の順で混合した後、無機物又は表面修飾無機物を添加した。得られた混合物を自転公転ミキサー(THINKY社製、あわとり練太郎ARE-310)で5分間処理して、各実施例又は比較例の組成物(硬化性組成物)を得た。
[Preparation of composition]
After mixing the solvent, phenol compound, epoxy compound used as desired, ion scavenger used as desired, specific compound (maleimide compound and / or cyanate compound), and curing accelerator in this order, an inorganic substance or Surface-modified inorganic substances were added. The obtained mixture was treated with a rotation revolution mixer (manufactured by THINKY, Awatori Rentaro ARE-310) for 5 minutes to obtain a composition (curable composition) of each Example or Comparative Example.
 ここで、溶媒の添加量は、組成物の固形分濃度が50~80質量%になる量とした。
 なお、組成物の固形分濃度は、組成物の粘度がそれぞれ同程度になるように、上記範囲内で組成物ごとに調整した。
 組成物がフェノール化合物とエポキシ化合物との両方を含む場合、エポキシ化合物とフェノール化合物との合計含有量が組成物の全固形分に対して表1中の「合計量(質量%)」欄に示す量になり、かつ、エポキシ化合物とフェノール化合物とはそれぞれ当量(エポキシ化合物のエポキシ基の数と、フェノール化合物の水酸基の数とが等しくなる量)になるように添加量を調整した。
 組成物がフェノール化合物とエポキシ化合物との一方のみを含む場合、その一方の成分の含有量が組成物の全固形分に対して表1中の「合計量(質量%)」欄に示す量になるように添加量を調整した。
 組成物中、硬化促進剤、無機物(無機窒化物、無機酸化物、又は、その表面修飾物)、イオン捕捉剤、マレイミド化合物、及び、シアネート化合物の量は、それぞれ、組成物の全固形分に対して、表1中の各マスにおけるカッコ内に示す量(質量%)になるようにした。
Here, the amount of the solvent added was set so that the solid content concentration of the composition was 50 to 80% by mass.
The solid content concentration of the composition was adjusted for each composition within the above range so that the viscosities of the compositions were about the same.
When the composition contains both the phenol compound and the epoxy compound, the total content of the epoxy compound and the phenol compound is shown in the "total amount (% by mass)" column in Table 1 with respect to the total solid content of the composition. The addition amount was adjusted so that the amount was equal to that of the epoxy compound and the phenol compound (the number of epoxy groups in the epoxy compound was equal to the number of hydroxyl groups in the phenol compound).
When the composition contains only one of the phenol compound and the epoxy compound, the content of one of the components is the amount shown in the "total amount (% by mass)" column in Table 1 with respect to the total solid content of the composition. The amount of addition was adjusted so as to be.
In the composition, the amounts of the curing accelerator, the inorganic substance (inorganic nitride, inorganic oxide, or its surface modifier), the ion scavenger, the maleimide compound, and the cyanate compound are respectively added to the total solid content of the composition. On the other hand, the amount (% by mass) shown in parentheses in each cell in Table 1 was set.
[評価]
〔半硬化シート(半硬化膜)の作製〕
 マイクロメーター付きアプリケーターを用いて、離型処理したPETフィルム(PET756501リンテック社製、膜厚75μm)の離型面上に、調製した組成物を均一に塗布し、120℃で4分間乾燥して半硬化シート(半硬化膜)を作製した。
[evaluation]
[Preparation of semi-cured sheet (semi-cured film)]
Using an applicator with a micrometer, the prepared composition was uniformly applied on the release surface of the release-treated PET film (PET756501 Lintec, film thickness 75 μm), dried at 120 ° C. for 4 minutes, and half. A cured sheet (semi-cured film) was prepared.
〔熱伝導シートの作製〕
 得られた半硬化シートの上記PETフィルムとは反対側の表面に、離型処理したPETフィルムを被せ、空気下で熱プレス(熱板温度180℃、圧力20MPaで5分間処理)した。その後、常圧下で180℃、90分加熱処理して樹脂シートを得た。樹脂シートの両面にあるPETフィルムを剥がし、平均膜厚120μmの熱伝導シート(熱伝導材料)を得た。
[Making a heat conductive sheet]
The surface of the obtained semi-cured sheet opposite to the PET film was covered with a release-treated PET film and heat-pressed under air (hot plate temperature 180 ° C., pressure 20 MPa for 5 minutes). Then, it was heat-treated at 180 ° C. for 90 minutes under normal pressure to obtain a resin sheet. The PET films on both sides of the resin sheet were peeled off to obtain a heat conductive sheet (heat conductive material) having an average film thickness of 120 μm.
〔熱伝導率の評価方法〕
(1)NETZSCH社製の「LFA467」を用いて、レーザーフラッシュ法で熱伝導シートの厚み方向の熱拡散率を測定した。
(2)メトラー・トレド社製の天秤「XS204」を用いて、熱伝導シートの比重をアルキメデス法(「固体比重測定キット」使用)で測定した。
(3)セイコーインスツル社製の「DSC320/6200」を用い、10℃/分の昇温条件の下、25℃における熱伝導シートの比熱を求めた。
(4)得られた熱拡散率に比重及び比熱を乗じて、熱伝導シートの熱伝導率を算出した。
[Evaluation method of thermal conductivity]
(1) Using "LFA467" manufactured by NETZSCH, the thermal diffusivity in the thickness direction of the heat conductive sheet was measured by a laser flash method.
(2) The specific gravity of the heat conductive sheet was measured by the Archimedes method (using the "solid specific gravity measurement kit") using the balance "XS204" manufactured by Metler Toledo.
(3) Using "DSC320 / 6200" manufactured by Seiko Instruments Inc., the specific heat of the heat conductive sheet at 25 ° C. was determined under the heating condition of 10 ° C./min.
(4) The obtained thermal diffusivity was multiplied by the specific gravity and the specific heat to calculate the thermal conductivity of the heat conductive sheet.
 熱伝導シートの熱伝導率を、下記基準に照らして区分し、各実施例又は比較例の組成物を用いて得られた熱伝導シート(熱伝導材料)の熱伝導性の評価とした。
A+:17W/mK以上
A :15W/mK以上17W/mK未満
B :13W/mK以上15W/mK未満
C :10W/mK以上13W/mK未満
D :10W/mK未満
The thermal conductivity of the heat conductive sheet was classified according to the following criteria, and the heat conductivity of the heat conductive sheet (heat conductive material) obtained by using the composition of each Example or Comparative Example was evaluated.
A +: 17W / mK or more A: 15W / mK or more and less than 17W / mK B: 13W / mK or more and less than 15W / mK C: 10W / mK or more and less than 13W / mK D: 10W / mK or less
〔Tg(耐熱性)の評価〕
 得られた熱伝導シートのTgを測定した。
 測定には、ユービーエム社製の動的粘弾性測定装置「Rheogel-E4000」を使用し、周波数1HzのときのtanδピークをTgとした。昇温速度は、5℃/minで、25~300℃の範囲で測定を実施した。
[Evaluation of Tg (heat resistance)]
The Tg of the obtained heat conductive sheet was measured.
For the measurement, a dynamic viscoelasticity measuring device "Rheogel-E4000" manufactured by UBM was used, and the tanδ peak at a frequency of 1 Hz was defined as Tg. The temperature rising rate was 5 ° C./min, and the measurement was carried out in the range of 25 to 300 ° C.
 熱伝導シートのTgを、下記基準に照らして区分し、各実施例又は比較例の組成物を用いて得られた熱伝導シート(熱伝導材料)の耐熱性の評価とした。
A+:180℃以上
A :170℃以上180℃未満
B :160℃以上170℃未満
C :150℃以上160℃未満
D :150℃未満
The Tg of the heat conductive sheet was classified according to the following criteria, and the heat resistance of the heat conductive sheet (heat conductive material) obtained by using the composition of each Example or Comparative Example was evaluated.
A +: 180 ° C or higher A: 170 ° C or higher and lower than 180 ° C B: 160 ° C or higher and lower than 170 ° C C: 150 ° C or higher and lower than 160 ° C D: Less than 150 ° C
〔絶縁性の評価〕
 85℃、85%RHの環境下で試料(上述の方法で作製した膜厚120μmの熱伝導シート)に1kVの電圧を印加して、試料が絶縁破壊されるまでの時間を計測した。
 試料が絶縁破壊されるまでの時間を、下記基準に照らして区分し、各実施例又は比較例の組成物を用いて得られた熱伝導シート(熱伝導材料)の絶縁性の評価とした。
A:500時間以上
B:100時間以上500時間未満
C:50時間以上100時間未満
D:50時間未満
[Evaluation of insulation]
A voltage of 1 kV was applied to the sample (a heat conductive sheet having a film thickness of 120 μm produced by the above method) in an environment of 85 ° C. and 85% RH, and the time until the sample was dielectrically broken down was measured.
The time until the sample was dielectrically broken down was classified according to the following criteria, and the heat insulating property of the heat conductive sheet (heat conductive material) obtained by using the composition of each Example or Comparative Example was evaluated.
A: 500 hours or more B: 100 hours or more and less than 500 hours C: 50 hours or more and less than 100 hours D: less than 50 hours
〔吸湿性の評価〕
 得られた熱伝導シートの吸湿性を評価した。
 熱伝導シートを十分に除湿された乾燥機を用いて120℃で2時間乾燥させて、乾燥状態の熱伝導シートとした。乾燥状態の熱伝導シートを85℃、85RH%の環境下に24時間置いて、吸湿状態の熱伝導シートとした。
 これらの熱伝導シートの質量を下記式に照らして質量変化率を求め、下記区分に照らして熱伝導シートの吸湿性を評価した。質量変化率が小さいほど、吸湿性が抑制されていて好ましい。
  質量変化率(%)=(W2-W1)/W1×100
 W1:120℃の環境下で2時間乾燥させた後の乾燥状態の熱伝導シートの質量
 W2:乾燥状態の熱伝導シートを、85℃、85RH%の環境下に24時間おいた後の吸湿状態の熱伝導シートの質量
A :質量変化率が0.5%未満
B :質量変化率が0.5%以上0.7%未満
C :質量変化率が0.7%以上1.0%未満
D :質量変化率が1.0%以上
[Evaluation of hygroscopicity]
The hygroscopicity of the obtained heat conductive sheet was evaluated.
The heat conductive sheet was dried at 120 ° C. for 2 hours using a sufficiently dehumidified dryer to obtain a dried heat conductive sheet. The heat conductive sheet in a dry state was placed in an environment of 85 ° C. and 85 RH% for 24 hours to obtain a heat conductive sheet in a hygroscopic state.
The mass of these heat conductive sheets was compared with the following formula to determine the mass change rate, and the hygroscopicity of the heat conductive sheets was evaluated in light of the following categories. The smaller the mass change rate, the more the hygroscopicity is suppressed, which is preferable.
Mass change rate (%) = (W2-W1) / W1 × 100
W1: Mass of the heat conductive sheet in a dry state after being dried in an environment of 120 ° C. for 2 hours W2: Moisture absorption state after the heat conductive sheet in a dry state is placed in an environment of 85 ° C. and 85 RH% for 24 hours. Mass of heat conductive sheet A: Mass change rate is less than 0.5% B: Mass change rate is 0.5% or more and less than 0.7% C: Mass change rate is 0.7% or more and less than 1.0% D : Mass change rate is 1.0% or more
〔ハンダ耐熱性の評価〕
 得られた半硬化シートからPETフィルムを剥離した後、厚み2mmの銅基板と厚み0.15mmの銅箔に挟んで、空気下で熱プレス(熱板温度180℃、圧力20MPaで5分間処理)して、「銅基板-熱伝導シート-銅箔」の構成を有する積層体を得た。
 積層体における0.15mmの銅箔を、直径2cmの円形状にエッチング処理して、上記積層体を「銅基板-熱伝導シート-直径2cmの円形状の銅箔」の構成を有するハンダ耐熱性試験用のサンプルとした。
 上記サンプルに対して、300℃で3分加熱してから室温(25℃)にまで冷却する加熱処理を1回以上実施した。その後、1回以上の加熱処理をされた上記サンプルから、直径2cmの円形状の銅箔を剥離した。
 剥離したサンプルの破壊状態を目視で観察し、剥離した全面で熱伝導シートの凝集破壊が生じている場合は合格とし、「銅基板-熱伝導シート」間、及び/又は、「熱伝導シート-直径2cmの円形状の銅箔」間の一部又は全面で界面剥離が生じている場合は不合格とした。
 加熱処理の回数に対する合格及び不合格の関係性に基づき、下記区分に照らして熱伝導シートのハンダ耐熱性を評価した。
A :加熱処理を3回行っても合格であった
B :加熱処理を2回行っても合格であったが、3回行ったら不合格となった
C :加熱処理を1回行っても合格であったが、2回行ったら不合格となった
D :加熱処理を1回行った時点で不合格となった
[Evaluation of solder heat resistance]
After peeling the PET film from the obtained semi-cured sheet, it is sandwiched between a copper substrate with a thickness of 2 mm and a copper foil with a thickness of 0.15 mm, and heat pressed under air (treatment at a hot plate temperature of 180 ° C. and a pressure of 20 MPa for 5 minutes). Then, a laminated body having a structure of "copper substrate-heat conductive sheet-copper foil" was obtained.
The 0.15 mm copper foil in the laminate is etched into a circular shape with a diameter of 2 cm, and the laminate has a solder heat resistance having the structure of "copper substrate-heat conductive sheet-circular copper foil with a diameter of 2 cm". It was used as a test sample.
The above sample was heated at 300 ° C. for 3 minutes and then cooled to room temperature (25 ° C.) at least once. Then, a circular copper foil having a diameter of 2 cm was peeled off from the sample that had been heat-treated one or more times.
Visually observe the fracture state of the peeled sample, and if the heat conductive sheet is aggregated and broken on the entire peeled surface, pass the test, and pass between "copper substrate-heat conductive sheet" and / or "heat conductive sheet-". If interfacial peeling occurred in a part or the entire surface between the "circular copper foils with a diameter of 2 cm", it was rejected.
Based on the relationship between pass and fail with respect to the number of heat treatments, the solder heat resistance of the heat conductive sheet was evaluated in light of the following categories.
A: Passed even after 3 heat treatments B: Passed even after 2 heat treatments, but failed after 3 heat treatments C: Passed even after 1 heat treatment However, it failed when it was performed twice. D: It failed when the heat treatment was performed once.
〔ハンダ耐熱性IIの評価〕
 上記〔ハンダ耐熱性の評価〕において、加熱温度を300℃から320℃に変更した以外は、同様の手順で、ハンダ耐熱性IIを評価した。
[Evaluation of solder heat resistance II]
In the above [evaluation of solder heat resistance], the solder heat resistance II was evaluated by the same procedure except that the heating temperature was changed from 300 ° C to 320 ° C.
[結果]
 以下、表1を示す。
 表1には、各実施例又は比較例における組成物の固形分の配合と試験結果とを示す。
[result]
Table 1 is shown below.
Table 1 shows the composition of the solid content and the test results of the composition in each Example or Comparative Example.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000047
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000047
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000048
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000048
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000049
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000049
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000050
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000050
 表に示す結果より、本発明の組成物を使用すれば本発明の効果を実現できることが確認された。 From the results shown in the table, it was confirmed that the effect of the present invention can be realized by using the composition of the present invention.
 中でも、無機物が、実質的に窒化ホウ素及び無機系イオン捕捉剤のみを含む場合、本発明の効果がより優れることが確認された(実施例5、21、22の結果の比較等を参照)。 Among them, it was confirmed that the effect of the present invention is more excellent when the inorganic substance contains substantially only boron nitride and an inorganic ion scavenger (see comparison of results of Examples 5, 21 and 22).
 組成物が、表面修飾窒化ホウ素を含む場合、本発明の効果がより優れることが確認された(実施例5、24~28、54~58の結果の比較等を参照)。 It was confirmed that the effect of the present invention was more excellent when the composition contained surface-modified boron nitride (see comparison of results of Examples 5, 24-28, 54-58, etc.).
 硬化促進剤が、リン原子を含む化合物又はホスホニウム塩を含む場合、本発明の効果がより優れることが確認された(実施例2~5の結果の比較等を参照)。
 また、硬化促進剤が、一般式(P3)で表される化合物を含む場合、本発明の効果がより優れることが確認された(実施例3、59~65の結果の比較等を参照)。
It was confirmed that the effect of the present invention is more excellent when the curing accelerator contains a compound containing a phosphorus atom or a phosphonium salt (see comparison of results of Examples 2 to 5 and the like).
Further, it was confirmed that the effect of the present invention is more excellent when the curing accelerator contains a compound represented by the general formula (P3) (see Example 3, Comparison of Results of 59 to 65).
 マレイミド化合物が2つのマレイミド基を有することが場合、本発明の効果がより優れることが確認された(実施例3と51の結果の比較等を参照)。
 マレイミド化合物が、mが1であり、nが1であり、かつ、Lが炭素数3~15の2価の連結基である一般式(1)で表される化合物の場合、本発明の効果がより優れることが確認された(実施例5~9の結果の比較等を参照)。
It was confirmed that the effect of the present invention is more excellent when the maleimide compound has two maleimide groups (see comparison of the results of Examples 3 and 51, etc.).
When the maleimide compound is a compound represented by the general formula (1) in which m is 1, n is 1, and L 1 is a divalent linking group having 3 to 15 carbon atoms, the present invention is used. It was confirmed that the effect was superior (see comparison of the results of Examples 5 to 9 and the like).
 フェノール化合物がトリアジン骨格を有し、かつ、トリアジン骨格を有するフェノール化合物とトリアジン骨格を有するエポキシ化合物との合計含有量は、全フェノール化合物と全エポキシ化合物との合計含有量に対して5~80質量%である場合、本発明の効果がより優れることが確認された(実施例5、10~20の結果の比較等を参照)。 The phenol compound has a triazine skeleton, and the total content of the phenol compound having a triazine skeleton and the epoxy compound having a triazine skeleton is 5 to 80 mass with respect to the total content of the total phenol compound and the total epoxy compound. When it is%, it was confirmed that the effect of the present invention is more excellent (see comparison of results of Examples 5, 10 to 20 and the like).
 組成物の全固形分に対する無機物の含有量が83質量%以下である場合、本発明の効果がより優れることが確認された(実施例24と30との結果の比較等を参照)。 It was confirmed that the effect of the present invention was more excellent when the content of the inorganic substance in the total solid content of the composition was 83% by mass or less (see comparison of the results of Examples 24 and 30).
 マレイミド化合物の含有量が、エポキシ化合物とフェノール化合物との合計含有量に対して100質量%以下である場合、本発明の効果がより優れることが確認された(実施例24と29との結果の比較等を参照)。 It was confirmed that the effect of the present invention was more excellent when the content of the maleimide compound was 100% by mass or less with respect to the total content of the epoxy compound and the phenol compound (results of Examples 24 and 29). See comparison etc.).
 組成物がイオン捕捉剤を含む場合、本発明の効果がより優れることが確認された(実施例9、31、32の結果の比較等を参照)。 It was confirmed that the effect of the present invention was more excellent when the composition contained an ion scavenger (see comparison of results of Examples 9, 31 and 32, etc.).
 組成物のイオン捕捉剤が、マグネシウムとアルミニウムとの複合物、又は、ジルコニウムとビスマスとの複合物である場合、本発明の効果がより優れることが確認された(実施例9と31との比較、実施例24、33~36の結果の比較等を参照)。 It was confirmed that the effect of the present invention is more excellent when the ion scavenger of the composition is a composite of magnesium and aluminum or a composite of zirconium and bismuth (comparison with Examples 9 and 31). , Comparison of the results of Examples 24, 33-36, etc.).
 形成される熱伝導材料の吸湿の抑制性及びハンダ耐熱性がより優れる点から、エポキシ化合物は、ポリヒドロキシベンゼン型のグリシジルエーテル、ビスフェノールF型のグリシジルエーテル、棒状化合物、フェノキシ樹脂、又は、円盤状化合物を含むのが好ましいことが確認された(実施例5、11~20の結果の比較等を参照)。
 また、形成される熱伝導材料の吸湿の抑制性及びハンダ耐熱性がより優れる点から、エポキシ化合物として中心環がトリアジン環であるエポキシ化合物を含む場合、トリアジン骨格を有するフェノール化合物とトリアジン骨格を有するエポキシ化合物との合計含有量は、全フェノール化合物と全エポキシ化合物との合計含有量に対して5~80質量%であるのが好ましいことが確認された(実施例10と実施例20との結果の比較等を参照)。
The epoxy compound is a polyhydroxybenzene-type glycidyl ether, a bisphenol F-type glycidyl ether, a rod-shaped compound, a phenoxy resin, or a disk-shaped epoxy compound because the heat-conducting material formed is more excellent in suppressing moisture absorption and solder heat resistance. It was confirmed that it was preferable to include a compound (see Examples 5, 11 to 20 comparison of results, etc.).
Further, when the epoxy compound contains an epoxy compound having a triazine ring as the central ring, it has a phenol compound having a triazine skeleton and a triazine skeleton because the formed heat conductive material is more excellent in suppressing moisture absorption and solder heat resistance. It was confirmed that the total content of the epoxy compound is preferably 5 to 80% by mass with respect to the total content of the total phenol compound and the total epoxy compound (results of Examples 10 and 20). See comparison etc.).
 組成物の硬化促進剤の分子量が、250以上である場合、ハンダ耐熱性IIがより優れることが確認され、組成物の硬化促進剤の分子量が、430以上である場合、ハンダ耐熱性IIが更に優れることが確認された(実施例2~5、24、29、30、59~75の結果の比較等を参照)。 When the molecular weight of the curing accelerator of the composition is 250 or more, it is confirmed that the solder heat resistance II is more excellent, and when the molecular weight of the curing accelerator of the composition is 430 or more, the solder heat resistance II is further improved. It was confirmed to be excellent (see comparison of results of Examples 2 to 5, 24, 29, 30, 59 to 75, etc.).
<<試験Y>>
 以下に示す通り条件及び手順等に基づき、試験Y(実施例76以降)を実施した。
<< Test Y >>
Test Y (Example 76 or later) was carried out based on the conditions and procedures as shown below.
[組成物の調製]
 溶媒(シクロペンタノン)、フェノール化合物、エポキシ化合物、所望に応じて使用するイオン捕捉剤、特定化合物(マレイミド化合物)、及び、硬化促進剤の順で混合した後、無機物又は表面修飾無機物を添加した。得られた混合物を自転公転ミキサー(THINKY社製、あわとり練太郎ARE-310)で5分間処理して、各実施例の組成物(硬化性組成物)を得た。
[Preparation of composition]
After mixing the solvent (cyclopentanone), phenol compound, epoxy compound, ion scavenger to be used as desired, specific compound (maleimide compound), and curing accelerator in this order, an inorganic substance or a surface-modified inorganic substance was added. .. The obtained mixture was treated with a rotation revolution mixer (manufactured by THINKY, Awatori Rentaro ARE-310) for 5 minutes to obtain a composition (curable composition) of each example.
 ここで、溶媒の添加量は、組成物の固形分濃度が42.5体積%(質量基準にしていずれも52~58質量%の範囲内)になる量とした。
 なお、組成物の固形分濃度は、組成物の粘度がそれぞれ同程度になるように、上記範囲内で組成物ごとに調整した。
 エポキシ化合物とフェノール化合物との合計含有量は、組成物の全固形分に対して表2中の「合計量(質量%)」欄に示す量になり、かつ、エポキシ化合物のエポキシ基の合計数と、フェノール化合物の水酸基の合計数との比が、表2中の「[エポキシ/フェノール]官能基比」欄に示す比になるように調整した。
 なお、試験Yにおける実施例76の組成物の固形分の配合は、それぞれ、試験Xにおける実施例11の組成物の固形分の配合と同様である。
Here, the amount of the solvent added was such that the solid content concentration of the composition was 42.5% by volume (in the range of 52 to 58% by mass on a mass basis).
The solid content concentration of the composition was adjusted for each composition within the above range so that the viscosities of the compositions were about the same.
The total content of the epoxy compound and the phenol compound is the amount shown in the "total amount (% by mass)" column in Table 2 with respect to the total solid content of the composition, and the total number of epoxy groups of the epoxy compound. And the ratio to the total number of hydroxyl groups of the phenol compound was adjusted to be the ratio shown in the "[epoxide / phenol] functional group ratio" column in Table 2.
The composition of the solid content of the composition of Example 76 in Test Y is the same as the composition of the solid content of the composition of Example 11 in Test X, respectively.
[評価]
〔熱伝導率、Tg(耐熱性)、絶縁性の評価〕
 試験Xにおける〔熱伝導率の評価方法〕、〔Tg(耐熱性)の評価〕、及び、〔絶縁性の評価〕で示したのと同様の方法及び評価基準で、試験Yの各実施例の組成物についても、熱伝導率、Tg(耐熱性)、及び、絶縁性を、それぞれ試験し、評価した。
[evaluation]
[Evaluation of thermal conductivity, Tg (heat resistance), insulation]
In Test X, the same methods and evaluation criteria as shown in [Evaluation method of thermal conductivity], [Evaluation of Tg (heat resistance)], and [Evaluation of insulation] were used for each Example of Test Y. The composition was also tested and evaluated for thermal conductivity, Tg (heat resistance), and insulation, respectively.
〔ハンドリング性(経時保存性)の評価〕
 試験Xにおける〔半硬化シート(半硬化膜)の作製〕に示した方法で、試験Yの各実施例の組成物を用いた半硬化シート(半硬化膜)を作製した。
 得られた半硬化シートからPETフィルムを剥離し、作製直後から1時間、室温(25℃)で静置した。
 静置後の半硬化シートを、5cm×10cmの短冊状に切り出し、折り曲げ試験用のサンプルを作製した。得られたサンプルを、更に、23時間、室温(25℃)で静置した。
 静置後のサンプルについて、円筒形マンドレル試験機(コーテック株式会社製)を用いて、JIS K 5600-5-1に記載の方法に従って、折り曲げ試験を行った。それぞれの直径が25mm、及び、20mm、及び、16mmである円筒形マンドレルを使用し、サンプルが破断又は破損したときの折り曲げ試験に使用したマンドレルの直径から、下記の評価基準に基づいて作製1日後(24時間後)の半硬化シートのハンドリング性を評価した。
 サンプルが破損したときに使用したマンドレルの直径が短いほど、半硬化シートの経時保存後のハンドリング性がより優れる。
 破断時のマンドレルの直径を下記基準に照らして区分し、ハンドリング性(経時保存性)を評価した。
 A+:25mm、20mm及び16mmで破損がない
  A:25mm及び20mmで破損せず、16mmで破損
  B:25mmで破損せず、20mm及び16mmで破損
  C:25mm、20mm及び16mmで破損
[Evaluation of handleability (preservation over time)]
A semi-cured sheet (semi-cured film) using the composition of each example of Test Y was prepared by the method shown in [Preparation of semi-cured sheet (semi-cured film)] in Test X.
The PET film was peeled off from the obtained semi-cured sheet and allowed to stand at room temperature (25 ° C.) for 1 hour immediately after production.
The semi-cured sheet after standing was cut into strips of 5 cm × 10 cm to prepare a sample for bending test. The obtained sample was further allowed to stand at room temperature (25 ° C.) for 23 hours.
The sample after standing was subjected to a bending test using a cylindrical mandrel testing machine (manufactured by Cortec Co., Ltd.) according to the method described in JIS K 5600-5-1. Using cylindrical mandrel with diameters of 25 mm, 20 mm, and 16 mm, respectively, from the diameter of the mandrel used for the bending test when the sample was broken or broken, one day after preparation based on the following evaluation criteria. The handleability of the semi-cured sheet (after 24 hours) was evaluated.
The shorter the diameter of the mandrel used when the sample is damaged, the better the handling of the semi-cured sheet after storage over time.
The diameter of the mandrel at the time of breakage was classified according to the following criteria, and the handleability (preservability over time) was evaluated.
A +: No damage at 25 mm, 20 mm and 16 mm A: No damage at 25 mm and 20 mm, damage at 16 mm B: No damage at 25 mm, damage at 20 mm and 16 mm C: Damage at 25 mm, 20 mm and 16 mm
[結果]
 以下、表2を示す。
 表2には、各実施例における組成物の固形分の配合と試験結果とを示す。
 表中、エポキシ化合物の「種類」欄では、エポキシ化合物を複数種類使用する場合において、各エポキシ化合物の含有量の質量比を「X/Y」の形式で示した。
 表中、「粘度(mPa・s,25℃)」欄は、使用したエポキシ化合物の、25℃における粘度を示す。粘度の測定方法は、明細書中に示した通りである。
 「[エポキシ/フェノール]官能基比」欄は、組成物中における、エポキシ化合物のエポキシ基の合計数と、フェノール化合物の水酸基の合計数との比(上記エポキシ基の合計数/上記水酸基の合計数)を示す。
[result]
Table 2 is shown below.
Table 2 shows the composition of the solid content and the test results of the composition in each example.
In the "Type" column of the epoxy compound in the table, the mass ratio of the content of each epoxy compound is shown in the form of "X / Y" when a plurality of types of epoxy compounds are used.
In the table, the "Viscosity (mPa · s, 25 ° C.)" column indicates the viscosity of the used epoxy compound at 25 ° C. The method for measuring the viscosity is as shown in the specification.
In the "[epoxide / phenol] functional group ratio" column, the ratio of the total number of epoxy groups of the epoxy compound to the total number of hydroxyl groups of the phenol compound in the composition (total number of the epoxy groups / total of the hydroxyl groups). Number) is shown.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000051
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000051
 試験Yにおいても、本発明の組成物を使用すれば熱伝導性及び耐熱性に優れた熱伝導材料を形成できることが確認された。また、本発明の組成物を用いて形成された熱伝導材料は、絶縁性にも優れることが確認された。 Also in Test Y, it was confirmed that if the composition of the present invention is used, a heat conductive material having excellent heat conductivity and heat resistance can be formed. It was also confirmed that the heat conductive material formed by using the composition of the present invention has excellent insulating properties.
 また、エポキシ化合物が、低粘度エポキシ化合物を含む場合、組成物を用いて形成される半硬化膜のハンドリング性がより優れることが確認された。
(実施例80、91の結果の比較などを参照)
Further, it was confirmed that when the epoxy compound contains a low-viscosity epoxy compound, the handling property of the semi-cured film formed by using the composition is more excellent.
(See comparison of results of Examples 80 and 91, etc.)
 得られる熱伝導材料の耐熱性(Tg)がより優れる点で、エポキシ化合物が、芳香環基を有するエポキシ化合物であること、又は、Xが1~3の整数である一般式(E3)で表されるエポキシ化合物であることが好ましく、芳香環基を有するエポキシ化合物であることがより好ましいことが確認された。
(実施例77、79、88、90の結果の比較、実施例80、89、91の結果の比較などを参照)。
In that the heat resistance (Tg) of the obtained heat conductive material is more excellent, the epoxy compound is an epoxy compound having an aromatic ring group, or is represented by the general formula (E3) in which X is an integer of 1 to 3. It was confirmed that the epoxy compound to be used is preferable, and the epoxy compound having an aromatic ring group is more preferable.
(See Comparison of Results of Examples 77, 79, 88, 90, Comparison of Results of Examples 80, 89, 91, etc.).
得られる熱伝導剤材料の熱伝導性、及び/又は、絶縁性がより優れる点からは、マレイミド化合物の含有量は、組成物の全固形分に対して、6質量%以上が好ましいことが確認された(実施例77、78の結果の比較などを参照)。 It was confirmed that the content of the maleimide compound is preferably 6% by mass or more with respect to the total solid content of the composition from the viewpoint of more excellent thermal conductivity and / or insulating property of the obtained thermal conductive agent material. (See Comparison of Results in Examples 77, 78, etc.).
 半硬化膜のハンドリング性、及び/又は、得られる熱伝導材料の耐熱性(Tg)がより優れる点で、フェノール化合物に含まれる合計の水酸基の数に対する、エポキシ化合物に含まれる合計のエポキシ基の数との比(エポキシ基の数/水酸基の数)は、1.1/1.0~3.0/1.0であることが好ましく、1.2/1.0~2.0/1.0であることがより好ましく、1.3/1.0~1.8/1.0であることが更に好ましいことが確認された。
(実施例85~87の結果の比較、実施例77と84の結果の比較、実施例78と85の結果の比較、等を参照)。
The total number of epoxy groups contained in the epoxy compound relative to the total number of hydroxyl groups contained in the phenol compound in that the handling property of the semi-cured film and / or the heat resistance (Tg) of the obtained heat conductive material is more excellent. The ratio to the number (number of epoxy groups / number of hydroxyl groups) is preferably 1.1 / 1.0 to 3.0 / 1.0, and 1.2 / 1.0 to 2.0 / 1. It was confirmed that the value is more preferably 1.0, and the value is further preferably 1.3 / 1.0 to 1.8 / 1.0.
(See Comparison of Results of Examples 85-87, Comparison of Results of Examples 77 and 84, Comparison of Results of Examples 78 and 85, etc.).

Claims (21)

  1.  フェノール化合物と、
     1つ以上のマレイミド基を有するマレイミド化合物、及び、1つ以上のシアネート基を有するシアネート化合物の一方又は両方と、
     無機物と、を含み、
     前記無機物が、無機窒化物を含む、硬化性組成物。
    Phenolic compounds and
    One or both of a maleimide compound having one or more maleimide groups and a cyanate compound having one or more cyanate groups.
    Inorganic, including
    A curable composition in which the inorganic substance contains an inorganic nitride.
  2.  前記マレイミド化合物を含み、
     前記マレイミド化合物が、一般式(1)で表される化合物である、請求項1に記載の硬化性組成物。
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001

     一般式(1)中、mは、0又は1を表す。
     nは、0又は1を表す。
     R及びRは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子又は置換基を表す。
     Lは、2価の連結基を表す。
    Contains the maleimide compound
    The curable composition according to claim 1, wherein the maleimide compound is a compound represented by the general formula (1).
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001

    In the general formula (1), m represents 0 or 1.
    n represents 0 or 1.
    R 1 and R 2 independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
    L 1 represents a divalent linking group.
  3.  前記一般式(1)中、mが1を表し、nが1を表し、Lで表される前記2価の連結基の炭素数が3~15である、請求項2に記載の硬化性組成物。 The curability according to claim 2, wherein in the general formula (1), m represents 1, n represents 1 , and the divalent linking group represented by L1 has 3 to 15 carbon atoms. Composition.
  4.  前記マレイミド化合物を含み、
     前記マレイミド化合物が、2つの前記マレイミド基を有する、請求項1~3のいずれか1項に記載の硬化性組成物。
    Contains the maleimide compound
    The curable composition according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the maleimide compound has two maleimide groups.
  5.  前記無機物が、窒化ホウ素を含む、請求項1~4のいずれか1項に記載の硬化性組成物。 The curable composition according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the inorganic substance contains boron nitride.
  6.  前記窒化ホウ素が、平均粒径が20μm以上である凝集状窒化ホウ素を含む、請求項5に記載の硬化性組成物。 The curable composition according to claim 5, wherein the boron nitride contains aggregated boron nitride having an average particle size of 20 μm or more.
  7.  更に、表面修飾剤を含み、
     前記窒化ホウ素が、前記窒化ホウ素の表面上に吸着した前記表面修飾剤とともに、表面修飾窒化ホウ素を構成している、請求項5又は6に記載の硬化性組成物。
    In addition, it contains a surface modifier and
    The curable composition according to claim 5 or 6, wherein the boron nitride constitutes a surface-modified boron nitride together with the surface modifier adsorbed on the surface of the boron nitride.
  8.  更に、エポキシ化合物を含む、請求項1~7のいずれか1項に記載の硬化性組成物。 The curable composition according to any one of claims 1 to 7, further comprising an epoxy compound.
  9.  前記マレイミド化合物を含み、かつ、
     前記エポキシ化合物が、25℃における粘度が1000mPa・s未満のエポキシ化合物を含む、請求項8に記載の硬化性組成物。
    Contains the maleimide compound and
    The curable composition according to claim 8, wherein the epoxy compound contains an epoxy compound having a viscosity at 25 ° C. of less than 1000 mPa · s.
  10.  前記マレイミド化合物を含み、かつ、
     前記硬化性組成物中、前記フェノール化合物に含まれる合計の水酸基の数に対する、前記エポキシ化合物に含まれる合計のエポキシ基の数との比が、1.2/1.0~2.0/1.0である、請求項8又は9に記載の硬化性組成物。
    Contains the maleimide compound and
    The ratio of the total number of hydroxyl groups contained in the phenol compound to the total number of epoxy groups contained in the epoxy compound in the curable composition is 1.2 / 1.0 to 2.0 / 1. The curable composition according to claim 8 or 9, which is 0.0.
  11.  前記フェノール化合物がトリアジン骨格を有するフェノール化合物を含むこと、及び、前記エポキシ化合物がトリアジン骨格を有するエポキシ化合物を含むこと、の少なくとも一方の要件を満たす、請求項8~10のいずれか1項に記載の硬化性組成物。 The invention according to any one of claims 8 to 10, wherein the phenol compound satisfies at least one of the requirements that the phenol compound contains a phenol compound having a triazine skeleton and the epoxy compound contains an epoxy compound having a triazine skeleton. Curable composition.
  12.  更に、硬化促進剤を含む、請求項1~11のいずれか1項に記載の硬化性組成物。 The curable composition according to any one of claims 1 to 11, further comprising a curing accelerator.
  13.  前記硬化促進剤が、リン原子を含む化合物を含む、請求項12に記載の硬化性組成物。 The curable composition according to claim 12, wherein the curing accelerator contains a compound containing a phosphorus atom.
  14.  前記硬化促進剤が、ホスホニウム塩を含む、請求項12又は13に記載の硬化性組成物。 The curable composition according to claim 12 or 13, wherein the curing accelerator contains a phosphonium salt.
  15.  前記硬化促進剤の分子量が、430以上である、請求項12~14のいずれか1項に記載の硬化性組成物。 The curable composition according to any one of claims 12 to 14, wherein the curing accelerator has a molecular weight of 430 or more.
  16.  前記硬化促進剤が、一般式(P3)で表される化合物を含む、請求項12又は13に記載の硬化性組成物。
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002

     一般式(P3)中、Rp31~Rp34は、それぞれ独立に、置換基を有していてもよいフェニル基を表す。
    The curable composition according to claim 12, wherein the curing accelerator contains a compound represented by the general formula (P3).
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002

    In the general formula (P3), R p31 to R p34 each independently represent a phenyl group which may have a substituent.
  17.  更に、イオン捕捉剤を含む、請求項1~16のいずれか1項に記載の硬化性組成物。 The curable composition according to any one of claims 1 to 16, further comprising an ion scavenger.
  18.  請求項1~17のいずれか1項に記載の硬化性組成物を硬化して得られる、熱伝導材料。 A heat conductive material obtained by curing the curable composition according to any one of claims 1 to 17.
  19.  請求項18に記載の熱伝導材料からなる、熱伝導シート。 A heat conductive sheet made of the heat conductive material according to claim 18.
  20.  下記式で求められる質量変化率が、1.0%未満となる、請求項19に記載の熱伝導シート。
      質量変化率(%)=(W2-W1)/W1×100
     W1:120℃の環境下で2時間乾燥させた後の乾燥状態の熱伝導シートの質量
     W2:前記乾燥状態の熱伝導シートを85℃、85RH%の環境下に24時間おいた後の、吸湿状態の熱伝導シートの質量
    The heat conductive sheet according to claim 19, wherein the mass change rate obtained by the following formula is less than 1.0%.
    Mass change rate (%) = (W2-W1) / W1 × 100
    W1: Mass of the heat-conducting sheet in a dry state after being dried in an environment of 120 ° C. for 2 hours W2: Moisture absorption after the heat-conducting sheet in a dry state is placed in an environment of 85 ° C. and 85 RH% for 24 hours. The mass of the heat-conducting sheet in the state
  21.  デバイスと、前記デバイス上に配置された請求項19又は20に記載の熱伝導シートを含む熱伝導層とを有する、熱伝導層付きデバイス。 A device with a heat conductive layer having a device and a heat conductive layer including the heat conductive sheet according to claim 19 or 20 arranged on the device.
PCT/JP2021/033948 2020-10-16 2021-09-15 Curable composition, thermally conductive material, thermally conductive sheet, and device with thermally conductive layer WO2022080078A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2022557294A JPWO2022080078A1 (en) 2020-10-16 2021-09-15

Applications Claiming Priority (8)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2020-174891 2020-10-16
JP2020174891 2020-10-16
JP2020-203648 2020-12-08
JP2020203648 2020-12-08
JP2021024526 2021-02-18
JP2021-024526 2021-02-18
JP2021-039854 2021-03-12
JP2021039854 2021-03-12

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2022080078A1 true WO2022080078A1 (en) 2022-04-21

Family

ID=81209032

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2021/033948 WO2022080078A1 (en) 2020-10-16 2021-09-15 Curable composition, thermally conductive material, thermally conductive sheet, and device with thermally conductive layer

Country Status (3)

Country Link
JP (1) JPWO2022080078A1 (en)
TW (1) TW202229505A (en)
WO (1) WO2022080078A1 (en)

Citations (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2013006893A (en) * 2011-06-22 2013-01-10 Hitachi Chemical Co Ltd High thermal conductivity resin composition, high thermal conductivity cured product, adhesive film, sealing film, and semiconductor device using them
JP2014005359A (en) * 2012-06-25 2014-01-16 Sumitomo Bakelite Co Ltd Epoxy resin composition and electronic component device
JP2014196403A (en) * 2013-03-29 2014-10-16 三菱電機株式会社 Thermosetting resin composition, heat conductive resin sheet and its manufacturing method, and power module
JP2016044211A (en) * 2014-08-20 2016-04-04 日立化成株式会社 Resin composition for molded underfill and electronic component device
WO2018025933A1 (en) * 2016-08-02 2018-02-08 デンカ株式会社 Heat dissipation structure for electric circuit device
JP2019108517A (en) * 2017-12-15 2019-07-04 住友ベークライト株式会社 Thermosetting resin composition, and cured product thereof, laminate, metal base substrate and power module
JP2019196433A (en) * 2018-05-09 2019-11-14 住友ベークライト株式会社 Highly thermoconductive curable resin composition, cured product of the composition, laminate including resin layer provided by using the composition, and power module including the laminate

Patent Citations (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2013006893A (en) * 2011-06-22 2013-01-10 Hitachi Chemical Co Ltd High thermal conductivity resin composition, high thermal conductivity cured product, adhesive film, sealing film, and semiconductor device using them
JP2014005359A (en) * 2012-06-25 2014-01-16 Sumitomo Bakelite Co Ltd Epoxy resin composition and electronic component device
JP2014196403A (en) * 2013-03-29 2014-10-16 三菱電機株式会社 Thermosetting resin composition, heat conductive resin sheet and its manufacturing method, and power module
JP2016044211A (en) * 2014-08-20 2016-04-04 日立化成株式会社 Resin composition for molded underfill and electronic component device
WO2018025933A1 (en) * 2016-08-02 2018-02-08 デンカ株式会社 Heat dissipation structure for electric circuit device
JP2019108517A (en) * 2017-12-15 2019-07-04 住友ベークライト株式会社 Thermosetting resin composition, and cured product thereof, laminate, metal base substrate and power module
JP2019196433A (en) * 2018-05-09 2019-11-14 住友ベークライト株式会社 Highly thermoconductive curable resin composition, cured product of the composition, laminate including resin layer provided by using the composition, and power module including the laminate

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JPWO2022080078A1 (en) 2022-04-21
TW202229505A (en) 2022-08-01

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
KR102252723B1 (en) Surface-modified inorganic nitride, composition, thermally conductive material, device with thermally conductive layer
KR102338611B1 (en) Surface-modified inorganic nitride, composition, heat-conducting material, heat-conducting layer attachment device
KR102361265B1 (en) Surface-modified inorganic nitride, composition, heat-conducting material, heat-conducting layer attachment device
WO2021230096A1 (en) Method for producing modified boron nitride particles, modified boron nitride particles, composition for forming heat conductive material, heat conductive material, heat conductive sheet, and device with heat conductive layer
JP7191988B2 (en) COMPOSITION FOR HEAT CONDUCTIVE MATERIAL, HEAT CONDUCTIVE MATERIAL
KR102579529B1 (en) Composition, heat conductive sheet, heat conductive layer attachment device
WO2022054874A1 (en) Curable resin composition, thermally conductive material, thermally conductive sheet, and device with thermally conductive layer
WO2022080078A1 (en) Curable composition, thermally conductive material, thermally conductive sheet, and device with thermally conductive layer
WO2022124005A1 (en) Curable composition, thermally conductive material, thermally conductive sheet, and device with thermally conductive layer
WO2020195496A1 (en) Composition and heat conducting material
JP2023055252A (en) Curable composition, production method of composite particle, heat-conductive material, heat-conductive sheet, and device with heat-conductive layer
KR20220035462A (en) A composition for forming a heat-conducting material, a heat-conducting material, a heat-conducting sheet, and a device including a heat-conducting layer
JPWO2020158574A1 (en) Compositions for forming heat conductive materials, heat conductive materials, heat conductive sheets, devices with heat conductive layers
WO2021131669A1 (en) Boron nitride particles, composition for forming heat-conducting material, heat-conducting material, heat-conducting sheet, and device with heat-conducting layer
JP7440626B2 (en) Curable compositions, thermally conductive materials, thermally conductive sheets, devices with thermally conductive layers, compounds
WO2021010291A1 (en) Composition for forming thermally conductive material, thermally conductive material, and surface-modified inorganic substance
WO2022153807A1 (en) Curable composition, thermally conductive material, thermally conductive sheet, and device provided with thermally conductive layer
JP7064408B2 (en) Composition, heat conductive sheet, device with heat conductive layer
JP2022098178A (en) Heat-conductive material forming composition, heat-conductive material, heat-conductive sheet, and device with heat-conductive layer
WO2022137994A1 (en) Thermally conductive layer-forming sheet and method for producing thermally conductive layer-forming sheet
JP7136906B2 (en) Composition for forming thermally conductive material, thermally conductive material, thermally conductive sheet, device with thermally conductive layer, film
TWI838475B (en) Composition, thermal conductive material
JP7324283B2 (en) COMPOSITION FOR HEAT CONDUCTIVE MATERIAL, HEAT CONDUCTIVE MATERIAL, HEAT CONDUCTIVE SHEET, DEVICE WITH HEAT CONDUCTIVE LAYER
JP2021054922A (en) Composition for forming thermally conductive material, thermally conductive material, thermally conductive sheet, device with thermally conductive layer
JP2022061152A (en) Thermally conductive material forming composition, cured product, thermally conductive sheet, and device with thermally conductive layer

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 21879820

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2022557294

Country of ref document: JP

Kind code of ref document: A

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 21879820

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1